2005 Manual

4.
0
Version
Manual
User's
2005
SYSTEM
B&R
MASYS22005-E
B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual
MASYS22005-E
B&R SYSTEM 2005

User's Manual
Version:
Model No.:
4.0 (October 2003)

MASYS22005-E
We reserve the right to change the contents of this manual without warning. The information
contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication, however, Bernecker +
Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, expressed or implied, with regards
to the products or the documentation contained within this book. In addition, Bernecker + Rainer
Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable in the event of incidental or consequential
damages in connection with or arising from the furnishing, performance, or use of these
products. The software names, hardware names and trademarks used in this document are
registered by the respective companies.
B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0
Chapter 1: General Information
Chapter 2: Installation
Chapter 3: B&R 2005 Modules
Chapter 4: Accessories
Chapter 5: Standards and Certifications
Figure Index
Table Index
Index
Model Number Index
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: General Information ..................................................... 25

1. Manual History ....................................................................................................................
2. Safety Guidelines ................................................................................................................
2.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................
2.2 Intended Use .................................................................................................................
2.3 Transport and Storage ..................................................................................................
2.4 Installation .....................................................................................................................
2.5 Operation .......................................................................................................................
2.5.1 Protection against Touching Electrical Parts ..........................................................
2.6 Safety Notices ...............................................................................................................
3. Definition of Terms ..............................................................................................................
4. B&R SYSTEM 2000 Controller Generation ........................................................................
4.1 B&R SYSTEMS 2005 Characteristics ...........................................................................
4.1.1 Hardware ................................................................................................................
4.1.2 Software ..................................................................................................................
4.2 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) ..........................................................................
4.3 System Interface ...........................................................................................................
4.4 Industrial PC ..................................................................................................................
4.5 Network Capability ........................................................................................................
4.6 Software Concept ..........................................................................................................
4.7 Programming .................................................................................................................
5. B&R 2005 Control System ..................................................................................................
5.1 Modular Construction ....................................................................................................
5.1.1 Mounting the Backplane .........................................................................................
5.2 Combined System and I/O Bus .....................................................................................
5.3 Supply Voltage ..............................................................................................................
5.4 Single Row Terminal Block ...........................................................................................
5.5 Application Memory (APM) ............................................................................................
6. Expansions for B&R 2005 ...................................................................................................
6.1 Expansions of Local I/O Buses .....................................................................................
6.1.1 Expansion Master ...................................................................................................
6.1.2 Expansion Slave .....................................................................................................
6.1.3 Example of Local I/O Bus Expansion ......................................................................
6.2 Remote I/O Bus .............................................................................................................
6.2.1 Remote Master .......................................................................................................
6.2.2 Remote Slave .........................................................................................................
6.2.3 Cabling ....................................................................................................................
6.2.4 Example of Remote I/O System ..............................................................................
7. Combination Options ..........................................................................................................
7.1 Local I/O Bus .................................................................................................................
7.1.1 Connecting B&R 2005 to B&R 2010 .......................................................................
7.1.2 Connecting B&R 2010 to B&R 2005 .......................................................................
7.2 Remote I/O Bus .............................................................................................................
8. PROFIBUS Network ..........................................................................................................
25
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
37
37
37
37
38
39
39
39
40
40
41
Table of Contents
Chapter 2: Installation .................................................................... 43

1. Dimensions and Installation ................................................................................................
1.1 PLC Modules .................................................................................................................
1.2 Basic Module Design .....................................................................................................
1.3 Module Racks ................................................................................................................
1.4 Mounting Rail ................................................................................................................
1.5 Installation .....................................................................................................................
1.6 TB170 Terminal Block ...................................................................................................
2. System Configuration and Power Supply ...........................................................................
2.1 B&R SYSTEM 2005 ......................................................................................................
2.1.1 Local Bus without Expansion ..................................................................................
2.1.2 Local Bus with Expansion .......................................................................................
2.1.3 Remote I/O Bus ......................................................................................................
2.1.4 PROFIBUS ..............................................................................................................
2.1.5 RS485 Network .......................................................................................................
2.2 Configuring a Mixed System .........................................................................................
2.2.1 Bus Expansion ........................................................................................................
2.2.2 Remote I/O Bus ......................................................................................................
2.3 CAN Fieldbus ................................................................................................................
2.3.1 CAN Bus Features ..................................................................................................
2.3.2 Bus Length and Cable Type ...................................................................................
2.3.3 Wiring ......................................................................................................................
3. Grounding and Shielding Measures ...................................................................................
3.1 Grounding the Mounting Rail .........................................................................................
3.2 Grounding Terminal Strip ..............................................................................................
3.3 Cable Shield Grounding ................................................................................................
3.4 Using DSUB connectors ................................................................................................
4. Wiring ..................................................................................................................................
5. External Protective Circuit ..................................................................................................
6. Installation Guidelines .........................................................................................................
7. Storage and Storage Temperatures ...................................................................................
8. Environmental Temperature during Operation / Relative Humidity ....................................
43
43
44
45
46
46
50
54
54
54
56
58
61
61
62
62
63
64
64
64
66
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
75
77
77
Chapter 3: B&R 2005 Modules ....................................................... 79

1. Module Overview B&R 2005 ...............................................................................................
1.1 Modules in Alphabetical Order ......................................................................................
1.2 According to Groups ......................................................................................................
2. Module Racks .....................................................................................................................
2.1 BP15x ............................................................................................................................
2.1.1 General Information ................................................................................................
2.1.2 Order Data ..............................................................................................................
2.1.3 Technical Data ........................................................................................................
2.1.4 Backup Battery ........................................................................................................
2.1.5 Changing the Lithium Battery ..................................................................................
79
79
83
89
89
89
90
91
91
92
Table of Contents
3. Power Supply Modules ....................................................................................................... 94
3.1 General Information ....................................................................................................... 94
3.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 94
3.1.2 Slots ........................................................................................................................ 94
3.1.3 Current Limitation .................................................................................................... 94
3.1.4 10-pin Terminal Block ............................................................................................. 95
3.1.5 LED Displays .......................................................................................................... 95
3.1.6 READY Relay ......................................................................................................... 96
3.1.7 Fuse ........................................................................................................................ 97
3.1.8 Expansion Slot ........................................................................................................ 98
3.1.9 Expansion Slave (local expansion) ......................................................................... 98
3.1.10 Remote Slave (remote expansion) ....................................................................... 99
3.2 PS465 / PS477 ............................................................................................................ 100
3.2.1 Order Data ............................................................................................................ 100
3.2.2 Technical Data ...................................................................................................... 100
4. Bus Controller Modules .................................................................................................... 102
4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 102
4.2 EX150 .......................................................................................................................... 103
4.2.1 General Information .............................................................................................. 103
4.2.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................ 103
4.2.3 Technical Data ...................................................................................................... 104
4.2.4 Status LEDs .......................................................................................................... 105
4.2.5 Operational and Connection Elements ................................................................. 106
4.2.6 RS485 Interface .................................................................................................... 107
4.2.7 Cabling a Remote System .................................................................................... 108
4.2.8 Intelligent Slave ..................................................................................................... 108
4.2.9 Commissioning a Remote System ........................................................................ 108
4.3 EX250 .......................................................................................................................... 109
4.3.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................ 109
4.3.3 Technical Data ...................................................................................................... 110
4.3.4 Operational and Connection Elements ................................................................. 111
4.3.5 Status LEDs .......................................................................................................... 111
4.3.6 Number Switch ...................................................................................................... 112
4.3.7 RS485 Interface .................................................................................................... 112
4.3.8 Automatic Baud Rate Recognition ........................................................................ 113
4.3.9 Module Fastener ................................................................................................... 113
4.4 EX350 .......................................................................................................................... 114
4.4.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................ 114
4.4.3 Technical Data ...................................................................................................... 115
4.4.4 Installation and Communication Interface ............................................................. 116
4.4.5 Module Fastener ................................................................................................... 117
5. CPUs ................................................................................................................................ 118
5.1 General Information ..................................................................................................... 118
5.1.1 Programming ........................................................................................................ 118
5.1.2 Buffering ................................................................................................................ 118
Table of Contents
5.1.3 Programming the FlashPROM ..............................................................................
5.1.4 Overview ...............................................................................................................
5.2 CP260 .........................................................................................................................
5.2.1 General Information ..............................................................................................
5.2.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
5.2.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
5.2.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
5.2.5 Operational and Connection Elements .................................................................
5.2.6 Reset Button .........................................................................................................
5.2.7 Operating Mode Switch .........................................................................................
5.2.8 RS232 Interface (IF1) ...........................................................................................
5.2.9 PCMCIA Interface .................................................................................................
5.2.10 Insert Slots ..........................................................................................................
5.2.11 Data/Real-time Buffering .....................................................................................
5.2.12 Local I/O Bus Expansion .....................................................................................
5.2.13 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules ..................................................................
5.2.14 Programming System Flash ................................................................................
5.3 CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 ............................................................................
5.3.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
5.3.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
5.3.4 Restrictions ...........................................................................................................
5.3.5 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
5.3.7 Slot for Program Memory ......................................................................................
5.3.8 Reset Button .........................................................................................................
5.3.10 RS232 Interface (IF1) .........................................................................................
5.3.11 ETHERNET Interface (IF2): ................................................................................
5.3.12 USB Interface (IF3) .............................................................................................
5.3.13 Insert Slot ............................................................................................................
5.3.15 Changing the Lithium Battery ..............................................................................
5.4 IF260 ...........................................................................................................................
5.4.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
5.4.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
5.4.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
5.4.6 Reset Button .........................................................................................................
5.4.8 Insert Slot ..............................................................................................................
5.4.9 Data/Realtime Buffering ........................................................................................
5.4.11 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules ..................................................................
10
118
119
120
120
120
121
122
123
123
124
125
125
126
126
127
127
127
129
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
135
136
136
136
137
137
138
139
141
142
145
145
146
146
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
150
Table of Contents
5.4.12 Online Connection ..............................................................................................
5.5 IP161 ...........................................................................................................................
5.5.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
5.5.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
5.5.5 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
5.5.6 Reset Button .........................................................................................................
5.5.7 CAN Node Number Switch ...................................................................................
5.5.8 RS232 Interfaces (IF1 and IF3) ............................................................................
5.5.9 CAN Interface (IF2) ...............................................................................................
5.5.10 I/O Connections ..................................................................................................
5.5.13 Operating Modes ...............................................................................................
5.6 XP152 ..........................................................................................................................
5.6.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
5.6.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
5.6.5 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
5.6.6 Reset Button .........................................................................................................
5.6.7 CAN Node Number Switch ...................................................................................
5.6.8 RS232 Interface (IF1) ...........................................................................................
5.6.9 CAN Interface (IF2) ...............................................................................................
5.6.11 Module Fastener .................................................................................................
6. Programmable Modules ....................................................................................................
6.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................
6.2 DM455 .........................................................................................................................
6.2.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
6.2.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
6.2.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
6.2.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
6.2.6 Connection Example .............................................................................................
6.2.7 Installation Notes ..................................................................................................
6.2.8 Input Circuit Diagram ............................................................................................
6.2.9 Output Circuit Diagram .........................................................................................
6.2.10 Detailed Description of Outputs ..........................................................................
6.2.11 Maximum Permitted Load on the Motor Windings ..............................................
6.2.12 Current Surge Cutoffs .........................................................................................
6.2.13 Communication Memory .....................................................................................
151
152
154
154
155
156
162
163
163
163
164
165
166
171
172
172
174
176
176
176
177
178
178
179
179
180
180
181
182
182
185
185
186
186
186
187
189
190
190
193
194
195
196
198
199
199
11
Table of Contents
7. Digital Input Modules ........................................................................................................
7.1 General Information .....................................................................................................
7.1.1 Input Filter .............................................................................................................
7.1.2 Sink/Source Wiring ...............................................................................................
7.1.3 Overview .............................................................................................................
7.1.4 Programming ........................................................................................................
7.2 DI450 ...........................................................................................................................
7.2.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
7.2.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
7.2.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
7.2.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
7.2.6 Pulse Measurement ..............................................................................................
7.2.7 Gate Measurement ...............................................................................................
7.2.8 Period Measurement .............................................................................................
7.2.10 Variable Declarations ..........................................................................................
7.3 DI475 / DI476 ..............................................................................................................
7.3.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
7.3.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
7.3.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
7.3.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
7.3.7 Variable Declarations ............................................................................................
7.4 DI477 ...........................................................................................................................
7.4.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
7.4.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
7.4.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
7.4.5 Connection Elements ............................................................................................
7.4.6 Pin Assignments for DSUB Sockets .....................................................................
7.5 DI486 ...........................................................................................................................
7.5.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
7.5.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
7.5.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
7.5.6 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
7.6 DI695 ...........................................................................................................................
7.6.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
7.6.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
12
200
200
200
201
202
202
203
203
203
203
205
206
206
208
211
213
214
216
216
216
216
217
218
218
219
220
220
220
220
221
222
223
225
225
226
226
226
227
227
228
229
231
232
233
233
233
233
Table of Contents
7.6.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
7.6.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
7.7 DI875 ...........................................................................................................................
7.7.2 Examples of Possible Encoders ...........................................................................
7.7.3 Order Data ............................................................................................................
7.7.4 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
7.7.5 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
7.7.7 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
8. Digital Output Modules .....................................................................................................
8.1.1 Protective Circuit ...................................................................................................
8.1.2 Overview ............................................................................................................
8.1.3 Programming ........................................................................................................
8.2 DO479 .........................................................................................................................
8.2.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
8.2.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
8.2.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
8.2.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
8.2.7 Overload Protection ..............................................................................................
8.2.8 Switching Inductive Loads ....................................................................................
8.3 DO480 .........................................................................................................................
8.3.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
8.3.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
8.3.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
8.3.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
8.3.7 Overload Protection ..............................................................................................
8.3.8 Switching Inductive Loads ....................................................................................
8.4 DO486 .........................................................................................................................
8.4.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
8.4.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
8.4.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
8.4.6 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
235
236
237
237
238
238
238
239
240
241
241
242
244
244
247
247
247
248
248
249
249
249
249
251
252
253
254
254
255
256
256
256
256
258
259
260
261
261
262
263
263
263
264
265
266
267
268
13
Table of Contents
8.4.9 Output Monitoring .................................................................................................
8.4.10 Switching Inductive Loads ..................................................................................
8.5 DO650 / DO750 ...........................................................................................................
8.5.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
8.5.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
8.5.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
8.5.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
8.6 DO690 .........................................................................................................................
8.6.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
8.6.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
8.6.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
8.6.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
8.7 DO760 .........................................................................................................................
8.7.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
8.7.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
8.7.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
8.7.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
8.7.7 Total Output Current Allowed ................................................................................
8.7.8 Switching Cycles ...................................................................................................
9. Digital Mixed Modules .......................................................................................................
9.1.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................
9.1.2 Programming ........................................................................................................
9.2 DM476 .........................................................................................................................
9.2.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
9.2.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
9.2.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
9.2.6 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................
9.2.7 Connection Example for Digital Outputs ...............................................................
9.2.10 Overload Protection ............................................................................................
14
269
270
270
271
272
272
272
272
274
275
276
276
277
277
277
278
279
280
280
281
282
282
282
283
285
286
287
288
289
289
290
290
290
290
291
291
291
291
293
294
295
297
297
298
298
299
Table of Contents
9.3 DM486 .........................................................................................................................
9.3.2 Order Data ............................................................................................................
9.3.3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................
9.3.4 Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................
9.3.6 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
9.3.10 Output Monitoring ...............................................................................................
9.3.11 Switching Inductive Loads ..................................................................................
10. Analog Input Modules .....................................................................................................
10.1 General information ...................................................................................................
10.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................
10.1.2 Programming ......................................................................................................
10.2 AI350 / AI375 .............................................................................................................
10.2.1 General information ............................................................................................
10.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
10.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
10.2.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
10.2.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
10.2.6 Input Circuit Diagram ..........................................................................................
10.2.7 Operating Modes ................................................................................................
10.2.8 Relationship between Input Voltage and Converter Value .................................
10.3 AI775 .........................................................................................................................
10.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
10.3.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
10.3.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
10.3.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
10.3.7 Operating Modes ................................................................................................
10.3.8 Relationship between Input Current and Converter Value ..................................
10.4 AI780 .........................................................................................................................
10.4.1 General Information ............................................................................................
10.4.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
10.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
10.4.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
10.4.5 Connection Elements ..........................................................................................
10.4.6 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
10.4.7 Connection Examples .........................................................................................
10.4.9 Derating ..............................................................................................................
301
301
301
302
304
304
305
307
309
309
310
310
311
312
312
312
312
313
313
313
313
315
316
317
317
320
320
325
325
325
325
327
328
329
329
332
332
337
337
337
337
340
340
341
342
344
345
15
Table of Contents
10.4.10 Operating Modes .............................................................................................
10.4.11 Standardization .................................................................................................
10.4.12 Variable Declarations ........................................................................................
10.4.13 Standardization .................................................................................................
10.4.14 Commissioning .................................................................................................
10.4.15 Configuration Examples ....................................................................................
11. Analog Output Modules ..................................................................................................
11.1 General information ...................................................................................................
11.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................
11.1.2 Programming ......................................................................................................
11.2 AO350 ......................................................................................................................
11.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
11.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
11.2.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
11.2.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
11.2.6 Output Circuit Diagram .......................................................................................
11.2.7 Relationship between Numerical Value and Output Voltage ..............................
11.3 AO360 ......................................................................................................................
11.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
11.3.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
11.3.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
11.3.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
11.3.7 Relationship between Numerical Value and Output Voltage ..............................
11.4 AO775 .......................................................................................................................
11.4.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
11.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
11.4.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
11.4.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
11.4.7 Relationship between Numerical Value and Output Current ..............................
12. Analog Mixed Modules ...................................................................................................
12.1 General Information ...................................................................................................
12.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................
12.1.2 Programming ......................................................................................................
12.2 AM050 .......................................................................................................................
12.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
12.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
12.2.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
12.2.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
16
345
345
346
352
355
355
360
360
360
360
361
361
361
361
362
363
364
364
365
366
366
366
366
367
368
369
369
369
370
370
370
370
371
372
373
373
374
375
375
375
375
376
376
376
376
378
379
Table of Contents
12.2.8 Operating Modes ................................................................................................
12.2.9 Relationship between Converter Value and Input / Output Signals ....................
12.2.10 Output Voltage 10 V ........................................................................................
12.3 AM051 .......................................................................................................................
12.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
12.3.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
12.3.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
12.3.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
12.3.8 Operating Modes ................................................................................................
12.4 AM055 .......................................................................................................................
12.4.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
12.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
12.4.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
12.4.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
12.4.8 Operating Modes ................................................................................................
12.5 AM374 .......................................................................................................................
12.5.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
12.5.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
12.5.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
12.5.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
12.5.8 Configuration .......................................................................................................
12.5.9 Operating Modes ................................................................................................
12.5.10 Relationship between Converter Value and Input / Output Signals ..................
13. Temperature Modules .....................................................................................................
13.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................
13.1.2 Programming ......................................................................................................
13.2 AT350 / AT450 ..........................................................................................................
13.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
380
380
381
384
384
385
389
389
389
389
391
392
393
393
394
397
398
402
402
402
402
404
405
407
407
408
411
412
416
416
416
417
420
421
422
423
423
424
427
428
437
437
437
437
438
438
438
17
Table of Contents
13.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
13.2.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
13.2.5 Pin Assignments ...............................................................................................
13.2.7 Relationship between Temperature and Converter Value ..................................
13.2.8 Open Line Detection ...........................................................................................
13.2.10 Mode Register ...................................................................................................
13.3 AT660 ........................................................................................................................
13.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
13.3.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
13.3.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
13.3.5 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
13.3.7 Measurement Range Monitoring .........................................................................
13.3.8 Installation Notes ................................................................................................
13.3.9 Internal Measurement Processing ......................................................................
14. Other Modules ................................................................................................................
14.2 UM161 .......................................................................................................................
14.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
14.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
14.2.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
14.2.5 Connection Elements ..........................................................................................
14.2.6 Pin Assignments ...............................................................................................
14.2.7 Connection Example ...........................................................................................
14.2.10 Relationship between Converter Value and Input / Output Signals ..................
15. Communication Modules ................................................................................................
15.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................
15.2 EX282 ........................................................................................................................
15.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.2.4 Operational and Connection Elements ...............................................................
15.2.5 Status Display .....................................................................................................
15.2.6 ETHERNET Powerlink Station Number ..............................................................
15.2.7 RJ45 Ports ..........................................................................................................
15.2.8 SG3 .....................................................................................................................
15.2.9 SG4 .....................................................................................................................
15.2.10 Module Fastener ...............................................................................................
18
438
439
440
443
444
447
447
448
451
451
451
451
454
455
457
457
458
458
460
467
467
468
468
468
469
471
472
473
475
476
477
478
479
486
486
487
487
487
488
488
489
491
492
492
492
493
Table of Contents
15.3 IF050 .........................................................................................................................
15.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.3.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.3.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
15.3.6 RS232 Interface (IF1) .........................................................................................
15.3.7 RS232/TTY Interface (IF2) ..................................................................................
15.3.8 RS485/RS422 interface (IF3) ..............................................................................
15.4 IF060 .........................................................................................................................
15.4.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.5 IF613 .........................................................................................................................
15.5.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.5.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.5.5 RS232 Interface (IF1) .........................................................................................
15.5.6 RS232 Interfaces (IF2 and IF3) ..........................................................................
15.6 IF621 .........................................................................................................................
15.6.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.6.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.6.5 CAN Node Number Switch .................................................................................
15.6.6 RS485/RS422 Interfaces (IF1) ............................................................................
15.6.7 CAN Interface (IF2) .............................................................................................
15.7 IF622 .........................................................................................................................
15.7.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.7.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.7.5 RS232 Interface (IF1) .........................................................................................
15.7.6 RS485/RS422 Interface (IF2 and IF3) ................................................................
15.8 IF661 .........................................................................................................................
15.8.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.8.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
15.8.5 Station Number Dial ............................................................................................
15.8.6 RS485 Interface (IF1) .........................................................................................
15.9 IF671 .........................................................................................................................
15.9.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
15.9.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
494
494
495
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
501
502
502
503
503
503
504
505
505
506
507
507
507
508
509
509
510
510
511
511
511
512
513
514
514
515
515
515
516
517
517
518
519
519
519
520
521
19
Table of Contents
15.9.5 RS232 Interface (IF1) .........................................................................................
15.9.6 RS485/RS422 Interface (IF2) .............................................................................
15.9.7 CAN Interface (IF3) .............................................................................................
15.10 IF672 .......................................................................................................................
15.10.1 General Information ..........................................................................................
15.10.2 Order Data ........................................................................................................
15.10.3 Technical Data ..................................................................................................
15.10.4 Operational and Connection Elements .............................................................
15.10.5 CAN Node Number Switch ...............................................................................
15.10.6 RS232 Interface (IF1) .......................................................................................
15.10.7 Interfaces CAN 1 and CAN 2 (IF2 and IF3) ......................................................
15.11 IF681 .......................................................................................................................
15.11.2 Order Data ........................................................................................................
15.11.3 Technical Data ..................................................................................................
15.11.5 Station Number Dial ..........................................................................................
15.11.6 RS232 Interface (IF1) .......................................................................................
15.11.7 Application Interface (IF2) .................................................................................
15.12 IF686 .......................................................................................................................
15.12.2 Order Data ........................................................................................................
15.12.3 Technical Data ..................................................................................................
15.12.5 Status Display ...................................................................................................
15.12.6 ETHERNET Powerlink Station Number ............................................................
15.12.7 ETHERNET Powerlink interface .......................................................................
15.12.8 Firmware Update ..............................................................................................
15.13 IF772 .......................................................................................................................
15.13.2 Order Data ........................................................................................................
15.13.3 Technical Data ..................................................................................................
15.13.5 CAN Node Number Switch ...............................................................................
15.13.6 RS232 Interface (IF1) .......................................................................................
15.13.7 Interfaces CAN 1 and CAN 2 (IF2 and IF3) ......................................................
15.14 NW150 ....................................................................................................................
15.14.1 General Information .........................................................................................
15.14.2 Order Data ........................................................................................................
15.14.3 Technical Data ..................................................................................................
15.14.4 Status LEDs ......................................................................................................
15.14.6 Number Switch ..................................................................................................
15.14.7 RS485 Interface ................................................................................................
15.14.8 Wiring a PROFIBUS System ............................................................................
20
522
522
523
524
524
524
525
526
526
527
527
528
528
528
529
530
530
531
531
532
532
532
532
533
533
535
536
536
537
537
537
538
539
539
540
540
541
541
541
542
543
544
545
546
546
Table of Contents
16. Counter and Positioning Modules ...................................................................................
16.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................
16.2 NC150 .......................................................................................................................
16.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
16.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
16.2.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
16.2.6 External Encoder Supply / Analog Outputs .........................................................
16.2.7 Output Diagram for Analog Outputs ....................................................................
16.2.8 Counter Inputs ....................................................................................................
16.2.10 Basic Counting Direction ...................................................................................
16.2.11 Counter Operating Modes .................................................................................
16.2.12 Home Search Procedure ..................................................................................
16.3 NC154 .......................................................................................................................
16.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
16.3.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
16.3.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
16.3.6 Encoder Connection ...........................................................................................
16.3.7 Encoder Supply / Synchronization ......................................................................
16.3.8 I/O Connection ....................................................................................................
16.3.9 Interface Used to Download the BOOT Software Module ..................................
16.4 NC157 .......................................................................................................................
16.4.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
16.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
16.4.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
16.4.6 Interface Used to Download the BOOT Software Module ..................................
16.4.7 Trigger Supply / Synchronization ........................................................................
16.4.8 CAN Interface .....................................................................................................
16.4.9 Trigger Inputs ......................................................................................................
16.5 NC352 .......................................................................................................................
16.5.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
16.5.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
16.5.4 Status LEDs ........................................................................................................
16.5.6 Pin Assignments .................................................................................................
16.5.7 Specifications for the 9-pin DSUB Plug ..............................................................
16.5.8 Input/Output Circuit Diagram ..............................................................................
16.5.9 Ultrasonic Transducer Supply .............................................................................
16.5.10 Digital Input/Output Connection Example .........................................................
547
547
548
548
548
549
550
551
552
554
554
556
559
560
562
563
563
566
566
568
569
570
570
571
571
572
572
575
576
577
578
579
579
579
580
581
581
581
582
584
584
585
586
586
587
588
588
21
Table of Contents
17. Accessories ....................................................................................................................
17.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................
17.2 AC240 .......................................................................................................................
17.2.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
17.2.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
17.2.4 Battery Compartment ..........................................................................................
17.2.5 Backup Battery ....................................................................................................
17.2.6 Changing 9 V Block Cells ...................................................................................
17.3 NC154 - PC Cable .....................................................................................................
17.3.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
17.4 Dummy Module - BM150 ...........................................................................................
17.4.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
17.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
17.5 TB162 ........................................................................................................................
17.5.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
17.5.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
17.6 TB170 ........................................................................................................................
17.6.2 Order Data ..........................................................................................................
17.6.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................
18. Manuals ..........................................................................................................................
18.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................
601
601
602
602
602
603
603
604
604
606
606
606
607
607
607
607
608
608
608
608
609
609
609
609
610
610
Chapter 4: General Accessories ................................................. 611

1. Overview ..........................................................................................................................
2. AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V ...............................................................................................
2.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
3. AC410 Interface Converter ...............................................................................................
3.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
4. AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x ............................................................................................
4.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
5. AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x ............................................................................................
5.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
6. AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active ............................................................................
6.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
22
611
613
613
613
614
614
614
615
615
615
616
616
616
617
617
617
Table of Contents
7. RS485 Bus Connector ......................................................................................................
7.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
8. AC911 Bus Connector, CAN ............................................................................................
8.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
8.3 Technical Data ............................................................................................................
9. TB704 4-pin Terminal Block .............................................................................................
9.2 Order Data ...................................................................................................................
9.3 Technical Data ............................................................................................................
10. TB708 8-pin Terminal Block ...........................................................................................
10.2 Order Data .................................................................................................................
10.3 Technical Data ........................................................................................................
11. TB710 10-pin Terminal Block .........................................................................................
11.2 Order Data .................................................................................................................
11.3 Technical Data ..........................................................................................................
12.2 Order Data .................................................................................................................
12.3 Technical Data ..........................................................................................................
13.2 Order Data .................................................................................................................
13.3 Technical Data ..........................................................................................................
14. TB108, TB112 and TB124, 8/12/24-pin terminal blocks .................................................
14.2 Order Data .................................................................................................................
14.3 Technical Data ..........................................................................................................
15. INT1 Interface Converter ................................................................................................
15.2 Order Data .................................................................................................................
15.3 Supply .......................................................................................................................
618
618
618
619
619
619
619
620
620
620
620
621
621
621
621
622
622
622
622
623
623
623
623
624
624
624
624
625
625
625
625
626
626
626
626
Chapter 5: Standards and Certifications .................................... 627

1. Standards and Limits Used ............................................................................................... 627
2. International Standards ..................................................................................................... 630
23
Table of Contents
24
Chapter 1
General Information
General Information Manual History
Chapter 1 General Information

1. Manual History
Version
Date
Model No. and Product ID
Comments
4.0
October 2003
MASYS22005-E
B&R 2005 Users Manual
Update, new modules included (AI780, CP340, CP380, CP382,

DI875, EX282, IF686)
New accessories included (TB108, TB112 and new Compact
Flash)
3.0
May 2002
MASYS22005-E
Update, new modules included (AO360, CP360, DO486, DM486,

IF772, NC352 and UM161)
New accessories included (MC112, TB704 and TB708)
Software operation with B&R Automation Studio
2.0
December 2000
MASYS22005-E
Update, new modules included
1.0
August 1999
MASYS22005-E
B&R SYSTEM 2005 and B&R SYSTEM 2010 divided into separate
handbooks
New model number and product ID.
2.0
April 1998
MASYS2HW2-E
B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 User's Manual

Descriptions expanded and improved
1.0
June 1996
MASYS2HW2-E
B&R 2005 / B&R 2010 User's Manual
First edition
Table 1: Manual history
25
General Information Safety Guidelines
2. Safety Guidelines
2.1 Introduction
Programmable logic controllers (e.g. PLCs, etc.), operating and monitoring devices (e.g.
industrial PCs, Power Panels, mobile panels, etc.), as well as B&R uninterruptible power
supplies, have been designed, developed and manufactured for conventional use in industry.
They were not designed, developed and manufactured for any use involving serious risks or
hazards that without the implementation of exceptionally stringent safety precautions could lead
to death, injury, serious physical damage or loss of any other kind. Such risks and hazards
include in particular the use of these devices to monitor and/or control nuclear reactions in
nuclear power plants, flight control systems, flight safety systems, mass transportation systems,
medical life support systems and weapons systems.
When using both programmable logic controllers and operating and monitoring devices as
control systems in conjunction with a Soft PLC (e.g. B&R Automation Runtime or comparable
products) or a Slot PLC (e.g. B&R LS251 or comparable products), the safety precautions
applying to industrial control systems (e.g. the provision of safety devices such as emergency
stop circuits, etc.) in accordance with applicable national and international regulations must be
observed. The same applies for all other devices connected to the system, e.g. drives.
All tasks such as installation, commissioning and service may only be carried out by qualified
personnel. Qualified personnel are persons familiar with transport, mounting, installation,
commissioning and operation of the product and have the respective qualifications (e.g.
IEC 60364). National accident prevention guidelines must be followed.
The safety guidelines, connection descriptions (rating plate and documentation) and limit values
listed in the technical data must be read carefully before installation and commissioning and
must be observed.
2.2 Intended Use

Electronic devices are generally not fail-safe. In the event of a failure on the programmable
control system, operating or monitoring device or uninterruptible power supply, the user is
responsible for ensuring that other devices that may be connected, such as motors, are made
secure.
2.3 Transport and Storage

Devices must be protected from excessive stress (mechanical load, temperature, humidity,
aggressive atmosphere) during transport and storage.
2.4 Installation
26
The installation must take place according to the documentation using suitable
equipment and tools.
The devices are only allowed to be installed without voltage applied and by qualified
personnel.
General safety regulations and nationally applicable accident prevention guidelines must
be observed.
Electrical installation must be carried out according to the relevant guidelines (e.g. line
cross section, fuse, protective ground connection).
2.5 Operation
2.5.1 Protection against Touching Electrical Parts
To operate programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices and uninterruptible
power supplies, certain components must carry dangerous voltage levels of over 42 VDC. A lifethreatening electrical shock could occur if you touch these parts. This could result in death,
severe injury or material damage.
Before turning on the programmable logic controller, the operational and monitoring devices or
the uninterruptible power supply, ensure that the housing is properly connected to protective
ground (PE rail). The ground connection must be established even when testing the operating
and monitoring devices or the uninterruptible power supply as well as when operating them for
only a short time.
Before turning the device on, make sure that all voltage carrying parts are securely covered.
During operation, all covers must remain closed.
2.6 Safety Notices

Safety notices are organized as follows:
Safety Guidelines
Description
Danger!
Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can be life-threatening.
Caution!
Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can result in severe injury or major damage to material.
Warning!
Information:
Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can result in injury or damage to material.
Important information for preventing errors
Table 2: Safety guidelines
27
Chapter 1
General Information
General Information Safety Guidelines
General Information Definition of Terms
3. Definition of Terms
Term
Explanation
SG3
System Generation 3 (SG3) - CPUs with Motorola processors.

The following CPUs belong to this series:
CP260, IF161, IP161, XP152, CP100, CP104, CP152, CP153, CP200, CP210, CP430, CP470,
CP474, CP476, CP770, CP774, PP21, PP41
SG4
System Generation 4 (SG4) - CPUs with Intel processors.

The following CPUs belong to this series:
PP100, CP340, CP360, CP380, CP382, AR102, AR105, AR010, AR000
Table 3: Definition of Terms
4. B&R SYSTEM 2000 Controller Generation

The B&R 2000 controller generation is an automation system that provides new levels of
performance, functionality and operational safety. The B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and B&R 2010
systems cover the entire application range, from simple logic controllers to complex
decentralized automation systems.
The systems have different structures, expandability, modularity and CPU performance. These
systems are very closely related and therefore meet the fundamental requirements for complete
centralized and decentralized compatibility for the programmer.
Figure 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000
28
General Information B&R SYSTEM 2000 Controller Generation

Chapter 1
General Information
4.1 B&R SYSTEMS 2005 Characteristics

4.1.1 Hardware
Hardware modularity
Network-capable
Communication interfaces to HMI
PLC and industrial computer functionality
EMC according to EN61131-2
Secure I/O bus protocol
Remote I/O points
Combined I/O and system bus
Bit or word processing in a single cycle
Enhanced performance through multiple I/O bus systems
4.1.2 Software
Multitasking operating system for PLC and industrial computer applications
Powerful PLC programming languages
High-level language programming
Exact control over PLC timing
Simple programming software with Windows user interface
Project management on the programming device
4.2 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)

The PLC kernel consists of powerful standard computer components. The processors are
supported by RISC processors which enable communication tasks to be carried out
simultaneously allowing faster processing of I/O signals.
Most CPUs use a modular interface concept. Various bus or network systems can be efficiently
integrated in the B&R SYSTEM 2005 using plug-in interface modules.
The computer kernel uses components which build the functionality of an industrial PLC. Bit, byte
and word access is possible in a single cycle which increases speed when mixing PLC links and
industrial computer functionality.
The B&R SYSTEM 2005 has a combined system and I/O bus. On this bus, modules are
operated which are needed for both industrial computer functionality and connecting the
interface to the machine or device. System modules are e.g. additional processor modules,
remote master, network modules etc. Naturally, the bus is multiprocessor-capable.
29

The I/O bus operates e.g. digital and analog I/O modules, positioning modules, intelligent I/O
processors, etc.
If there is insufficient space available on the main rack for your application, further I/O modules
can be operated on up to four expansion racks. This procedure is called local expansion or I/O
bus expansion. Data transfer to these expansion racks is made simultaneously and with secure
protocol.
4.3 System Interface

The system interface is the sum of all I/O modules, i.e. the interface between PLC and the
machine/system being controlled. All B&R SYSTEMS 2005 I/O modules are electrically isolated
from external disturbances using suitable EMC measures (standard EN61131-2). I/O modules
are enclosed (plastic housing), so that the technician cannot come into contact with the
electronics at installation.
The length and structure of the I/O bus can be adjusted to the requirements of the
machine/system. That means the connection points for I/O signals do not have to be in the same
location as the PLCs CPU. Using a combination of local and remote I/O bus segments (remote
I/O) allows the optimal structure to be created for the respective application. I/O modules are
installed on the machine/system where they are needed. Cabling to the PLC kernel is reduced
to a two conductor or fiber optic cable.
4.4 Industrial PC
The combined I/O bus and system bus is multiprocessor-capable and therefore can hold further
computer units capable of dealing with additional tasks.
4.5 Network Capability

Network capability and the possibility to communicate with systems from other manufacturers
have become a must for all industrial controllers. The B&R 2000 PLC family meets many of these
requirements using system-wide and multi-system communication possibilities.
30
4.6 Software Concept

Special attention was given to simple operation and programming. Standard PLC programs run
cyclically, i.e. the program is repeated in a loop. To increase efficiency, the B&R SYSTEM 2000
also offers the possibility to use various tasks with different cycle times. In this way, time critical
program sections (e.g. reaction to trigger signals) can be processed faster than the evaluation
of slower events (e.g. polling keys).
4.7 Programming
Programming is carried out using B&R Automation Studio. Several programming languages
are available:
Automation Basic (previously PL2000)
ANSI C
IEC 1131 Ladder Diagram (LAD)
IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
IEC 1131 Structured Text (ST)
IEC 1131 Instruction List (IL)
Differences in data type names between B&R Automation Studio and PG2000:
Resolution
B&R Automation Studio (IEC1131-3)
PG2000
1-bit
BOOL
BIT
8-bit with sign
SINT
INT8
8-bit without sign
USINT
BYTE
INT
INT16
16-bit without sign
UINT
WORD
32-bit with sign
DINT
INT32
32-bit without sign
UDINT
LONG
Floating point display 32-bit
REAL
FLOAT
16-bit with sign
Table 4: Differences in data type abbreviations between B&R Automation Studio and PG2000
31
Chapter 1
General Information
General Information B&R 2005 Control System
5. B&R 2005 Control System

5.1 Modular Construction
The B&R 2005 is made up of individual modules that are housed in plastic. The modules (with
the exception of the power supply and the CPU) can be inserted in any order on a backplane.
The power supply must always be located on both far left slots of the backplanes. The CPU must
be operated directly next to the power supply.
Both the bus system and the supply lines are on the backplane. Backplanes are available in
different lengths (6, 9, 12 and 15 slots).
5.1.1 Mounting the Backplane
The backplane is installed on a mounting rail (DIN EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5 mm). This mounting rail
is attached conductively to the back wall of the switching cabinet.
In addition to mounting rail installation, the backplane can also be screwed directly onto the back
wall of the switching cabinet.
Figure 2: Mounting the B&R SYSTEM 2005 backplane
32
5.2 Combined System and I/O Bus

There is a combined I/O and system bus on every B&R 2005 backplane. Therefore, system and
I/O modules can be inserted on the main backplane. The backplane where the CPU is installed
is the main backplane.
This has the following advantage:
Only one backplane type is required for main and expansion backplanes (eases stock
management)
Differences to B&R 2010:
Slower access of I/O data (only applies to the main backplane)
Limited number of module slots per backplane
More space in the switching cabinet
Figure 3: Combined system and I/O bus
5.3 Supply Voltage

The supply voltage for the B&R 2005 control system is provided by a power supply that must be
connected to the far left slot on the backplane.
33
Chapter 1
General Information
5.4 Single Row Terminal Block

B&R 2005 modules are normally connected using a single row terminal block.
Pin assignments for the individual modules are described in Chapter 3 "B&R 2005 Modules".
The construction of the terminal block has the following advantages for the PLC user:
The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module
The terminal blocks are available with screw clamps and also with cage clamps
Screw clamps
Cage clamps
Figure 4: TB170 terminal block
5.5 Application Memory (APM)

B&R 2005 CPUs have the memory for both application programs and the operating system
either integrated in the module or provided on an additional Compact Flash memory card.
34
6. Expansions for B&R 2005

6.1 Expansions of Local I/O Buses
The main backplane can hold a maximum of 11 I/O and/or system modules. However, it is still
possible to expand. To do this, the following modules are required:
6.1.1 Expansion Master
The EX350 bus controller is used as an expansion master: The bus controller is a power supply
insert.
6.1.2 Expansion Slave
A power supply module is used as an expansion slave. This power supply module is equipped
with an additional interface, which allows connection of I/O bus expansions. The power supply
must be plugged into the far-left slot of an expansion backplane. A maximum of 4 expansion
backplanes can be connected.
The connection cable between the expansion master and expansion slave is available in two
lengths (1 m or 2 m).
35
Chapter 1
General Information
General Information Expansions for B&R 2005

6.1.3 Example of Local I/O Bus Expansion
Figure 5: Local I/O bus expansion
36

Chapter 1
General Information
6.2 Remote I/O Bus

The remote I/O allows remote I/O modules (up to 1200 m) to be connected to the CPU. The
following modules are required when implementing a remote I/O system:
6.2.1 Remote Master
The remote master is a system module and must be inserted on the main backplane (combined
system bus and I/O bus). Up to 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master.
6.2.2 Remote Slave
The EX250 bus controller is used as remote slave. The bus controller is a power supply insert.
The remote slave communicates via a shielded twisted pair cable with the remote master. A
maximum of 13 I/O modules are operated on each remote slave.
6.2.3 Cabling
In a remote I/O system, remote slaves at distances of up to 1200 m are connected with the
remote master using a shielded twisted pair cable.
Transfer Distance (without repeater)
100 kBit/s
Up to 1,200 m
181 kBit/s
Up to 1,000 m
500 kBit/s
Up to 400 m
1000 kBit/s
Up to 200 m
2000 kBit/s
Up to 100 m
Table 5: Transfer distance of a remote I/O system
37

6.2.4 Example of Remote I/O System
Figure 6: Remote I/O system
38
General Information Combination Options

Chapter 1
General Information
7. Combination Options
7.1 Local I/O Bus
7.1.1 Connecting B&R 2005 to B&R 2010
A B&R 2005 expansion backplane is coupled to a B&R 2010 expansion master using a power
supply with expansion slave. The entire configuration can have a maximum of four B&R 2005
expansion backplanes.
Table 6: Connecting B&R 2005 to B&R 2010
39
General Information Combination Options

7.1.2 Connecting B&R 2010 to B&R 2005
A 2010 I/O bus is coupled to the 2005 expansion master using the expansion slave. A maximum
of twenty 2010 I/O modules can be connected in this way.
Table 7: Connecting B&R 2010 to B&R 2005
7.2 Remote I/O Bus

Up to 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master (B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R
SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic Scanner), and the B&R 2003, B&R 2005 and
B&R 2010 systems can be combined as desired.
Each remote slave starts a new I/O bus. The maximum number of slots available depends on
the type of slave.
Slave Type
Number of Slots
2010
Max. 99 (cascaded)
2005
Max. 13
2003
Max. 8
Table 8: Number of slots depending on the slave type
40
General Information PROFIBUS Network

Chapter 1
General Information
8. PROFIBUS Network
Figure 7: PROFIBUS network
The PROFIBUS (process fieldbus) is an open fieldbus with standardized communication

functions.
Transfer Distance (without repeater)
19.2 kBit/s
Up to 1,200 m
93.75 kBit/s
Up to 1,200 m
187.5 kBit/s
Up to 1,000 m
500 kBit/s
Up to 400 m
Table 9: Transfer distance in a PROFIBUS network
41
General Information PROFIBUS Network
42
Installation Dimensions and Installation
Chapter 2 Installation
1.1 PLC Modules

The B&R 2005 consists of both single-width and double-width modules. The width corresponds
to the number of slots required:
Width
Slots
Single-width
Double-width
Table 10: Width of B&R SYSTEM 2005 PLC modules
The measurements given are installation measurements. The depth of the backplane must be
added to the total depth of the PLC.
Figure 8: B&R SYSTEM 2005 module dimensions
43
Chapter 2
Installation
1. Dimensions and Installation
1.2 Basic Module Design

The following elements can be found behind the module door:
Status LEDs
Node number switch
Reset button
Connection plug
Openings are provided in the module door with most modules so that LEDs can be read without
the door being open.
A label strip can be inserted on the inside of the module door which can be seen from the outside.
Figure 9: Basic module design
44
1.3 Module Racks
Number of Slots
Backplane
Length x
BP155
240 mm
BP152
360 mm
12
BP151
480 mm
BP150
600 mm
15
Chapter 2
Installation
All 2005 backplanes are constructed in the same way. The only difference is the number of slots
available:
Table 11: B&R SYSTEM 2005 module rack
When installing backplanes, make sure to leave at least 20 mm on the left and right for the
fastening levers.
Backplane Dimensions:
Figure 10: Backplane dimensions
45
1.4 Mounting Rail

A mounting rail, which conforms to the DIN EN 50022 standard, is required for mounting the
PLC. The mounting rail is fastened to the back wall of the cabinet.
Follow the manufacturers installation instructions
Figure 11: Mounting rail
1.5 Installation
The installation should only be carried out by qualified personnel!
The installation of the PLC takes place in the following order:
1) Install mounting rail (see Section 3.1 "Grounding the Mounting Rail", on page 70)
2) Install the backplane
3) Mount the PLC modules
46

Installing the Backplane
The following steps are to be taken in order to attach the backplane onto the mounting rail:
a) Set all fastening levers to the "OPEN" position.
c) Set all fastening levers to the "CLOSE" position with a screwdriver. The screw head slot must
be in a horizontal position to guarantee the required contact pressure for proper EMC
characteristics. Turning the fastening lever also places the contact spring under pressure
which creates the proper contact.
Removing backplane modules is done in reverse order.
Fastening lever in OPEN and CLOSE position
Figure 12: Fastening lever positions
47
Chapter 2
Installation
b) Hang the backplane on the desired position on the mounting rail
Installing the backplane on the mounting rail
Figure 13: Installing the backplane on the mounting rail
Mount the PLC modules

After the backplane has been fastened securely to the mounting rail, the PLC modules can be
mounted in the appropriate backplane slots. A module is installed in the following order:
a) Using the module support hook, hang the module on the base hook latch of the backplane:
Figure 14: Installing the module
48
Chapter 2
Installation
b) Tilt the module back until the upper fastening clip of the base plate clicks into place.
Figure 15: Tipping the module back
To remove PLC modules, follow the same directions in reverse order.

Pressing the module fastening lever (1) will unclip the locking mechanism. The module can then
be tilted forward (2) and removed from the backplane (3).
Figure 16: Removing a module
49
1.6 TB170 Terminal Block

Single row 20-pin terminal blocks, which can be removed with two ejection levers, are used to
wire most modules.
Terminal blocks are also available with screw clamps and with cage clamps.
Screw clamps
Cage clamps
Figure 17: TB170 terminal block
50

Inserting and Removing the Terminal Block
The terminal block is inserted into the pin connector provided on the I/O module. The pin
connector is behind the module door.
Inserting
Chapter 2
Installation
Push the terminal block in the direction indicated by the arrow below.
Figure 18: Inserting a terminal block
51

Removing
By pressing the ejection lever (using a screw driver), the terminal block is forced out of the pin
connector and can then be easily removed by hand.
Figure 19: Removing terminal block
52

Cabling Terminal Blocks
Chapter 2
Installation
All cables (cable bundles) are to be run down from the terminal blocks.
Figure 20: Cabling terminal blocks
A cable tie is used to relieve stress on the terminal block and is attached to the slots provided on
the module housing.
Figure 21: Stress relief using cable ties
53
Installation System Configuration and Power Supply
2. System Configuration and Power Supply

2.1 B&R SYSTEM 2005
The following guidelines apply when configuring every B&R 2005 system:
System modules are only allowed to be inserted on the main backplane.
Empty slots must be filled with dummy modules.
The power supply must always be located in the two furthest left slots (1 and 2) for both
main and expansion backplanes.
The CPU can be operated on the main backplane directly next to the power supply.
Counting for module addressing begins at slot 3 which has address 1 on every
backplane.
The module addressing for system modules begins with address 0 (0, 1, 2, etc.) if using
an operating system (CPU) older than version 1.10.
2.1.1 Local Bus without Expansion

Basic Design
Figure 22: Basic design
Both system modules and I/O modules can be inserted on the main backplane of the B&R 2005.
The order in which these modules are placed is not important.
The power requirements are met by only one power supply. If the power provided by the supply
unit is insufficient due to the layout of the backplane, the system can be expanded (see
Section 2.1.2 "Local Bus with Expansion", on page 56) by installing I/O modules on an
expansion backplane.
54

Example
The following modules are used in a system:
Amount
Module
Bus
Power Consumption [W]
Per Module
1
1
1
CP260
AT660
NW150
CPU
Temperature module
Network module
1
4
3
AO350
DI475
DO480
Analog output module

Digital input module
Digital output module
System or I/O bus

I/O bus
System bus (only on
Main backplane)
I/O bus
I/O bus
I/O bus
5V
24 V
Total
5V
24 V
Total
5.7
1.25
7
2.3
4.75
---
8
6
7
5.7
1.25
7
2.3
4.75
---
8
6
7
1
1.5
1.5
4
--1
5
1.5
2.5
1
6
4.5
4
--3
5
6
7.5
25.45
14.05
39.5
Chapter 2
Installation
Table 12: Example for power output table
The PS465 module can be used as the power supply. The power comparison indicates
that the power provided by the power supply is sufficient. Therefore, the system does not
have to be expanded.
Power At
PS465
Example
5V
40 W
25.45 W
24 V
50 W
14.05 W
Total
60 W
39.5 W
Table 13: PS465 power comparison - example system
The system could be organized as follows:
Figure 23: System organization
The modules require 14 slots and can be operated on a backplane with 15 slots (BP150). The
last slot is occupied by a BM150 dummy module.
55

2.1.2 Local Bus with Expansion
Basic Design
Both system modules and I/O modules can be inserted in any order on the backplane of the
B&R 2005. All I/O modules can be operated on every expansion backplane (maximum 4).
In order to expand the B&R 2005 in this way, the following points must be noted:
A power supply with expansion slot is to be used on the main backplane. The EX350 bus
controller is used as an expansion master in this expansion slot.
Power supplies with expansion slaves are to be used on the expansion backplanes.
Cables are available from B&R for connecting expansion master and slaves:
Length
Model Number
1m
0G0010.00-090
2m
0G0012.00-090
Table 14: Cable for I/O bus expansion
Cabling: see Figure 24 "Local bus with expansion", on page 57.
The process image is created on expansion plates by the expansion master. This task is handled
by the CPU on the main backplane. Therefore, if I/O modules are put on expansion backplanes
the load on the CPU is decreased.
56
Chapter 2
Installation
Example of Local I/O Bus Expansion
Figure 24: Local bus with expansion
57

2.1.3 Remote I/O Bus
Remote I/O allows remote I/O modules to be connected to the CPU over long distances. A bus
cable is used to connect the Remote Master Module and up to 31 Remote Slaves. A new I/O
bus which can address a maximum of 13 modules begins with every slave.
Figure 25: Remote I/O Bus
The maximum distance of a remote system depends on the transfer rate:

Distance [m]
Transfer Rate [kBit/s]
1200
100
1000
181
400
500
200
1000
100
2000
Table 15: Distances of a remote system
58

Note the following:
The remote master is a system module and must therefore be situated on the main base
plate.
The remote slave is in a power supply module on the expansion backplane.
The slave address is set with a node number switch on the remote slave. This number is
then used for addressing a remote I/O bus.
Chapter 2
Installation
Wiring Remote Master and Slave Modules
Figure 26: Wiring remote master and slave modules
Bus Cable (according to DIN 19245, Part 3)

The remote master and slave modules are connected using two twisted pair cables which must
conform to the following specifications.
Specifications
Wave Impedance
135 - 165 (3 - 20 MHz)
Distributed Capacitance
<30 pF / m
Loop Resistance
<110 / km
Wire Diameter
> 0.64 mm
Wire Cross Section
> 0.34 mm
Table 16: Specifications for the two twisted pair cables
The twisted pair cable must be terminated on both ends with a terminating resistor.
59

Bus Cable Station Connection
The two wires of the bus cable are connected to the individual stations as follows:
Figure 27: Bus cable Station connection
Terminating Resistors
The remote bus is fitted with terminating resistors at both ends. Terminating resistors are
integrated in all B&R remote bus connectors 0G1000.00-090. The terminating resistors can be
turned on or off.
Resistor Diagram
Figure 28: Resistor diagram
60

Remote Connector
0G1000.00-090
Chapter 2
Installation
Model Number:
Figure 29: Remote connector
2.1.4 PROFIBUS
The cabling described for the remote I/O bus (bus cable, terminating resistors) is also used for
PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS network modules available from B&R are NW150 for the B&R
SYSTEM 2005 and NW100 for the B&R SYSTEM 2010.
2.1.5 RS485 Network
The cabling described for the remote I/O bus (bus cable, terminating resistors) is also used for
an RS485 network.
61
2.2 Configuring a Mixed System

2.2.1 Bus Expansion
An expansion slave of a 2010 or 2005 system can be coupled to an expansion master of the
other system. The following restrictions must be noted:
2005 to 2010
Expansion slaves from 2005 expansion backplanes can be connected directly to a 2010
expansion master (maximum 4 per 2010 system). For this type of expansion, both interfaces of
the 2010 expansion master can be used. Only the following configurations are permitted.
Number of Expansion Slaves
Interface
1
2
Configuration
1
Table 17: Permitted configurations
62
Chapter 2
Installation
Depending on the chosen configuration, the expansion backplane number must be addressed
in the programming system with the following numbers:
Figure 30: Backplane numbers for addressing
2010 to 2005
B&R 2010 I/O modules can be connected to a 2005 expansion master with an expansion slave
(which has a power supply module inserted into the expansion slot), or to a 2005 expansion
slave (Expansion Slave OUT).
The module address of the 2010 expansion slave is set with a node number switch, from where
the 2010 I/O module addresses begin. Settings are made in steps of ten (00, 10, ..., 90). A
maximum of 20 I/O modules can be installed on one of these bus segments. However, it is
possible to use up to 99 modules with a 2010 expansion master.
2.2.2 Remote I/O Bus
A remote master (B&R SYSTEM 2005, B&R SYSTEM 2010 or B&R SYSTEM 2000 Logic
Scanner) can be connected with up to 31 remote slaves. It is also possible to mix the B&R 2003,
B&R 2005 and B&R 2010 systems.
Each remote slave starts a new I/O bus. The maximum number of slots available depends on
the type of slave.
63
2.3 CAN Fieldbus

2.3.1 CAN Bus Features
Low costs
High noise immunity through differential signals
Bus structure
Open system
Fast data transfer for small data packages (up to 8 bytes)
Error detection by means of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) and frame testing ->
hamming distance 6
Predictable transmission time for highpriority messages (real-time behavior)
Easy to use
2.3.2 Bus Length and Cable Type

The type of cable used depends largely on the required bus length and the number of nodes.
The bus length is mainly determined by the bit rate.
The following bus lengths are permitted with a maximum oscillator tolerance of 0.121%:
Distance [m]
Transfer Rate [kBit/s]
7306 1)
10
3613 1)
20
1397 1)
50
658
100
510
125
215
250
67
500
Table 18: Bus length and transfer rate

1) In accordance with CiA (CAN in Automation), the maximum bus length is 1000 m.
64

Relationship between the number of nodes and bus length for certain cable types using B&R
default settings:
Cable 1
Belden YR 29832, 4.15 ns/m
Cable 2
Lapp Cable 2170204, 4.15 ns/m
Chapter 2
Installation
Table 19: Cable type
Figure 31: Relationship between the number of nodes and bus length
Example for 12 nodes:

Manufacturer
Baud Rate
Bus Length
Baud Rate
Bus Length
Baud Rate
Bus Length
Belden
500 kBaud
90 m
250 kBaud
286 m
125 kBaud
513 m
Lapp
500 kBaud
90 m
250 kBaud
286 m
125 kBaud
506 m
Table 20: Bus length for 12 nodes depending on the baud rate
65

2.3.3 Wiring
Bus Cable - Station Connection
A 4 conductor twisted pair cable should be used for the bus cable.
Figure 32: Bus Cable - station connection
CAN Signals for CiA/CAL

CAN Signal
B&R Product ID
CAN_GND
CAN
Description
CAN Ground
CAN_L
CAN_L
CAN Low
(CAN_SHLD)
SHLD
Shield
CAN_H
CAN_H
(CAN_V+)
---
CAN High
CAN Supply 8 - 15 V, optional
Table 21: CAN signals for CiA/CAL
All CAN interfaces from B&R are supplied internally, therefore CAN_V+ does not have to be
connected in CAN networks which do not contain devices from other manufacturers.
Branch Lines
Branch lines should be avoided if possible. However, it is possible to connect nodes to the bus
with a branch line as long as the distance is less than 30 cm.
66

Terminating Resistance
CAN networks are cabled using a bus structure where both ends of the bus are equipped with
terminating resistors.
9-pin DSUB Plug
Chapter 2
Installation
For modules using a CAN interface, terminating resistor pins are assigned in the 9-pin DSUB
plug as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 33: Terminating resistor connections for 9-pin DSUB plug
The terminating resistor is already integrated in the CAN bus plug 7AC911.9 available from B&R.
The terminating resistor can be turned on or off.
Figure 34: CAN bus connector 7AC911.9
67

4-pin Multipoint Connector
For modules using a CAN interface, terminating resistor pins must be assigned in the 4-pin
multipoint connector as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 35: Terminating resistor connections for 4-pin multipoint connector
A 4-pin terminal block and a 120 terminating resistor are delivered with the module.
68
Installation Grounding and Shielding Measures
3. Grounding and Shielding Measures
Generally this kind of interference cannot be avoided. However, if suitable grounding, shielding
and other protective measures are taken, the negative influence of the devices can be
considerably reduced. These protective measures include control cabinet grounding, module
grounding, cable shield grounding, protective circuits on electromagnetic switching elements,
and correct use of cables (choosing the proper cable cross section and type)
Grounding has essentially two different functions:
Protective grounding
Dissipation of electromagnetic disturbances
With the B&R 2000 controller generation both the dissipation electromagnetic disturbance and
the grounding is done through the mounting rail.
Figure 36: Dissipation of electromagnetic disturbance and grounding via the mounting rail
69
Chapter 2
Installation
In most applications, industrial controllers are installed in switching cabinets. Electromagnetic

switching elements (relays, contactors), transformers, motor controllers and frequency inverters
etc. are also found in these switching cabinets. Different kinds of electromagnetic interference
inevitably exist in such switching cabinets.
3.1 Grounding the Mounting Rail

For grounding purposes, a good conductive connection between the mounting rail and the metal
back wall is required. The mounting rail is to be connected conductively to the back wall. This is
achieved by inserting a contact washer with the fastening screw:
Figure 37: Grounding the mounting rail
For lacquered or coated back walls, an adequate connection is only guaranteed if the screw has
been threaded into the back wall. If this is not the case, a contact washer must be must be placed
between the fastening nut and the backplane.
Figure 38: Using a contact washer with lacquered or coated back walls
The switching cabinet back wall must be connected with GND ( )
70
3.2 Grounding Terminal Strip
The distance between the grounding strip and the PLC is limited to a maximum of 15 cm. No
electromechanical switching elements (relays, contactors, etc.) are allowed to be attached
between the PLC and the grounding strip. A cable duct is usually mounted directly below the
PLC. A grounding strip should also be used underneath bus expansions (I/O bus segments,
remote I/O bus).
a ...... Metal, grounded control cabinet back wall
b ...... Conductive screw attachment to the control cabinet back wall
c ...... Grounding terminal strip
d ...... Mounting rail
Figure 39: Grounding terminal strip
71
Chapter 2
Installation
It is advisable to mount a grounding terminal strip underneath the PLC. This should be
conductively connected to the screws of the control cabinet back wall. The cable shield and
module connections must also be attached to this grounding strip:
3.3 Cable Shield Grounding

The following connections are made with shielded cables (possible exceptions are listed in the
individual module descriptions):
Analog I/O
Interface cables
Encoder cables
The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends. On the PLC side, the grounding is made to the
terminal strip underneath the housing.
If any differences in potential exist between the PLC and connected elements, transient current
flows over the cable shield (often causes the cable to get warm), then the following steps should
be taken: The cable shield is to be separated and bridged with a high-quality capacitor (ceramic
or foil capacitors of at least 47 nF with a low impedance at high frequencies).
Figure 40: Cable shield grounding
72
3.4 Using DSUB connectors

DSUB connectors must be equipped with a metal-plated connector housing.
The shield is connected directly to the plug housing. Connecting the shield by twisting it before
attaching it considerably reduces the shielding effect and should therefore be avoided.
Chapter 2
Installation
If metallic screw clamps are not available, the cable shield can be externally grounded with a
grounding clamp (see Section 3.3 "Cable Shield Grounding", on page 72).
Table 22: Using DSUB connectors
73
Installation Wiring
4. Wiring
There are two basic types of cables used for B&R 2000 control systems:
Shielded cables: interface cables, cables for analog signals
Cable for digital signals
These two cable types should be separated running through different channels. If cables of
different groups are run in the same channel over a long distance, a metallic, grounded partition
should keep them apart.
Figure 41: Wiring
The proposed cable arrangement is only possible if the order of the modules corresponds with:
Figure 42: Layout of the module
74
Installation External Protective Circuit
5. External Protective Circuit

An external protective circuit is necessary for relay output modules. The internal protection is
used for increasing the lifespan of the relay and improve the EMC properties as well.
The external protection circuit can be installed either on the switching load, or between the
terminal block and load. Most manufacturers of solenoid operated valves and contactors offer
suitable protective circuit devices for the respective elements.
RC element: can be used for D.C or A.C.
Varistor: usually used for A.C.
Inverse diode: can only be used for D.C.
Diode/Z-diode combination: can only be used for D.C. This type of protective circuit
allows faster switch-off times.
Chapter 2
Installation
Possible protective elements are:
6. Installation Guidelines
The B&R 2005 controller should only be mounted horizontally. There must be must at
least 10 cm free space above the modules and at least 7 cm free space underneath the
modules. The cooling vents are not allowed to be covered.
Due to load carrying capacity reasons and electromagnetic compatibility, the mounting
rail should be screwed into the grounded, metal back wall at intervals of 10 cm.
The maximum environmental temperature during operation (usually 60 C) refers to the

air temperature underneath the modules (air inlet).
Sufficient distance must be left between devices which cause high electromagnetic
interference (e.g. frequency converters, transformers, motor regulators, etc.). The
distance between the devices and the PLC should be as large as possible. If possible
they should be shielded using a metal partition (VACOPERM 7).
75
Installation Installation Guidelines

Inserting and Removing Modules
Modules should never be inserted or removed while the PLC is switched on (except I/O
modules).
Unplug cabled connectors before modules are removed.
Power connectors are not allowed to be inserted or removed if voltage is still being
supplied (remove power).
Inserting and Removing I/O Modules while the Controller is Running

I/O modules are allowed to be inserted and removed under the following conditions:
Connectors are not allowed to carry voltages and must be removed.
When inserting the module, please note that it takes approx. 2 s to tip the module back
into place.
Unless switching a module during operation is supported by the software, removing a

module causes an emergency stop of the controller.
Figure 43: Inserting and removing I/O modules while the controller is running
76
Installation Storage and Storage Temperatures
7. Storage and Storage Temperatures
8. Environmental Temperature during Operation / Relative

Humidity
The following values are valid for all 2005 modules if no other values are listed in the "Technical
Data" section.
Environmental Temperature during Operation
Relative Humidity
0 to 60C
5 to 95%, non-condensing
Table 23: Environmental temperature during operation / relative humidity
77
Chapter 2
Installation
For modules that do not have buffer batteries or rechargeable batteries, a storage temperature
of -20 to +70 C is allowed. Modules with buffer batteries or rechargeable batteries are allowed
to be stored at a temperature of -20 to +60 C. If applicable, other temperatures are listed in the
technical data for the modules.
Installation Environmental Temperature during Operation / Relative Humidity
78
B&R 2005 Modules Module Overview B&R 2005 Modules in Alphabetical Order
Chapter 3 B&R 2005 Modules

1. Module Overview B&R 2005
The "Power" column contains values for the power provided or the power required by the
module. In this way, a power balance can be calculated quickly and easily for a certain hardware
configuration.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The power provided by the power supply modules is shown with a "+" sign. The power required
by a module is shown with a "" sign.
To calculate the power balance, the positive and negative power values should be added
together. The sum is not allowed to be less than zero.
Power [W]
Model No.
Page
B&R ID Code
Exp. Backplane
Main Backplane
1.1 Modules in Alphabetical Order
0G2001.00-090
606
0AC240.9
602
3AI350.6
313
-1 / -3.5 / -4.5
3AI375.6
313
$81
-1 / -3.5 / -4.5
3AI775.6
325
$84
1.5 / --- / 1.5
3AI780.6
337
$88
-1.5 / -5 / -6.5
3AM050.6
376
4 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 4 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, 12-bit

resolution
$89
-1.5 / -5 / -6.5
3AM051.6
389
AM055
5 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 3 voltage outputs 10 V,

1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, 12-bit resolution
$97
-1.5
-5.5 incl. pot. voltage
-7
3AM055.6
402
AM374
4 inputs 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, 4 outputs 10 V / 0 - 20 mA,

signal can be switched in 2 groups
$8A
-1.5 / -5 / -6.5
3AM374.6
416
5 V / 24 V / Total
Name
Description
0G2001
2005 positioning accessory, cable for operating system

download directly from the PC to the NC154
AC240
Battery module for two 9 V block cells, separate slot
AI350
8 8 voltage inputs 10 V, 12-bit resolution
$82
-1 / -3.5 / -4.5
AI375
8 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 12-bit resolution
$80
AI775
8 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 12-bit resolution
AI780
8 single channel isolated current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 16-bit

resolution
AM050
4 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 4 voltage outputs 10 V, 12-bit

resolution
AM051
Table 24: Overview of B&R 2005 modules, sorted alphabetically according to product ID
79
Name
Description
Main Backplane
Exp. Backplane
B&R ID Code
5 V / 24 V / Total
Model No.
Page
AO350
8 voltage outputs 10 V, 12-bit resolution
$A0
-1 / -4 / -5
3AO350.6
361
AO360
$A2
-1.1 / -4 / -5.1
3AO360.60-1
366
AO775
8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, 11-bit resolution
$A1
-1 / -4.5 / -5.5
3AO775.6
370
AT350
4 inputs for PT100 sensors (3-line)
$93
-1 / -3 / -4
3AT350.6
438
AT450
4 inputs for PT100 sensors (4-line)
$92
-1 / -3 / -4
3AT450.6
438
AT660
8 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors

with type K, raw value measurement
$95
-1.25 / -4.75 / -6
3AT660.6
451
Power [W]
BM150
Dummy module
3BM150.9
607
BP150
Backplane with 15 slots
3BP150.4
90
BP150
Backplane with 15 slots, backup battery
3BP150.41
90
BP151
3BP151.4
90
BP151
3BP151.41
90
BP152
3BP152.4
90
BP152
3BP152.41
90
BP155
3BP155.4
90
BP155
3BP155.41
90
CP260
2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM,

2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface
$27
-5.7 / -2.3 / -8
3CP260.60-1
120
CP340
2005 CPU, x86 233 Intel compatible, 16 MB DRAM,

512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact
Flash, 1 insert slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface,
1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program
memory must be ordered separately
---
-4.5 / -1 / -5.5
3CP340.60-1
129
CP360
2005 CPU, Pentium 266, 32 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM,

exchangeable application memory: Compact Flash, 1 insert
slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface, 1 RS232 interface,
1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be
ordered separately.
---
-11 / -3 / -14
3CP360.60-1 1)
129
CP380
2005 CPU, Pentium III 500, 64 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM,

modules for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface,
ordered separately
---
-13 / -3 / -16
3CP380.60-1
129
CP382

slots for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet
interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered
separately
---
-13 / -4 / -17
3CP382.60-1
129
Table 24: Overview of B&R 2005 modules, sorted alphabetically according to product ID (cont.)
80
DI475
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 10 ms switching delay
DI476
DI477
32 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms switching delay, connection:

DSUB connector
DI486
Model No.
$08
-2 / --- / -2
3DI450.60-9
203
$01
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DI475.6
216
$07
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DI476.6
216
$05
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DI477.6
220

terminal
$09
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3DI486.6
226
DI695
16 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay
$B2
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DI695.6
233
DI875
16 Namur inputs, 8.05 VDC, 1 ms switching delay
$B4
-1.3 / -4.8 / -6.1
3DI875.6
238
DM455
8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, 8 transistor outputs,

0 - 50 VDC, 1 A
$20
-3.5 / --- / -3.5
3DM455.60-2
186
DM476
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, 16 transistor

outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A
$62
-2.5 / --- / -2.5
3DM476.6
291
DM486
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms, 16 FET outputs, 24 VDC,

0.5 A
$63
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3DM486.6
301
DO479
16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A
$40
-1 / --- / -1
3DO479.6
249
DO480
16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A
$41
-1.5 / -1 / -2.5
3DO480.6
256
DO486
32 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A
$42
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3DO486.6
263
DO650
16 relay outputs, 24 VDC / 120 VAC, 2 A
$03
-0.7 / -3.3 / -4
3DO650.6
272
DO690
8 Triac outputs, 120 VAC, 1 A
$61
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DO690.6
277
DO750
$04
-0.7 / -2.3 / -3
3DO750.6
272
DO760
$B0
-4 / --- / -4
3DO760.6
282
EX150
Remote I/O master
-5.5 / --- / -5.5
3EX150.60-1
103
EX250
Remote I/O slave, power supply insert
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3EX250.60-1
109
EX282
ETHERNET Powerlink bus controller, 2 ETHERNET

Powerlink interfaces, power supply module insert
-3.8 / --- / -3.8
3EX282.6
487
EX350
I/O Master Controller, power supply insert
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3EX350.6
114
IF050
Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422,

1 x RS232/TTY
-7 / --- / -7
3IF050.6
494
Power [W]
IF060
Interface module with insert slot for interface module inserts
IF260
2005 CPU or progr. interface processor, 850 KB SRAM,

1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts
IF613
Interface module for insert slot, 3 x RS232
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3IF613.9
503
IF621
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3IF621.9
507
$2A
-1 / --- / -1
3IF060.6
501
-3.5 / --- / -3.5
3IF260.60-1
145
81
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 4 counter inputs, gate/period

measurement
5 V / 24 V / Total
Page
DI450
B&R ID Code
Description
Exp. Backplane
Name
Main Backplane
Power [W]
Name
Description
Model No.
Page
B&R ID Code
Exp. Backplane
Main Backplane
IF622
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x RS485/RS422
-1.8 / --- / -1.8
3IF622.9
511
IF661
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485 RS485 (PROFIBUS

DP slave)
-2 / --- / -2
3IF661.9
515
IF671
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422,

1 x CAN
-2 / --- / -2
3IF671.9
519
IF672
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN
-1.8 / --- / -1.8
3IF672.9
524
IF681.95
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x ETHERNET

(10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket)
-2.4 / --- / -2.4
3IF681.95
528
IF681.96

(10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket)
-1.65 / --- / -1.65
3IF681.96
528
IF686
Interface module for insert slot, 1 ETHERNET Powerlink

interface, manager or controller function
-1.76 / --- / -1.76
3IF686.9
532
-2.1 / --- / -2.1
3IF772.9
537
-6.5
-11.5 incl. pot. volt.
-18
3IP161.60-1
154
5 V / 24 V / Total
IF772
aPCI interface module for aPCI insert, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN
IP161
2005 programmable I/O processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB

FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN:
electrically isolated, network capable, max. 12 digital inputs
24 VDC, Sink, max. 12 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog
inputs 10 V, 14-bit, 6 analog outputs 10 V, 12-bit, 2 outputs
with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block. Order 3 x TB170
terminal blocks separately.
MASYS2
2005-0
B&R 2005 Users Manual, German
MASYS22005-0
610
MASYS2
2005 - E
B&R 2005 Users Manual, English
MASYS22005-E
610
MASYS2
2005-F
B&R 2005 Users Manual, French
MASYS22005-F
610
NC150
Counter module, 2 32-bit counters, 100 kHz, 2 voltage inputs

10 V, 12-bit resolution
-1.5 / -3.5 / -5
3NC150.6
548
NC154
2005 axis controller, 3 axes. Each axis has the following data:
Input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32-bit,
encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC,
sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output
+/- 10 V, 12-bit, 12-pin. Order 3 x TB162 terminal blocks
separately.
-6 / --- / -6
3NC154.60-2
563
NC157
2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up

to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs, 24 VDC, sink, 4-pin terminal block
included in the delivery.
-6 / --- / -6
3NC157.60-1
572
NC352
B&R 2005 transducer module with 3 pulse interfaces, 3 digital

inputs (24 V DC) (can be configured as event counter, for gate
and frequency measurement and as A/B counter with external
count frequency option) and also one digital output (24 V DC).
Order TB708 terminal block separately.
-2.3 / -1.7 / -4
3NC352.6
581
$34
$9A
82
PROFIBUS network module
PS465
Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot
PS477
Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave
TB162
Single row terminal block, 12-pin, screw clamps
TB170
TB170
TB170
20 single row terminal blocks, 20-pin, screw clamps
3TB170:90-02
609
TB170
20 single row terminal blocks, 20-pin, cage clamps
3TB170:91-02
609
UM161
2005 universal mixed module, 1x4 analog inputs 10 V, 14-bit,

1x3 analog outputs 10 V, 12-bit, 1x14 digital inputs 24 VDC,
1 ms, 1 digital output 24 VDC, 2 A, 500 s, 1 digital output
24 VDC, 10 mA, 10 s, both outputs can be used as inputs.
Order 2 x TB718 terminal blocks separately!
XP152
2005 CPU, 118 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232

interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network
capable, insert for power supply modules
5 V / 24 V / Total
Model No.
-7 / --- / -7
3NW150.60-1
541
+40 / +50 / +60
3PS465.9
100
+40 / +50 / +58.5
3PS477.9
100
3TB162.9
608
3TB170.9
609
Single row terminal block, 20-pin, cage clamps
3TB170.91
609
$99
-2
-4 (-1.5 f. pot. volt.)
-6
3UM161.6
468
$11
-4 / --- / -4
3XP152.60-2
176
1) This CPU replaces the 3CP360.60-2. The 3CP360.60-1 has one additional USB interface.
Power [W]
5 V / 24 V / Total
Model No.
Page
B&R ID Code
Description
Exp. Backplane
Name
Main backplane
1.2 According to Groups
Module Rack
BP150
3BP150.4
90
BP150
3BP150.41
90
90
BP151
3BP151.4
BP151
3BP151.41
90
BP152
3BP152.4
90
BP152
3BP152.41
90
BP155
3BP155.4
90
BP155
3BP155.41
90
Table 25: B&R 2005 module overview sorted according to group
83
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Power [W]
Page
NW150
B&R ID Code
Description
Exp. Backplane
Name
Main Backplane
B&R 2005 Modules Module Overview B&R 2005 According to Groups
Exp. Backplane
PS465
Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slot
+40 / +50 / +60
3PS465.9
100
PS477
Power supply 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion slave
+40 / +50 / +58.5
3PS477.9
100
EX150
Remote I/O master
-5.5 / --- / -5.5
3EX150.60-1
103
EX250
Remote I/O slave, power supply insert
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3EX250.60-1
109
EX350
I/O master controller, power supply insert
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3EX350.6
114
CP260
2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM,

2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface
$27
-5.7 / -2.3 / -8
3CP260.60-1
120
CP340
2005 CPU, x86 233 Intel compatible, 16 MB DRAM,

512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact
Flash, 1 insert slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface,
1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program
memory must be ordered separately
---
-4.5 / -1 / -5.5
3CP340.60-1
129
CP360
2005 CPU, Pentium 266, 32 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM,

slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface, 1 RS232 interface,
ordered separately.
---
-11 / -3 / -14
3CP360.60-1 1)
129
CP380

modules for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface,
ordered separately
---
-13 / -3 / -16
3CP380.60-1
129
CP382

slots for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet
interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered
separately
---
-13 / -4 / -17
3CP382.60-1
129
IF260

1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts
$2A
-3.5 / --- / -3.5
3IF260.60-1
145
IP161

24 VDC, Sink, max. 12 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog
inputs 10 V, 14-bit, 6 analog outputs 10 V, 12-bit, 2 outputs
with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block. Order 3 x TB170
$34
-6.5
-18
3IP161.60-1
154
XP152

interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network
$11
-4 / --- / -4
3XP152.60-2
176
Description
Power [W]
5 V / 24 V / Total
Model No.
Page
Name
B&R ID Code
Main backplane
Power Supply Modules
Bus Controller Modules
CPUs
Table 25: B&R 2005 module overview sorted according to group (cont.)
84
B&R ID Code
5 V / 24 V / Total
$20
-3.5 / --- / -3.5
3DM455.60-2
186
Power [W]
Model No.
Page
Description
Exp. Backplane
Name
Main backplane
Programmable Modules
DM455
8 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, 8 transistor outputs,

0 - 50 VDC, 1 A
DI450
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 4 counter inputs, gate/period

measurement
$08
-2 / --- / -2
3DI450.60-9
203
DI475
$01
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DI475.6
216
DI476
$07
-1.5 / --- / -1.5
3DI476.6
216
DI477

DSUB connector
$05
-1.5 / --- / -1,5
3DI477.6
220
DI486

terminal
$09
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3DI486.6
226
DI695
16 digital inputs, 120 / 230 VAC, 50 ms switching delay
$B2
-1,5 / --- / -1,5
3DI695.6
233
DI875
16 Namur inputs, 8.05 VDC, 1 ms switching delay
$B4
-1.3 / -4.8 / -6.1
3DI875.6
238
249
Digital Output Modules

DO479
$40
-1 / --- / -1
3DO479.6
DO480
16 transistor outputs, 24 VDC, 2 A
$41
-1,5 / -1 / -2,5
3DO480.6
256
DO486
32 FET outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A
$42
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3DO486.6
263
DO650
$03
-0.7 / -3.3 / -4
3DO650.6
272
DO690
8 Triac outputs, 120 VAC, 1 A
$61
-1,5 / --- / -1,5
3DO690.6
277
DO750
$04
-0.7 / -2.3 / -3
3DO750.6
272
DO760
$B0
-4 / --- / -4
3DO760.6
282
Digital Mixed Modules

DM476
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC, 1 ms, 16 transistor

outputs, 24 VDC, 0.4 A
$62
-2,5 / --- / -2,5
3DM476.6
291
DM486
16 digital inputs, 24 VDC, 1 ms, 16 FET outputs, 24 VDC,

0.5 A
$63
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3DM486.6
301
AI350
8 voltage inputs 10 V, 12-bit resolution
$82
-1 / -3,5 / -4,5
3AI350.6
313
AI375
8 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 12-bit resolution
$80
-1 / -3,5 / -4,5
3AI375.6
313
AI775
8 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 12-bit resolution
$81
-1 / -3,5 / -4,5
3AI775.6
325
AI780
8 single channel isolated current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 16-bit

resolution
$84
1,5 / --- / 1,5
3AI780.6
337
Analog Input Modules
85
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Digital Input Modules
Main backplane
Exp. Backplane
B&R ID Code
AO350
$A0
-1 / -4 / -5
3AO350.6
361
AO360
$A2
-1.1 / -4 / -5.1
3AO360.60-1
366
AO775
8 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, 11-bit resolution
$A1
-1 / -4,5 / -5,5
3AO775.6
370
Description
Power [W]
5 V / 24 V / Total
Model No.
Page
Name
Analog Output Modules
Analog Mixed Modules

AM050
4 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 4 voltage outputs 10 V, 12-bit

resolution
$88
-1,5 / -5 / -6,5
3AM050.6
376
AM051
4 current inputs 0 - 20 mA, 4 current outputs 0 - 20 mA, 12-bit

resolution
$89
-1,5 / -5 / -6,5
3AM051.6
389
AM055
5 voltage inputs 0 - 10 V, 3 voltage outputs 10 V,

1 potentiometer voltage +10 V, 12-bit resolution
$97
-1,5
-7
3AM055.6
402
AM374
4 input 0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, 4 outputs 10 V / 0 - 20 mA,

signal can be switched in 2 groups
$8A
-1,5 / -5 / -6,5
3AM374.6
416
AT350
4 inputs for PT100 sensors (3 line)
$93
-1 / -3 / -4
3AT350.6
438
AT450
4 inputs for PT100 sensors (4 line)
$92
-1 / -3 / -4
3AT450.6
438
AT660
8 inputs for FeCuNi sensors with type L + J, NiCrNi sensors

with type K, raw value measurement
$95
-1.25 / -4.75 / -6
3AT660.6
451
UM161
2005 universal mixed module, 1x4 analog inputs 10 V, 14-bit,

1x3 analog outputs 10 V, 12-bit, 1x14 digital inputs 24 VDC,
1 ms, 1 digital output 24 VDC, 2 A, 500 s, 1 digital output
24 VDC, 10 mA, 10 s, both outputs can be used as inputs.
Order 2 x TB718 terminal blocks separately!
$99
-2
-4 (-1.5 f. pot. volt.)
-6
3UM161.6
468
EX282
ETHERNET Powerlink bus controller, 2 ETHERNET

Powerlink interfaces, power supply module insert
-3.8 / --- / -3.8
3EX282.6
487
IF050
Interface module, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422,

1 x RS232/TTY
-7 / --- / -7
3IF050.6
494
IF060
Interface module with insert slot for interface module inserts
-1 / --- / -1
3IF060.6
501
IF613
Interface module for insert slot, 3 x RS232
-1.2 / --- / -1.2
3IF613.9
503
IF621
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485/RS422, 1 x CAN
-1,5 / --- / -1,5
3IF621.9
507
IF622
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x RS485/RS422
-1.8 / --- / -1.8
3IF622.9
511
IF661
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS485 RS485 (PROFIBUS

DP slave)
-2 / --- / -2
3IF661.9
515
Temperature Modules
Other Modules
Communication Modules
86
Model No.
-2 / --- / -2
3IF671.9
519
Name
Description
IF671
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 1 x RS485/RS422,

1 x CAN
IF672
Interface module for insert slot, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN
-1.8 / --- / -1.8
3IF672.9
524
IF681.95

(10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket)
-2.4 / --- / -2.4
3IF681.95
528
IF681.96

(10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket)
-1.65 / --- / -1.65
3IF681.96
528
IF686
Interface module for insert slot, 1 ETHERNET Powerlink

interface, manager or controller function
-1.76 / --- / -1.76
3IF686.9
532
IF772
aPCI interface module for aPCI insert, 1 x RS232, 2 x CAN
-2.1 / --- / -2.1
3IF772.9
537
NW150
-7 / --- / -7
3NW150.60-1
541
NC150
Counter module, 2 32-bit counter, 100 kHz, 2 voltage inputs

10 V, 12-bit resolution
-1,5 / -3,5 / -5
3NC150.6
548
NC154
2005 Axis Controller, 3 axes. Each axis has the following data:
Input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32-bit,
encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC,
sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output
+/- 10 V, 12-bit, 12-pin. Order 3 x TB162 terminal blocks
separately.
-6 / --- / -6
3NC154.60-2
563
NC157
2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up

to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs, 24 VDC, sink, 4-pin terminal block
-6 / --- / -6
3NC157.60-1
572
NC352
B&R 2005 transducer module with 3 pulse interfaces, 3 digital

inputs (24 V DC) (can be configured as event counter, for gate
and frequency measurement and as A/B counter with external
count frequency option) and also one digital output (24 V DC).
-2.3 / -1.7 / -4
3NC352.6
581
AC240
Battery module for two 9 V block cells, separate slot
0AC240.9
602
0G2001
2005 positioning accessory, cable for operating system

download directly from the PC to the NC154
0G2001.00-090
606
BM150
Dummy module
TB162
TB170
TB170
TB170
20 single row terminal blocks, 20-pin, screw clamps
3TB170:90-02
609
TB170
20 single row terminal blocks, 20-pin, cage clamps
3TB170:91-02
609
Counter and Positioning Modules
$9A
Accessories
3BM150.9
607
3TB162.9
608
3TB170.9
609
Single row terminal block, 20-pin, cage clamps
3TB170.91
609
87
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Power [W]
5 V / 24 V / Total
Page
B&R ID Code
Exp. Backplane
Main backplane
Power [W]
5 V / 24 V / Total
Model No.
Page
B&R ID Code
Description
Exp. Backplane
Name
Main backplane
Manuals
MASYS2
2005-0
MASYS22005-0
610
MASYS2
2005-E
MASYS22005-E
610
MASYS2
2005-F
MASYS22005-F
610
88
B&R 2005 Modules Module Racks BP15x
2. Module Racks
2.1 BP15x
2.1.1 General Information
Backplane modules are installed on the mounting rail. They are used for installing controller
components (CPU, I/O modules, power supply modules, system modules etc.). The I/O bus,
system bus and the supply lines are provided on the backplanes. Backplanes are available with
6, 9, 12 or 15 slots for the B&R 2005.
It is recommended that the smallest possible backplane should be used to ensure that as few
slots as possible remain free. Dummy modules must be installed in all free slots.
The module address is determined by the slot (slot coding). Module addressing begins with
slot 3, which has address 1. For PLC systems with an operating system older than version 1.10,
module addressing for system modules begins with address 0 (numbers are different for system
modules and I/O modules).
Figure 44: BP15x module address
89
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The backplane modules 3BP15x.41 are equipped with a lithium battery. The battery is used for
central data buffering on the 2005 PLC (e.g. data and real-time clock for the XP152).

The following modules can be used depending on whether the backplane is used as a main
backplane or an expansion backplane:
Slot
Main Backplane
Expansion Backplane
Power supply with expansion slot or
Power Supply: With expansion slot
Any other power supply
System or I/O module
With expansion slave

I/O module
I/O module
I/O module
I/O module
15
I/O module
Table 26: BP15x insert modules depending on backplane
2.1.2 Order Data

Model
Number
Short Description
3BP150.4
2005 backplane, 15 slots
Image
Module Rack
3BP151.4
3BP152.4
3BP155.4
3BP150.41
2005 backplane, 15 slots, with backup battery
3BP151.41
3BP152.41
3BP155.41

Accessories
0AC201.9
Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
Backup battery is included in the delivery.
Table 27: BP15x order data
90

2.1.3 Technical Data
Product ID
BP150
BP151
BP152
BP155
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Number of Slots
15
12
13 system and
I/O modules
10 system and
I/O modules
7 system and
I/O modules
4 system and
I/O modules
13 I/O modules
10 I/O modules
7 I/O modules
4 I/O modules
165, 600, 23
165, 480, 23
165, 360, 23
165, 240, 23
Number of Modules that can be Inserted
On Expansion Backplane
1 Power Supply + ...
Dimensions (H, W, D) [mm]1)
Only backplane modules with order number 3BP15x.41

Lithium Battery - 3 V / 950 mAh
0AC201.9 - 5 lithium batteries
Max. 3 years at 30 C
Backup Battery
Type
Model Number
Storage Time (not installed)
Storage Temperature
Backplane Module without Battery
Backplane Module with Battery
Battery (not installed)
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
On the Main Backplane

1 Power Supply + ...
-20 to +70 C
-20 to +60 C
-20 to +60 C
Table 28: BP15x technical data

1) When installing the backplane, it is important to allow for 20 mm space on both sides of the backplane for the fastening lever.
2.1.4 Backup Battery

The backplane modules 3BP15x.41 are equipped with a lithium battery. The battery is used for
central data buffering on the B&R SYSTEM 2005 (e.g. data and real-time clock for the XP152).
Figure 45: 3BP15x.41 backup battery
91

Buffer Battery Data
Lithium Battery
3 V / 950 mAh
Model Number
0AC201.9
Short Description
Storage Temperature
-20 to +60 C
Storage Time
Relative humidity
0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Table 29: 3BP15x.41 buffer battery data
Battery Change Interval

Batteries installed in the B&R 2005 backplane module should be changed according to the
following change interval:
Change Interval:
Every 4 years1)
Buffer Time
Buffer time is reduced when more processors e.g. IP161, XP152 or IF260 are operated from the
same backplane module and when the rechargeable battery is already empty.
Reduction factor = Number of all processor modules on the backplane
2.1.5 Changing the Lithium Battery
The product design allows the battery to be changed with the PLC switched either on or off. In
some countries, safety regulations do not allow batteries to be changed while the module is
switched on. Therefore, B&R recommends the battery is switched when the power supply is
switched off.
Data is lost when modules do not have their own buffer.
Procedure for Changing the Battery

1) Disconnect the power supply.
2) Touch the mounting rail or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge
any electrostatic charge from your body.
3) Open the battery compartment using a screwdriver. The screwdriver should be placed in the
slot and by levering it upwards, the compartment can be opened.
1) The change intervals refers to the average life span and operating conditions and are recommended by B&R. They do not correspond
to the maximum buffer duration.
92

4) Remove the battery from the holder by pulling the battery compartment cover.
5) Remove the lithium battery (do not use insulated tools because of risk of short circuiting).
The battery should not be held by its edges. Insulated tweezers may also be used for
removing the battery.
Figure 46: Holding the 3BP15x.41 battery correctly
6) Insert the new battery with correct polarity. The removal strip must be located underneath
the battery as otherwise the battery can not be removed.
Correct:
Incorrect:
Figure 47: The removal strip must be located underneath the 3BP15x.41 battery
7) Close the cover for the lithium battery.

8) Connect the lines to the power supply.
Lithium batteries are considered hazardous waste! Used batteries should be
disposed of accordingly.
93
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
B&R 2005 Modules Power Supply Modules General Information
3. Power Supply Modules

3.1 General Information
Power supply modules create the voltages required internally by the PLC from a 24 VDC input
voltage. Each main and expansion unit requires its own power supply module. The power supply
module always has to be operated in the far left slot of the backplane. All power supply modules
require two slots.
3.1.1 Overview
Power Supply
Input Voltage
PS465
Output Power
Interface for System Expansions
Max. 60 W
Expansion slot
24 VDC
PS477
Max. 58.5 W
Expansion slave
Table 30: Power supply module overview
3.1.2 Slots
The power supply must always be located on the far left slot.
When configuring a system, make sure that the power consumption of all modules installed is
not larger than the output power of the power supply module. If a power supply unit cannot
provide the power required by the modules, install the I/O modules on an expansion backplane.
3.1.3 Current Limitation
Power supply modules are equipped with an internal current limit (short circuit protection) and
have connections for an external buffer voltage (AC240 battery module). The current limitation
is also activated if the modules require more power than the power supply can deliver. This
causes a reset on the CPU without a power failure having occurred.
94

3.1.4 10-pin Terminal Block
Connection
Assignment
10
External buffer + 1)
External buffer - 1)
---
+24V
---
---
GND
Ground
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
6 2)
Table 31: Power supply modules 10-pin terminal blocks

1) For the PS477 power supply module, these connections are only meaningful when used in the main rack.
2) Contacts for the READY relay when the PLC is switched off.
3.1.5 LED Displays

Power supply modules have LED displays which indicate specific operational states:
LED Name
Function
DC1
Control LED for 5 V voltage supply.
DC2
DC3

If one of the DCs LEDs is not lit, it means the internal voltage is not within the valid range.
This can be caused by an overload or the input voltage has slipped under the required minimum range.
DC 24V
The connected 24 VDC input voltage is OK.
Table 32: Power supply modules operational states
95

3.1.6 READY Relay
If a reset occurs, the ready relay reacts to a loss in current by stopping the entire PLC through
the programming system. It can be set or reset by the operating system. Errors that cause the
relay to open are defined in the operating system.
It is also possible using software to define other errors that should cause a drop in the ready
relay. The ready relay is coupled with the status LED "RUN" on the CPU.
The READY relay is controlled by the CPU. Therefore the pin assignments listed
for the power supply PS477 are only valid for use in a main backplane.
Wiring the ready relay is carried out using the 10-pin terminal block. The ready relay contact can
be integrated in the emergency stop circuit:
Figure 48: Power supply READY relay
96

3.1.7 Fuse
The power supply is equipped with a fuse which protects it from reverse polarity and overload.
The compartment for the fuse is located behind the module door.
6.3 A slow-blow / 250 V
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Glass fuse 5 * 20 mm:
Figure 49: Fuses for the power supply modules
Before changing the fuse, the power supply must be disconnected.
Procedure when Changing a Fuse

3) Open the module door.
4) Loosen fuse holder by turning with a screwdriver in the direction shown by the arrow
5) Remove the fuse holder.
6) Remove the old fuse from the fuse holder.
7) Place the new fuse in the fuse holder.
8) Replace fuse holder in the power supply module.
9) Tighten fuse holder by turning with a screwdriver in the opposite direction as shown by the
arrow
10) Close the module door.
97

3.1.8 Expansion Slot
Power supply module PS465 has an expansion slot. The XP152 CPU e.g. can be placed in this
expansion slot.
3.1.9 Expansion Slave (local expansion)
An expansion slave is integrated into the PS477 power supply module which allows another I/O
bus segment to be started (see Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 2 "System Configuration and
Power Supply", on page 54).
Interfaces for bus expansion are located behind the module door:
Interface 1 (expansion slave IN) is connected with the EX350 I/O master controller or with
interface 2 of a PS477 power supply module.
Interface 2 (expansion slave OUT) is connected with interface 1 of another PS477 power
supply module.
Figure 50: Power supply module interfaces for expansion slaves
98

3.1.10 Remote Slave (remote expansion)
The remote slave EX250 can be inserted in the expansion slot on power supply module PS465.
The remote slave can be connected to the remote master bus cable on 2005 or 2010 systems.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
With remote expansion (remote I/O), the expansion unit (remote slave) can be up to 1200 m
away from the main unit (remote master). With a repeater, the network can be extended even
further. Without a repeater, a maximum of 31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote
master.
99
B&R 2005 Modules Power Supply Modules PS465 / PS477
3.2 PS465 / PS477

3.2.1 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Power Supply Modules

3PS465.9
2005 power supply module, 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion

slot
3PS477.9
2005 power supply module, 24 VDC, 50 W, with expansion

slave
Accessories
0G0010.00-090
Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for

B&R 2005 / B&R 2010
0G0012.00-090

B&R 2005 / B&R 2010
Table 33: PS465 / PS477 order data

Product ID
PS465
C-UL-US Listed
PS477
Yes
Input Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
External Backup Capacitor

For Single-Phase Bridge
For Three-Phase Bridge
10000 F
6000 F
Output Power
5V
24 V
Total
Current Requirements
Input Capacitance
Max. 40 W
Max. 50 W
Max. 60 W
Max. 40 W
Max. 50 W
Max. 58.5 W
Max. 3.5 A
500 F
Table 34: PS465 / PS477 technical data
100
B&R 2005 Modules Power Supply Modules PS465 / PS477

Product ID
PS465
Protection
PS477
6.3 A time lag / 250 V
Expansion Slave
No
Expansion Slot
Yes
External RAM Buffering by Supplying
Yes
No
12 V (min. 8 V / max. 30 V)
Contact for READY Relay

Design
Switching Voltage
Switching Current
Protection
Normally open contact

Max. 30 VDC
Max. 3 A
370 V transient voltage protection diode to ground
Dimensions
B&R 2005 double-width
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 34: PS465 / PS477 technical data (cont.)
101
B&R 2005 Modules Bus Controller Modules Overview
4. Bus Controller Modules

4.1 Overview
Module
Description
EX150
2005 remote I/O master, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus
EX250
2005 remote I/O slave controller, electrically isolated RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus, power supply
module insert
EX350
2005 local I/O master controller, controls I/O modules on up to four expansion backplanes, power supply module insert
Table 35: Bus controller module overview
102
B&R 2005 Modules Bus Controller Modules EX150
4.2 EX150
Remote Master
The remote master is a system module that can be used to connect I/O modules to the CPU over
long distances. The remote master and up to 31 remote slaves are connected with a bus cable
(see Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 2 "System Configuration and Power Supply", on page 54).
Remote Slave
A B&R SYSTEM 2005 is integrated into a remote I/O bus as a slave station with the EX250 bus
controller. The EX250 bus controller is operated in an expansion slot on power supply module
PS465.
Model Number
Short Description
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
4.2.2 Order Data

Image
Remote I/O Master

3EX150.60-1
2005 remote I/O master, electrically isolated RS485 interface

for connection to a remote I/O bus
Accessories
0G1000.00-090
Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O
0AC916.9
Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks,

remote I/O, standard mounting rail installation, supply
voltage: 120 / 230 VAC
Table 36: EX150 order data
103

Product ID
C-UL-US Listed
B&R ID Code
EX150
Yes
$01
Serial Interface
Design
Electrical Isolation
Baud Rates
100 kBit/s
181 kBit/s
500 kBit/s
1000 kBit/s
2000 kBit/s
RS485
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Depends on the distance
Max. 1,200 m
Max. 1,000 m
Max. 400 m
Max. 200 m
Max. 100 m
Remote I/O Bus

Access Procedure
Maximum No. of Remote I/O Masters
Number of Slaves
Topology
Connection to the Bus
Transfer Media
Master-slave principle
8
Max. 31 (without repeater)
Physical bus
Direct
Shielded, twisted pair
External
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions
Max. 5.5 W
--Max. 5.5 W
B&R 2005 single-width
Table 37: EX150 technical data
104

4.2.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
RUN
An I/O data transfer is running on the remote bus
ERROR
The remote master has been reset
Tx
Data is being sent
Rx
Data is being received
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 38: EX150 status LEDs
105

4.2.5 Operational and Connection Elements
The number switch for setting the slave address and the connection socket for the RS485
interface are located behind the module door.
Table 39: EX150 operational and connection elements
106

4.2.6 RS485 Interface
The interface is electrically isolated. The status LEDs Rx and Tx are lit during data transfer via
the RS485 interface.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Maximum Transfer Rate: 2 MBit/s

Max. Distance:
1,200 m
Figure 51: EX150 RS485 interface

Pin
1
Assignment
Function
Shield
2
3
DATA
Data
CTRL
Transmit enable
GND
Electrically isolated supply
5 V / 200 mA
DATA\
Data\
CTRL\
Transmit Enable\
107

4.2.7 Cabling a Remote System
Information concerning specifications for the bus cable and cabling can be found in Chapter 2
"Installation", Section 2.1.3 "Remote I/O Bus", on page 58.
4.2.8 Intelligent Slave
An intelligent slave (ISL) is an RIO slave with its own CPU. The CPU on the ISL can make
calculations or prepare data before it is sent back to the master. This data does not absolutely
have to be inputs or outputs. ISL CPU internal variables are also possible.
Using ISLs can greatly reduce the load on the master's CPU. ISL CPUs are complete CPU
modules (B&R SYSTEM 2005 or B&R SYSTEM 2010) with the same task class system. They
can run nearly independent of the master CPU and send responses to the master when required.
Hardware:
The RIO master remains unchanged (B&R SYSTEM 2005 or

B&R SYSTEM 2010). The hardware configuration of the intelligent slave is
the same as for the master: RIO master module (EX150), CPU and diverse
I/O. Physically, it is a two master system. Cabling is carried out in the same
way as on a "normal" master/slave system.
Number Switch:
The setting for the slave address is made with both number switches.
Addresses in the range from 1 to 98 are allowed. However, a maximum of
31 remote slaves can be connected to a remote master (without repeater).
Dynamic addressing does not work on an ISL!
4.2.9 Commissioning a Remote System

Procedure when commissioning a remote system:
1) Cable the entire remote system (see Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 2 "System
Configuration and Power Supply", on page 54).
2) Install the terminating resistors at the beginning and end of the remote buses (correct
placement of bus terminators is very important when using high baud rates).
3) Set all slave addresses (no doubled addresses; 0 may not be used; dynamic addressing is
activated using address 99, see Section 4.3 "EX250", on page 109).
4) Switch on all stations. The slaves automatically determine the baud rate of the master each
time the system is switched on. Automatic baud rate recognition for remote slaves is
described in Section 4.3 "EX250", on page 109. The start-up sequence is not important for
function and boot procedure.
Setting the baud rate is made on the CPU using B&R Automation Studio. The default setting
is 500 kBaud.
108
4.3 EX250
A B&R SYSTEM 2005 is integrated into a remote I/O bus as slave station with the EX250 bus
controller. A bus cable is used to connect the remote master station and up to 31 remote slave
stations. Each B&R SYSTEM 2005 slave begins a new I/O bus which can be used to address a
maximum of 13 modules.
The EX250 bus controller is operated in an expansion slot on power supply module PS465.
4.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Remote I/O Slave

2005 remote I/O slave controller, electrically isolated
RS485 interface for connection to a remote I/O bus, power
supply module insert
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3EX250.60-1
Accessories
0G1000.00-090
Bus connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks,

remote I/O
0AC916.9

109

Product ID
C-UL-US Listed
Slot
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
EX250
In preparation
Insert for power supply PS465
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
Peripherals
Diagnosis LEDs
Yes
Number Switch
Used to set the slave address
Standard Communication interface

Serial Interface
Design
Baud Rates
100 kBit/s
181 kBit/s
500 kBit/s
1000 kBit/s
2000 kBit/s
Remote I/O Bus
Access Procedure
Topology
Transfer Media
Baud Rate
RS485
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Max. 1,200 m
Max. 1,000 m
Max. 400 m
Max. 200 m
Max. 100 m
Master-slave principle
Physical bus
Direct
External
Automatic baud rate recognition
110

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The module is equipped with status LEDs, two number switches for slave address settings and
a connector for an RS485 interface.
Table 42: EX250 operational and connection elements
4.3.5 Status LEDs

LED
Description
Power
Supplied by the power supply (5 V)
I/O Error
An I/O module on the expansion backplane can not be accessed.

Cause: Incorrect, missing or defective I/O module. If the I/O Error and I/O Run LEDs are blinking alternately, the slave
attempts to find out the baud rate of the master.
Error
Hardware error on the remote slave. In this case, please contact your technical advisor at B&R.
Run
I/O data transfer. If the I/O Error and I/O Run LEDs are blinking alternately, the slave attempts to find out the baud rate of the
master.
TXD
Data is being sent
RXD
Data is being received
Table 43: EX250 status LEDs
111

4.3.6 Number Switch
The address of the remote slave station is set using number switches. Addresses in the range
from 1 to 98 are allowed. However, a maximum of 31 remote slaves can be connected to a
remote master (without repeater).
Dynamic addressing is activated using address 99. When this address is selected, the remote
slave reads the address from the first I/O module (digital input module) of the remote station. The
first eight digital inputs of the module are interpreted and set as a binary slave address.
The interface is electrically isolated. The status LEDs RXD and TXD light during data transfer via
Max. Distance:
1,200 m
Figure 52: EX250 RS485 interface

Pin
1
Assignment
Function
Shield
2
3
DATA
Data
CTRL
Transmit enable
GND
5 V / 200 mA
DATA\
Data\
CTRL\
Transmit Enable\
112

4.3.8 Automatic Baud Rate Recognition
The EX250 module is equipped with automatic baud rate recognition.
If a remote slave is switched on (which is not connected to the remote bus), the I/O Run
and I/O Error LEDs start to blink alternately. The slave indicates that it is attempting to
define the baud rate of the master.
If the slave is connected to the master via the bus cable, the Run and I/O Error LEDs go
out as soon as the slave has recognized the baud rate of the master (to recognize the
baud rate all telegrams on the remote bus are evaluated).
If after approx. 15 seconds, the slave does not receive a directed telegram from the
master, it switches automatically to baud rate recognition (responds after start-up).
The EX250 module is equipped with a module fastener. The module fastener prevents the
remote I/O bus controller from falling out of the power supply during transport.
A screwdriver is required to install the module. The screwdriver should be inserted between the
power supply and EX250 at the same height as the sloped marking (see figure below). By
simultaneously levering the screwdriver in the direction of the power supply and pulling the
EX250, the I/O master controller is taken out from its bracing and can be removed from the
power supply.
Figure 53: EX250 module fastener
113
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
4.3.9 Module Fastener
4.4 EX350
Using the EX350 I/O master controller allows up to four expansion backplanes (including all I/O
modules) to be operated with the CP260, CP360, IF260 and IP161 CPUs.
The I/O master controller is operated in the expansion slot of a PS465 power supply module. I/O
modules on the main rack are handled by the CPU. The EX350 module supports the CPU during
data processing of the I/O modules on the expansion base plates.
4.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Local I/O Master Controller

3EX350.6
2005 local I/O master controller, controls I/O modules on

up to four expansion backplanes, power supply module
insert
Accessories
0G0010.00-090

B&R 2005 / B&R 2010
0G0012.00-090

B&R 2005 / B&R 2010
114

Product ID
EX350
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$02
Slot
Communication Interface
Expansion master
No
Access Procedure
B&R local I/O bus expansion (secure)
Data Buffering
Battery buffered via B&R 2005 backplane
Number of Expansion Backplanes
Max. 4
Refers to B&R 2005 main and expansion systems
1024 inputs / 1024 outputs
512 inputs / 512 outputs
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
Dimensions (H, W, D) [mm]
130, 28, 105
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Number of I/O Data Points

Digital
Analog
115

4.4.4 Installation and Communication Interface
The I/O master controller is operated in the expansion slot of a PS465 power supply module.
A B&R System 2005 or 2010 expansion slave can be connected to I/O master controller interface
(see Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 2 "System Configuration and Power Supply", on page 54).
Figure 54: EX350 installation and communication interface
116

The module is equipped with a module fastener (starting with revision 02.00). The module
fastener prevents the I/O master controller from falling out of the power supply during transport.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
power supply and EX350 at the same height as the sloped marking (see figure below). By
EX350, the I/O master controller is taken out from its bracing and can be removed from the
power supply.
117
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs General Information
5. CPUs
5.1.1 Programming
Programming is carried out using B&R Automation Studio. Several programming languages
are available:
Automation Basic (previously PL2000)
ANSI C
IEC 1131 Ladder Diagram (LAD)
IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
IEC 1131 Structured Text (ST)
IEC 1131 Instruction List (IL)
For differences in data type abbreviations between B&R Automation Studio and PG2000, see
Chapter 1 "General Information",Section 4.7 "Programming", on page 31.
5.1.2 Buffering
Buffering data and guaranteeing that the real-time clock operates during power failures are
handled centrally by the backplane or the AC240 battery module.
The CP360 CPU is equipped with its own backup battery.
5.1.3 Programming the FlashPROM
Programming and deleting the built-in FlashPROM memory takes place using the programming
system.
118
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs General Information
Module
Description
CP260
2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232 interface
CP340
2005 CPU, x86 233 Intel compatible, 16 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact Flash,
1 insert slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must
be ordered separately.
CP360
2005 CPU, Pentium 266, 32 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact Flash, 1 insert slot for
aPCI modules, 1 USB interface, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered
separately.
CP380
2005 CPU, Pentium III 500, 64 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact Flash, 1 insert slot
for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered
separately.
CP382
2005 CPU, Pentium III 500, 64 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact Flash, 3 insert slots
for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered
separately.
IF260
2005 CPU or progr. interface processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts
IP161
2005 programmable I/O processor, 850 KB SRAM, 1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN:
electrically isolated, network capable, max. 12 digital inputs 24 VDC, Sink, max. 12 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A, 6 analog
inputs 10 V, 14-bit, 6 analog outputs 10 V, 12-bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block. Order 3 x TB170
XP152
2005 CPU, 118 KB SRAM, 512 KB FlashPROM, 1 RS232 interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated, network
Table 46: CPU overview
119
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
5.1.4 Overview
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs CP260
5.2 CP260
The CPU is inserted in the main rack directly next to the power supply module. It requires two
slots. Only the status LEDs can be seen with the module door closed. The CP260 module is
equipped with two insert slots for interface modules and a PCMCIA interface for memory cards.
The possibility of combining interface modules allows various bus and network systems to be
integrated into the B&R SYSTEM 2005.
A PCMCIA interface allows the memory size to be adjusted to suit different memory needs.
Exchanging programs in the field can be carried out using the memory card.
5.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
CPU
3CP260.60-1
2005 CPU, 4 MB DRAM, 850 KB SRAM, 512 KB

FlashPROM, 2 insert slots, 1 PCMCIA slot, 1 RS232
interface
0MC111.9
PCMCIA memory card, 2 MB FlashPROM
0MC112.9
0MC211.9
PCMCIA memory card, 2 MB SRAM
Memory Cards
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, online cable
Table 47: CP260 order data
120

Product ID
CP260
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$27
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
3+4
No
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 5.7 W
Max. 2.3 W
Max. 8 W, without memory cards and without interface modules
Typical Instruction Cycle Time
0.2 s
Data and Program Code Cache
2 x 256 bytes
Standard Memory for the CP260

RAM
System RAM
User RAM
System PROM
User PROM
4 MB DRAM
174 KB SRAM
850 KB SRAM
512 KB FlashPROM
512 KB FlashPROM
NC-Synchronization
Yes
PCMCIA Interface
Standard
Card Height
Card Type
Memory Size
SRAM
FlashPROM
1
JEIDA V4.0 or PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0
Max. 3 mm
Memory cards
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Controller
Max. 16 MB
Max. 16 MB
Real-time Clock
Resolution
Nonvolatile
1s
Standard communication interface

Application Interface (IF1)
Design
Max. Distance
Max. Baud Rate
RS232
No
9-pin DSUB plug
15 m / 19200 Baud
64 kBaud
Insert Slots
2 (for interface module inserts)
Reset Button
Yes
Status Display
LEDs
Data Buffering
Backup Battery in 2005 Backplane
Buffering with AC240 Battery Module
Buffering with NiMH Rech. Battery
At least 4 years
At least 2.5 years
At least 2 months
Battery Monitoring
Yes
Mechanical Characteristics
Dimensions
Table 48: CP260 technical data
121

5.2.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
READY
CPU is active
RUN
Application running
MODE
Spool or programming function is active
ERROR
SERVICE mode
BAT
Battery and rechargeable battery empty
Table 49: CP260 status LEDs
122

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Operational and display elements, two insertion slots for interface modules, the PCMCIA
interface and the RS232 interface are all located behind the module door.
Figure 56: CP260 operational and connection elements
5.2.6 Reset Button

The reset button can be pressed with any small pointed object (e.g. paper clip). The reset button
is protected by the module door. Pressing the reset button triggers a hardware reset, which
means:
All application programs are stopped
All outputs are set to zero
The PLC then goes into SERVICE mode.
123

5.2.7 Operating Mode Switch
The CP260 is equipped with a hex switch, which is used as an operating mode switch. Different
operating modes are available depending on the PLC software version:
PLC Software V2.0
Switch Position
Operating Mode
Description
$0
Bootstrap Loader
In this switch position, the operating system can be programmed via the online interface. User Flash
is only deleted after the update begins.
Bootstrap loader mode is only required when PCCSW <2.0 is installed. The procedure is the same as
described in Section 5.2.14 "Programming System Flash", on page 127. In an additional dialog box,
only the baud rate and the interface, which are used to created a connection to the PLC, have to be set.
$1 - $E
Run with MC
The CPU boots and installs all modules from the internal User RAM and User FlashPROM. Apart from
data modules, all other modules are additionally installed from the memory card. The code for all
programs is then copied to DRAM. The program code is carried out in DRAM to increase the speed of
the operation.
$F
Diagnostics
The CPU boots in Diagnostics mode. Program sections in User RAM and User FlashPROM are not
initialized. After diagnostics mode, the CPU always boots with a cold restart.
Table 50: CP260 operating modes for PLC software V2.0
PLC Software > V2.0

Switch Position
Operating Mode
Description
$0
Bootstrap Loader
In this switch position, the operating system can be programmed via the online interface. User Flash
is only deleted after the update begins.
Bootstrap loader mode is only required when PCCSW <2.0 is installed. The procedure is the same as
described in Section 5.2.14 "Programming System Flash", on page 127. In an additional dialog box,
only the baud rate and the interface, which are used to created a connection to the PLC, have to be set.
$4
Run without MC
The CPU boots and installs all modules from the internal User RAM and User FlashPROM. The code
for all programs is then copied to DRAM. The program code is carried out in DRAM to increase the
speed of the operation. Any memory card found in the PCMCIA interface is ignored.
$6
Run with MC
The CPU boots and installs modules as described in switch position 4. Apart from data modules, all
other modules are additionally installed from the memory card. They are also copied to DRAM.
$8
Update
In this switch position, the CPU checks if an update memory card is inserted. If not, the CPU goes into
SERVICE mode.
Otherwise the operating system, System ROM, User ROM and, if available, FIX RAM on the CP260 is
deleted and reinstalled from the memory card. This operating mode is already supported by PLC
software V2.0.
If an error occurs during installation, the ERROR and BAT LEDs blink. When no errors have occurred
during installation, the READY LED and RUN LEDs blink.
$F
Diagnostics
initialized. After diagnostics mode, the CPU always boots with a cold restart.
Table 51: CP260 operating modes for PLC software > V2.0
124

5.2.8 RS232 Interface (IF1)
The RS232 interface is not electrically isolated. It can be used as an online interface for
communicating with the programming device.
Description
Pin Assignments
The RS232 interface operates as an

online interface.
Online connection to the PG is achieved
using a standard RS232 cable that is
available from B&R:
Product ID:
Model Number:
RS232 cable
0G0001.00-090
Max. Baud Rate:

64 kBaud
Max. Cable Length: 15 m
RS232
1
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
NC
GND
NC
Ground
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Interface
PG interface
RS232
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 52: CP260 RS232 Interface (IF1)
5.2.9 PCMCIA Interface

The CP260 is equipped with a PCMCIA interface. PCMCIA memory cards conforming to JEIDA
V4.0 Type I or PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0 (max. 3 mm high) are supported.
The CP260 supports memory cards with up to 16 MB SRAM or with up to 16 MB FlashPROM.
The following memory card can be ordered from B&R:
Model Number
Short Description
0MC111.9
Max. 0.8 W
0MC112.9
Max. 0.8 W
PCMCIA memory card, 2 MB SRAM
Max. 0.8 W
0MC211.9
Power Consumption
Table 53: CP260 PCMCIA memory cards
The memory cards are used by the CP260 as ROM Type "MEMCARD".
Limitations when using memory cards:
Internal variables cannot be stored on the memory card.
Memory cannot be allocated on the memory cards.
The data format is not compatible to the B&R SYSTEM 2003 CPU CP476.
The SRAM and FlashPROM memory cards can only be written to by the CP260. Therefore, it is
not possible to program system software or the application on a memory card directly on a PC
with a PCMCIA interface.
125

5.2.10 Insert Slots
The CP260 CPU is equipped with two insert slots for interface modules.
The possibility of combining interface modules allows various bus and network systems to be
integrated into the B&R SYSTEM 2005.
The following interface modules can be operated with the CP260:
Module
Description
3IF613.9
Interface module with three RS232 interfaces
3IF621.9
Interface module with one RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface
3IF622.9
Interface module with one RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces
3IF661.9
Interface module with one RS485 interface (PROFIBUS DP slave)
3IF671.9
Interface module with one RS232 interface, one RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface
3IF672.9
Interface module with one RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces
3IF681.95
Interface module with one RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE2 connection
(Cheapernet BNC-socket)
3IF681.96
Interface module with one RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE-T connection (Twisted Pair /
RJ45-socket)
3IF686.9
2005 interface module, 1 ETHERNET Powerlink interface, manager or controller function, electrically isolated
Table 54: CP260 interface module inserts
5.2.11 Data/Real-time Buffering

The following areas are buffered:
User RAM
System RAM
Real-time clock
Buffering is carried out with a NiMH rechargeable battery and with a battery in the following
order:
1) NiMH rechargeable battery: The rechargeable battery is located in the CPU.
2) Backup battery: The backup battery is located either in the B&R 2005 rack or in the AC240
battery module
Battery Monitoring
The battery voltage is checked cyclically. The cyclic load test of the battery does not considerably
shorten the battery life, instead it gives an early warning of weakened buffer capacity.
The status information "Battery OK" is available to the user from the SYS_lib function
"SYS_battery".
126

See section "Backup Battery" in sections 2 "Module Racks" and 17.2 "AC240" (battery module).
5.2.12 Local I/O Bus Expansion
Since the CP260 does not have its own expansion master, the EX350 I/O master controller is
needed for local I/O bus expansion. By using this controller, up to four expansion racks with all
I/O modules can be used with the CP260.
modules on the main rack are handled by the CPU. The EX350 module supports the CPU by
processing I/O module data on the expansion racks.
When coupling axes over multiple modules (gears, cams, CNC), the set positions of the master
axes are sent to the NC154 modules with the slave axes in an interrupt routine running on the
main CPU. The interrupt routine is not allowed to be stopped. These requirements are fulfilled
by the following CPUs:
CP260
IF260 when it is used as a main CPU
5.2.14 Programming System Flash

General Information
CPUs are delivered with a runtime system. The operating mode switch is set to switch position 0
when delivered i.e. bootstrap loader mode is set.
A switch position must be set in order to boot the PLC in RUN mode (see Section 5.2.7
"Operating Mode Switch", on page 124). A runtime system update is only possible in RUN mode.
Runtime System Update
The runtime system can be updated using the programming system. When updating the runtime
system (online runtime system update), the following procedure must be carried out:
1) An online runtime system update is only possible if the processor is in RUN mode. To do this,
the operating mode switch must be turned to 4 or 6.
2) Switch on the supply voltage.
3) Establish online connection (online cable) between programming device (PC or Industrial
PC) and the CP260. An online runtime update is possible using the serial RS232 onboard
interface.
4) Start B&R Automation Studio:
127
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
5.2.13 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules

5) Start the update procedure by calling the Services command from the Project menu. Select
Transfer Operating System... from the menu shown. Follow the instructions from B&R
Automation Studio.
6) A dialog box is displayed for configuring the runtime system version. The runtime system
version is already preselected by the user's project settings. Using the drop-down menu, the
runtime system versions stored in the project can be selected. Clicking on the Browse button
allows the selected runtime system version to be loaded from the hard drive or from the CD.
Pressing Next > opens a pop-up window, which allows the user to select whether the
modules should be downloaded with SYSTEM ROM target memory using the following
runtime system update. Otherwise, modules can also be downloaded using a later
application download.
After pressing Next >, a dialog box appears where the user can set the CAN baud rate, CAN
ID and the CAN node number (the CAN node number set here is only relevant if an interface
module does not contain a CAN node number switch). Assigning a unique node number is
especially important with online communication over a CAN network (INA2000 protocol).
7) The update procedure is started by pressing Next >. The update progress is shown in a
message window.
User Flash will be deleted.
8) When the update procedure is complete, the online connection is automatically established
again.
9) The PLC is now ready for use.
An operating system update is not only possible through an online connection, but also through
a CAN network, serial network (INA2000 protocol) or an ETHERNET network, depending on the
system configuration.
128
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382
5.3 CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382

The CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 are high-performance CPUs for the B&R SYSTEM
2005. The CPUs are operated in the main rack directly beside the power supply module. They
require two or three slots.
It is equipped with one or three insert slots for aPCI interface modules, a Compact Flash
interface for CF memory cards and a floating point unit. An RS232 programming interface, a USB
interface and a 10/100 BASE-T ETHERNET interface are available.
The aPCI insert slot for interface modules makes it possible to connect the CPUs to different bus
and network systems.
The CPUs are especially useful for applications where lower cycle times are required, very large
amounts of data must be processed or for applications using the FPU.
129
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The Compact Flash interface allows the size of the memory to be adjusted to suit different
memory requirements of many diverse applications.

5.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3CP340.60-1
2005 CPU, x86 233 Intel-compatible, 16 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application
memory: Compact Flash, 1 insert slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface, 1 RS232 interface,
1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered separately.
3CP360.60-1 1)
2005 CPU, Pentium 266, 32 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory: Compact
Flash, 1 insert slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB interface, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface
100 Base-T. Program memory must be ordered separately.
3CP380.60-1
2005 CPU, Pentium III 500, 64 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory:
Compact Flash, 1 insert slot for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface
3CP382.60-1
2005 CPU, Pentium III 500, 64 MB DRAM, 512 KB SRAM, exchangeable application memory:
Compact Flash, 3 insert slots for aPCI modules, 1 USB, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface
CPU
Program Memory 2)
5CFCRD.0032-01
Compact Flash 32 MB ATA/IDE SanDisk
5CFCRD.0064-01
5CFCRD.0128-01
Compact Flash 128 MB TrueIDE SanDisk
5CFCRD.0256-01
5CFCRD.0512-01

Accessories
0G0001.00-090
Table 55: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 order data

2) Program memory is required to operate the CPUs. It is not included with the delivery of the CPUs, instead it must be ordered as an
accessory.
130

Product ID
CP340
CP360
CP380
CP382
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
---
Module Type
B&R 2005 CPU
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
3+4
No
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total, without memory card
and without interface module
3-5
No
Max. 4.5 W
Max. 1 W
Max. 5.5 W
Max. 11 W
Max. 3 W
Max. 14 W
Clock Frequency
233 MHz
266 MHz
500 MHz
0.038 s
0.02 s
0.012 s
16 KB
2 x 16 KB
2 x 16 KB
---
512 KB
256 KB
16 MB DRAM
496 KB SRAM
32 MB DRAM
496 KB SRAM
64 MB DRAM
496 KB SRAM
Max. 13 W
Max. 3 W
Max. 16 W
Max. 13 W
Max. 4 W
Max. 17 W
Data and Program Code

L1 Cache
L2 Cache
Standard Memory
RAM
User RAM
Remanent Variables
32 KB
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Processor Section
256 KB
FPU
Yes
Integrated I/O processor
Processes I/O data points in the background
Data Buffering
Lithium Battery
Battery Monitoring
At least 3 years
Yes
Peripheral
Compact Flash Interface
Connection
Memory Size
1
ATA / True IDE
32 MB to 512 MB (as of 07/2003)
Real-time Clock
Resolution
Nonvolatile
1s
Reset Button
Yes
Status Display
LEDs
Insert slots for aPCI interface

modules IF7xx
Table 56: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 technical data
131

Product ID
CP340
CP360
CP380
CP382
Standard Communication
Interfaces
Application Interface IF1
Design
Distance
Baud Rate
RS232
No
9-pin DSUB plug
Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud
Max. 115.2 kBaud

Design
Distance
Baud Rate
ETHERNET
Yes
RJ45 socket
Max. 100 m
10/100 MBaud
USB Rev. 1.1
Dimensions
B&R 2005 triple width
Table 56: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 technical data (cont.)
5.3.4 Restrictions
Limitation
Replacement
NC Manager software for NC modules NC154 and NC157 are not

supported. That means, these NC modules do not function with these
CPUs. The NC150 can be used in applications with direct I/O access
when the NC Manager is not used.
Direct control of ACOPOS via the CAN interface or ETHERNET

Powerlink with the new NC Manager software.
The RIO-Master EX150 is not supported.
CAN IO, ETHERNET Powerlink
The PROFIBUS FMS module NW150 is not supported.
CAN IO, ETHERNET Powerlink
The IF050 communication module is not supported.
IF060
The IF681 interface module is not supported.
ETHERNET Onboard Interface
Table 57: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 limitations
132

5.3.5 Status LEDs
LED
Description
READY
CPU is active
RUN
Application running
ERROR
SERVICE mode
BAT CPU
CPU battery empty or not present
BAT BUS
Bus battery empty or not present
CF BUSY
Compact Flash BUSY
CF OK
Compact Flash OK
100TX
10/100 MBaud ETHERNET
ACT/LNK
ETHERNET Activity/Link
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 58: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 Status LEDs
133

The operational elements, display elements, one or three insert slots for aPCI interface modules,
the slot for the program memory, the battery compartment and the connection plug for the RS232
interface are all found behind the module door. The RJ45 socket for the ETHERNET interface
and the USB interface can be found on the bottom of the module.
CP340, CP360 and CP380
Figure 57: CP340, CP360 and CP380 operational and connection elements
134
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
CP382
Figure 58: CP382 operational and connection elements
5.3.7 Slot for Program Memory

Program memory is required to operate the CPUs. The program memory is Compact Flash. It is
not included with the delivery of the CPUs, instead it must be ordered as an accessory.
5.3.8 Reset Button
is protected by the module door. Pressing the reset button triggers a hardware reset, which
means:
All application programs are stopped
All outputs are set to zero
The PLC then goes into SERVICE mode.
135

The CPUs are equipped with a hex switch which acts as an operating mode switch.
Switch Position
Operating Mode
$0
Boot
Description
In this switch position the default B&R Automation Runtime (AR) is started, and the runtime system
can be installed using the online interface (B&R Automation Studio). User Flash is deleted after the
download begins.
$4
Run
RUN Mode
$F
Diagnostics
initialized. After diagnostics mode, the CPU always boots with a warm restart.
Table 59: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 operating modes

The RS232 interface is not electrically isolated. It can be used as an online interface for
communicating with the programming device.
Interface
Description
PG interface
RS232
Pin Assignments
The RS232 interface operates as an

online interface.
Online connection to the PG is achieved
using a standard RS232 cable that is
available from B&R:
Module ID
Model No.
RS232 Cable
0G0001.00-090
Max. Baud Rate:

Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
15 m
RS232
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
RI
Ring Indicator
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 60: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 RS232 interface (IF1)
5.3.11 ETHERNET Interface (IF2):

IF2 is an ETHERNET interface. The connection is made using a 10/100 BASE-T Twisted Pair
RJ45 socket on the bottom of the module.
The INA2000 station number for the ETHERNET interface is set with both hex switches.
Information:
The onboard ETHERNET interface is not suitable for ETHERNET Powerlink.
136

5.3.12 USB Interface (IF3)
The IF3 is a USB interface. The connection is made using a USB interface for Rev. 1.1 on the
bottom of the module.
The USB interface can only be used for devices which have been released by B&R (e.g. floppy
disk drive, DiskOnKey or dongle).
Information:
The USB interface (IF3) cannot be used as an online communication interface.
5.3.13 Insert Slot
The B&R SYSTEM 2005 can be connected to various bus or network systems using plug-in
interface modules.
The following aPCI interface modules can be operated presently in the CPUs:
Module
Description
3IF761.9
aPCI interface module, 1 PROFIBUS DP interface, electrically isolated and network capable, 1 RS232 interface
3IF762.9
aPCI interface module, 1 PROFIBUS DP interface, electrically isolated and network capable, 1 RS422/RS485 interface,
electrically isolated and network capable
3IF772.9
aPCI interface module with one RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces
3IF786.9
aPCI interface module, 1 ETHERNET Powerlink interface, manager or controller function, 1 RS232 interface
3IF787.9
aPCI interface module 1 ETHERNET Powerlink interface, manager or controller function, 1 CAN interface , max. 500 kbps,
object buffer in send and receive direction, network capable, electrically isolated. Order TB704 terminal blocks separately.
3IF789.9
aPCI interface interface module, 1 ETHERNET Powerlink Schnittstelle, manager or controller function, 1 X2X Link Master
interface, electrically isolated. Order TB704 terminal block separately.
Table 61: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 aPCI interface module inserts
137
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The CPUs are equipped with one or three insert slots for aPCI interface modules.

The following areas are buffered:
Remanent variables
User RAM
System RAM
Real-time clock
Buffering is achieved using a lithium battery in the following order:

1) CPU battery:
The battery is in the CPU
2) Bus battery:
The backup battery is either in the B&R 2005 rack or in the AC240 battery
module
Battery Monitoring
The battery voltage is checked cyclically. The cyclic load test of the battery does not considerably
The status information, "Battery OK" is available from the system library function "BatteryInfo".
Battery
Change Interval
CPU Battery
The battery should be changed every 4 years. The change interval refers to the average life span and
operating conditions and is recommended by B&R. This does not correspond to the maximum buffer
duration.
Bus Battery
See the section "Backup Battery" in the sections 2 "Module Racks" and 17.2 "AC240" (Battery
Module).
Table 62: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 battery changing intervals
138

5.3.15 Changing the Lithium Battery
The CPUs are equipped with a lithium battery. The lithium battery is placed in a separate
compartment and protected by a cover.
Buffer Battery Data
Lithium Battery
3 V / 950 mAh
Model Number
0AC201.9
Short Description
Storage Temperature
-20 to +60 C
Storage Time
Relative Humidity
0 to 95% (non-condensing)
The product design allows the battery to be changed with the PLC switched on or off. In some
countries, safety regulations do not allow batteries to be changed while the module is switched
on.
Information:
The data stored in the RAM of the CPU is not lost while power is not applied during
a battery change, if the CPU is located in the module rack and the bus battery is
functioning normally.
The bus battery is located either in the B&R 2005 rack or in the AC240 battery
module
139
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 63: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 data for the backup battery

2) Remove the cover from the lithium battery holder using a screwdriver.
Figure 59: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 - removing the cover for the lithium battery
3) Remove the battery from the holder by pulling the removal strip (don't use uninsulated tools
because of risk of short circuiting). The battery should not be held by its edges. Insulated
tweezers may also be used for removing the battery.
Figure 60: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 - holding the battery correctly
140
Figure 61: CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 - removal strip should be pulled to the right
5) Now wrap the end of the removal strip over the top of the battery and insert it underneath the
battery so that it does not protrude from the battery holder.
6) Replace cover. Insert the lower edge of the cover in the battery holder opening. Press the
upper end of the cover home firmly.
Information:
Lithium batteries are considered hazardous waste. Used batteries should be
Since the CPUs do not have their own expansion master, the EX350 I/O master controller is
needed for local I/O bus expansion. By using this controller, up to four expansion racks with all
I/O modules can be used with the CPUs.
141
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
4) Insert the new battery with correct polarity. The removal strip should be pulled to the right of
the battery holder and the "+" side of the battery should be facing left. In order to be able to
remove the battery again in future, the removal strip must be on the right side of the battery.

General Information
The CPUs are delivered with a default B&R Automation Runtime (with limited functions)
already installed. This runtime system is started in boot mode (operating mode switch
position 0). It initializes and operates the serial RS232 onboard interface, allowing a runtime
system download via INA2000 protocol.
This runtime system download is carried out during the commissioning of the CPU. The runtime
system is stored in the program memory (Compact Flash) of the processor. A runtime system
update can be carried out later.
A runtime system download or update is made using the programming system (starting with B&R
Automation Studio V2.1).
Runtime System Download
When installing the runtime system (runtime system download) the following procedure must be
carried out:
1) Turn off power to the PLC.
2) A runtime system download is only possible if the processor is in boot mode. To do this, the
operating mode switch must be turned to 0.
3) Switch on the power supply again.
4) Establish an online connection between the programming device (PC or Industrial PC) and
the CPU. A runtime system download is only possible using the serial RS232 onboard
interface.
5) Start B&R Automation Studio.
6) Start the download procedure by calling the Services command from the Project menu.
Select Transfer Operating System... from the menu shown. Follow the instructions from
B&R Automation Studio.
runtime system download. Otherwise, modules can also be downloaded using a later
Pressing Next > brings the user to a control box where the current settings are displayed.
142

8) The download procedure is started by pressing Next >. Download progress is shown in a
message window.
Information:
The User Flash is cleared.
9) The operating mode switch must be turned to 4 when the download procedure is completed.
10) Turn PLC off and then on again.
When updating the runtime system (online runtime system update) the following procedure must
be carried out:
1) An online runtime system update is only possible if the processor is in RUN mode. To do this,
the operating mode switch must be turned to 4.
3) Establish online connection (online cable) between the programming device (PC or Industrial
PC) and the CPU. An online runtime system update is only possible using the CPU
interfaces.
Automation Studio.
Pressing Next > brings the user to a control box where the current settings are displayed.
143
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

message window.
Information:
The User Flash is cleared.
again.
144
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs IF260
5.4 IF260
The IF260 module can be used either as a CPU or as a programmable interface processor. The
module recognizes the correct operating mode from the slot used (slot 3 -> CPU module).
Usually, the module is used as an interface processor to relieve the strain on the CPU. The IF260
module is equipped with a CPU section and an insert slot for interface modules.
The programmable interface processor (like with intelligent I/O processors) also has a local
processor core with RISC processor, local RAM and operating system. The DPR area ("PPdpr"
library) is used as a communication interface between CPU PLC and IF260. A project must be
created for each parallel processor in B&R Automation Studio.
The insert slot for interface modules makes it possible to integrate different bus and network
systems in the B&R SYSTEM 2005.
145
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The PLC CPU and the local processor always have access to this data area, which guarantees
data consistency for data type UINT. Larger data structures cannot be be used.

5.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
CPU or Programmable Interface Processor

3IF260.60-1

1.5 MB FlashPROM, 1 insert slot for interface module
inserts
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
Table 64: IF260 order data

Product ID
IF260
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$2A
Slot
3
4
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
CPU operation
Programmable interface processor operation
Max. 3.5 W
--Max. 3.5 W
Processor
Memory Capacity
System RAM
User RAM
System PROM
User PROM
0.4 s
174 KB SRAM
850 KB SRAM
512 KB FlashPROM
1536 KB FlashPROM
Table 65: IF260 technical data
146

Product ID
IF260
Real-time Clock
Resolution
Nonvolatile
1s
Insert Slots
Reset Button
Yes
Status Display
5 Status LEDs
NC-Synchronization
Yes
Data Buffering
Buffering with NiMH Rech. Battery
At least 4 years
At least 2.5 years
At least 2 months
Battery Monitoring
Yes (when operated as main CPU)
Dimensions
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 65: IF260 technical data (cont.)
5.4.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
READY
IF260 is active
RUN
Application running
MODE
Spool or programming function is active
ERROR
SERVICE mode
BAT
Battery and rechargeable battery empty
Table 66: IF260 status LEDs
147

The operational elements, display elements and an insert slot for an interface module are behind
the module door.
Figure 62: IF260 operational and connection elements
5.4.6 Reset Button

is protected by the module door. Depending on the operating mode, pressing the reset buttons
has different effects.
Operating Mode
Effects
Interface Processor
Local Reset
- All IF260 application programs are stopped
CPU
Local reset and global bus reset

- All application programs are stopped
- All outputs are set to zero
Table 67: IF260 reset button
148

The IF260 module is equipped with a sliding switch, which can be used as an operating mode
switch. The switch setting can be evaluated by the application program at any time. If the switch
position is changed during operation, a warning can be generated. The operating system only
interprets the switch position when switched on.
Switch Position
Function
In this switch position, the operating system can be programmed via the online
interface. User Flash is only deleted after the update begins.
The bootstrap loader mode is only required when PCCSW <2.0 is installed. The
procedure is the same as described in Section 5.4.13 "Programming System
Flash", on page 152. In an additional dialog box, the baud rate and the interface
must only be set, from which a connection to the PLC is created.
Run mode, the application is running.
Reserved
diagnostics mode
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Operating Mode Switch
Table 68: IF260 operating mode switch
5.4.8 Insert Slot

The programmable interface processor has an insert slot for interface modules.
The insert slot for interface modules makes it possible to integrate different bus and network
systems in the B&R SYSTEM 2005.
The following interface modules can be operated in the IF260:
Module
Description
3IF613.9
3IF621.9
3IF622.9
3IF661.9
3IF671.9
3IF672.9
3IF681.95
Interface module with one RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE2 connection
(Cheapernet BNC-socket)
3IF681.96
Interface module with one RS232 interface and one ETHERNET interface with 10 BASE-T connection (Twisted Pair /
RJ45-socket)
3IF686.9
Table 69: IF260 interface module inserts
149

5.4.9 Data/Realtime Buffering
The following areas are buffered
User RAM
System RAM
Real-time clock
Buffering is carried out with a NiMH rechargeable battery and with a battery in the following
order:
1) NiMH Rechargeable Battery:
The rechargeable battery is located in the IF260.
2) Backup Battery:
The backup battery is located either in the B&R 2005 rack

or in the AC240 battery module
Battery Monitoring
If the IF260 module is operated as the CPU, the interface processor carries out cyclical
monitoring of the battery voltage. The cyclic load test of the battery does not considerably
The status information, "Battery OK" is available to the user from the SYS_lib function
"SYS_battery".
Since the IF260 module does not have its own expansion master, the EX350 I/O master
controller is needed for local I/O bus expansion. By using this controller, up to four expansion
racks with all I/O modules can be used with the IF260.
5.4.11 Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules
CP260
150

5.4.12 Online Connection
1) The online connection is established through an insertable interface module with an RS232
interface.
2) The IF260 module can be programmed via CAN in the same way as every other B&R CPU.
One of the conditions required for programming using a CAN network is that an operating
system must already have been installed. An RS232 connection is used to couple the
programming system to a CPU module with a CAN interface. From here it is routed via CAN
to the IF260 module.
3) When the programmable IF260 interface processor is used as the main CPU, the IF260
module can also be programmed by a peripheral processor through the backplane module.
An XP152 module can be used as e.g. a peripheral processor.
One of the conditions required for programming using a backplane module is that an
operating system must already have been installed. A PCCSW V2.0 operating system must
be installed on all processors.
4) Programming using the 3IF050.6 or 3IF060.6 interface modules is also possible. The
connection is established using an RS232 or CAN interface. Programming can also be
carried out using PROFIBUS-FMS. The NW150 PROFIBUS network module must have a
revision number >14.04.
One of the conditions required for programming is that an operating system must already
have been installed. A corresponding FBASE module must be programmed in the IF260
memory. System modules e.g. FBASE modules, can also be programmed in system Flash
starting with PCCSW V2.0. Therefore the connection via an IF050/IF060 or a PROFIBUS
network remains intact in diagnostics mode.
151
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
This is also possible in the opposite direction. The IF260 can also be programmed via the
main CPU when it is used as a peripheral processor.

General Information
CPUs are delivered with a runtime system. The operating mode switch is set to switch position 0
at delivery i.e. the bootstrap loader mode is set.
A switch position must be set in order to boot the PLC in RUN mode (see Section 5.4.7
"Operating Mode Switch", on page 149). A runtime system update is only possible in RUN mode.
Runtime System Update when Operated as a Parallel Processor
system (runtime system update) the following procedure must be carried out:
1) A runtime system update is only possible using the CPU interfaces. This means that
updating the runtime system must take place using a CPU interface (also applies to parallel
processors).
2) An online runtime system update is only possible if the CPU processor and the parallel
processor are in RUN mode. The RUN mode can be set with the operating mode switch.
4) Establish online connection (online cable) between the programming device (PC or Industrial
PC) and the CPU. An online runtime update is possible using the serial RS232 interface.
Automation Studio.
152

After pressing Next > a dialog box appears where the user can set the CAN baud rate, CAN
ID and the CAN node number (the CAN node number set here is only relevant, if an interface
again.
153
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
message window.
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs IP161
5.5 IP161
Programmable I/O processors are freely programmable I/O modules. Application programs and
data modules can be created for all programmable I/O processors using the programming
system.
The IP161 module has a CPU section, two interfaces, digital and analog I/O.
The IP161 module features interrupt capable digital inputs/outputs and the fast analog inputs
which allow it to be used in both FIFO and comparator modes. The IP161 module can also be
used both as a programmable I/O processor and a CPU. The module recognizes the correct
operating mode from the slot used (slots 3+4 -> CPU module).
The module is usually used as an I/O processor to reduce the load on the CPU.
All programmable I/O processors have a local processor core with a RISC processor, local
system RAM and operating system. The DPR area ("PPdpr" Library) is used as a communication
interface between CPU PLC and the programmable I/O processor. A project must be created for
each parallel processor in B&R Automation Studio.
The PLC CPU and the local processor always have access to this data area, which guarantees
data consistency for data type UINT. Larger data structures cannot be be used.
The system can be integrated in a CAN bus using the I/O processor's CAN interface. The IF1
RS232 interface is designed for the programming device's connection. The RS232 interface IF3
can be used e.g. for visualization by using the AC961 bus adapter. This ensures that the IF1 is
kept free as the online interface.
154

5.5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Programmable I/O Processor

3IP161.60-1

24 VDC, Sink, max. 12 digital outputs 24 VDC, 0.1 A,
6 analog inputs 10 V, 14-bit, 6 analog outputs 10 V, 12bit, 2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block.
Order 3 x TB170 terminal blocks separately.
3TB170.9
2005 terminal block, 20-pin, screw clamps
3TB170.91
2005 terminal block, 20-pin, cage clamps
3TB170:90-02
2005 terminal block, 20-pin, 20 pcs., screw clamps
3TB170:91-02
2005 terminal block, 20-pin, 20 pcs., cage clamps
7AC911.9
Bus connector, CAN
0AC912.9
Bus adapter, CAN, 1 CAN interface
0AC913.92
Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm

connection cable
0AC961.9
Accessories, bus adapter (CAN, RS232)
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
Table 70: IP161 order data
155

Product ID
C-UL-US Listed
IP161
Yes
B&R ID Code
$34
Module Type
B&R 2005 system module
Slot
3
4
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
CPU operation (slots 3+4 used)

Programmable I/O processor operation
Max. 6.5 W
Max. 11.5 W, including potentiometer supply (if used externally)
Max. 18 W
Processor
Standard Memory
System RAM
User RAM
System PROM
User PROM
Data Buffering
Battery Monitoring
0.4 s
174 KB SRAM
850 KB SRAM
512 KB FlashPROM
1.5 MB FlashPROM
At least 4 years
At least 2 years
Yes, when operated as main CPU
Peripherals
Real-time Clock
Resolution
Nonvolatile during CPU operation (buffered externally)

1s
Reset Button
Yes
Status display
4 status LEDs, 4 interface LEDs
Standard Communication Interfaces

Design
Distance
Baud Rate
Design
Station number
Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
Bus Length 60 m
Bus Length 200 m
Bus Length 1,000 m
Design
Distance
Baud Rate
RS232
No
9-pin DSUB plug
Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud
Max. 115.2 kBaud
CAN
Yes
9-pin DSUB plug
Can be set using two node number switches
Max. 1,000 m
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
RS232
No
9-pin DSUB plug, the AC961 bus adapter is required for operation
Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud
Max. 115.2 kBaud
Table 71: IP161 technical data
156

Product ID
IP161
Potentiometer Voltage Outputs

Static Characteristics
Number and Type of Potentiometer
Voltages
2 outputs with +10 V and -10 V per terminal block
Electrical Isolation to PLC
Yes
Internal Reference Potential
AGND (analog ground for analog input circuit)
Output Current
80 mA (simultaneously)
Short Circuit Current
Typ. 100 mA
Continuous Short Circuit Protection
Yes
Basic Accuracy
At 25 C
At 0 - 60 C
0.25%
0.5%
Output Power
Max. 1.6 W
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Analog Inputs
Input Type
Differential inputs for voltage measurement
Number of Inputs
Input Signal, Nominal
10 V
Maximum Continuous Overload (without

damage)
Between +/- Connection
Between Analog GND and + or -
25 V
30 V
Conversion Procedure
Conversion Time
Successive approximation
100 s for all 6 channels (parameters can be set by LTX functions in cyclic operating mode)
Digital Converter Resolution
14-bit
Data Format in Application Program

Value Range
Raw Values from ADC
According to standard software
using FUB IP161AIx (x ... 1 - 6)
Quantization
INT
$8320 - $7CE0 (typically)
$8000 - $7FFC
1.22 mV per LSB
Output of the Digital Value during

Overload
When range is exceeded (pos.)
When range is exceeded (neg.)
$7FFF
$8000
Input Impedance in Signal Range

Static
Dynamic
2 M
3 k/10 nF
Analog Input Measurement Error

Maximum Error at 25 C
Temperature Coefficient
Offset Drift
Gain Drift
0.06%
0.00122%/C
0.00061%/C
Linearization Method
Scaling conversion using software
Common Mode Voltage
5 V common mode voltage in contrast to other analog inputs
Table 71: IP161 technical data (cont.)
157

Product ID
Wiring
External Power Consumption
Protection
IP161
Differential or potentiometer input
None (except potentiometer)
Internal clamp diodes protect against voltage spikes
Dynamic Characteristics
Input Filter
Characteristic
Frequency Limit
Total System Input Transfer Time
Scan Duration (including response time)
Scan Repeat Time
Minimum
Typical
Low pass 1st order

5 kHz
100 s for all 6 channels (parameters can be set)
5 s (response time on the multiplexer + sample time on the ADC)
Parameters can be set by LTX functions depending on the operating mode (cyclic, applications driven)
85 s (cyclic operation)
100 s
Operating Characteristics
Operating Modes
Operating Mode 1
Operating Mode 2
Operating Mode 3
Isolations Voltage between
Input and Bus
Inputs
Installation Recommendations
See Section 5.5.13 "Operating Modes", on page 172

Fast analog value registering
Measurement values are recorded in FIFO memory
Comparator
50 V
0 V (no electrical isolation)
Double-sided twisted cable with 2-pin twisted Cu wires, max. 10 m,
Under no circumstances should inputs and outputs be mixed in a multi-wire cable
Typical Example for External Connections
Differential input (+/- connection)

Potentiometer input (- input pin should be connected with AGND)
Consequences of Incorrect Connection to

the Input Terminals
Mixing up the +/- connections: negative result

Open inputs: Overrun to $7FFF
Cross-talk between Inputs

Non-Linearity
Continuity Without Missing Codes
Calibrating or Testing for Maintaining the
Accuracy Class
>40 dB (DC - 60 Hz)

1 LSB (from ADC)
No missing codes (in defined value range)
No calibration or testing required
Analog Outputs
Number of Outputs
Data Format in Application Program
Quantization
Output Impedance in Signal Range
Load Impedance
6 voltage outputs 10 V
12-bit
INT ($8000 - $7FF0)
1 LSB = 4.88 mV
0.25
(2.5 mV at load change of 0 to 10 mA at 10 V)
1 k
158

Product ID
IP161
Analog Output Measurement Error

Alignment Precision at 25 C
Offset
Total
Temperature Coefficient
Offset Drift
Gain Drift
0.0366%
0.4%
0.00244%/C
0.00122%/C
Response Time When Changing Using
Whole Area
Max. 300 s from 0.01% of end value (for resistive load)
Overshoot
Output Response when Power Supply is
Switched On/Off
For resistive load of 1 k max. 3%

An enable relay is switched on at a defined value of 0 V
Default setting = short circuit on the output terminals using relay contact
250 mVpp
Output Ripple Factor

Cyclic output with approx. 10 kHz
Isolation Voltages between Output and

Bus
Installation Recommendations
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Operating Mode
50 V
Double-sided twisted cable with 2-pin twisted Cu wires, max. 10 m,
Under no circumstances should inputs and outputs be mixed in a multi-wire cable

Accuracy Class
No calibration or testing required
Permitted Load Types
Resistive, inductive
100 nF (larger capacity extends the response time)
Maximum Capacitive Load

e.g. analog hydraulic valve
Consequences of Incorrect Connection to

the Output Terminals
Depends on wiring and voltage size

(in worst case scenario all 6 output circuits become defective)
Continuity
0.5 LSB (DAC value)
Non-Linearity
Max. 4 LSB (DAC value)
Repeat Precision at a Certain

Temperature after a Specified Stabilizing
Time
2 LSB
(noise at constant temperature in 24 hours)
Digital inputs
Number of Inputs
Up to 12
Configuration as input or output takes place in groups of two using software
Maximum Peak Voltage
+35 V
Rated Voltage
+24 VDC
Rated Frequency
Max. 200 kHz (symmetrical square wave)
Wiring
Sink
Limit Values
0-Signal UL
0-Signal IL
1-Signal UH
1-Signal IH
5 V
2 mA
11 V
5 mA
159

Product ID
IP161
Delay 0 to 1
2.5 s
Delay 1 to 0
2.5 s
Power Consumption (external)

Per Group at 24 V (no load)
Per Digital Input at 24 V
0.48 W
0.24 W
Additional Characteristics
Status Display
Interrupt Capable
No
Yes
Parameters can be set using LTX functions - each digital input can trigger an IRQ
WARNING: Handling takes place using an exception task
Consequences of Incorrect Input
Connections
Isolations Voltage between
Input and Bus
Inputs
Consequences of Removing/Inserting
Input Modules with Voltage Applied
Additional Exterior Load when Inputs and
Outputs are Switched Together (if
required)
Explanation of Signal Evaluation
Recommended Length for Cable and

Connections Depending on Cable Type
and Electromagnetic Compatibility
Different Circuits Possible
At 24 V and COM exchange: internal reverse polarity diode

For active inputs without supply: Output driver is not protected
50 V
Digital group <-> Digital group: 50 V
Must not be removed/inserted during operation (= system module)
No load required (push/pull)
Each digital input is assigned a TPU pin, different types of signal evaluation are possible
(edges triggering, counter input)
depending on the TPU function,
several inputs can be combined (e.g. incremental encoder)
The recommended cable length and cable type depends
on the maximum frequency of use,Shielded cable are recommended
for fast signals (>10 kHz)
Only sink connection
Each group is electrically isolated
Digital Outputs
Number and Type of Outputs
Up to 12 transistor outputs (Push/Pull)

Configuration as input or output takes place in groups of two using software
Maximum Switching Voltage
+35 V
+50 V
Rated Current (1-Signal)
100 mA
Rated Voltage
Switching Voltage Range
Rated Frequency
Current Range at 1-Signal (continuous at
maximum voltage)
+24 VDC
+12 VDC to +35 VDC
Max. 100 kHz
100 mA
160

Product ID
IP161
U at 100 mA is 1 V
Voltage Drop (1-Signal), Internal

Resistance
IK 300 mA, continuous
Protected and short circuit outputs

Turn-off delay
Over-Temperature Cutoff
110 to 300 mA
100 s
170 C
Wiring
Sink or source
20 mA + load current for the outputs
Power Consumption per Group (external)

Status Display
No
Protection Characteristics
For Short Circuit Proof Outputs:

Information Concerning Replacement or
Removal of the Prescribed Protective
Measures
Internal thermal overload protection and internal current limitation
No prescribed protective circuit
For Non-Protected Outputs:

Information Concerning Required
Protection Measures which must be
Provided by the User
Characteristics of the Output Circuit
Protection Against Voltage Spikes when
Turning Off Inductive Loads
Type of External Protective Circuit
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Internal current limitation from 110 mA to 300 mA
For Protected Outputs:

Operating characteristics over 1.2 x Ie
Including the Current Level, where the
Protection Circuit Responds
Internal clamping diodes for group supply voltage

Short term current of 1 A, duration 10 ms
For inductive loads, clamping diodes can also be connected between the output and the
group supply (24 VDC and GND)
2 s for resistive loads
Delay 0 to 1
2 s for resistive loads
Delay 1 to 0
Switch Frequency with Resistive Load
100 kHz with resistive load
Consequences when Outputs Incorrectly
Connected
Depending on the error, the worst case scenario could cause

destruction of digital group
Consequences of Multiple Overloads on

Multi-Circuit Modules
The entire group is switched off due to internal thermal monitoring
Output Behavior when the Controller Falls

Out During Voltage Dips, Interruptions
and when the Unit is Switched On-or Off
Output switched to high resistance
Total Output Current
Max. 400 mA/group (static)
Isolation Voltages between Output and

Bus
Recommended Procedure when
Changing Output Modules
50 V
Must not be removed/inserted during operation (= system module)
161

Product ID
IP161
Sink or source wiring
Dimensions
Pin Assignments

See sections 5.5.4 "Operational and Connection Elements" and 5.5.10 "I/O Connections"

Three I/O groups, a reset button, status LEDs, two HEX number switches for the CAN bus station
number and the connectors for two RS232 interfaces and a CAN interface are all located behind
the module door.
If both RS232 interfaces are used, the AC961 bus adapter is required (see Section 5.5.8 "RS232
Interfaces (IF1 and IF3)", on page 164).
Figure 63: IP161 operational and connection elements
162

5.5.5 Status LEDs
LED
Description
READY
Lit in Service and diagnostics mode
RUN
Lit in Run, Service and diagnostics mode
ERROR
Lit if error occurs
MODE
Lit when programming FlashPROM
RXD1, TXD1
Lit during data exchange via either of the two RS232 interfaces
RXD2, TXD2
Lit during data exchange via the CAN interface
Table 72: IP161 status LEDs
The LEDs READY, RUN, ERROR and MODE are lit when the reset button is pressed.
Operating Mode
Effects
Programmable I/O Processor
Local Reset
- All IP161 application programs are stopped
- All IP161 outputs are set to zero
CPU

Table 73: IP161 reset button
5.5.7 CAN Node Number Switch

The CAN node number is set with the two hex switches. The switch setting can be evaluated by
the application program at any time. If the switch position is changed during operation, a warning
can be generated. The operating system only interprets the switch position when switched on.
The settings $00, and $FF are reserved for special functions.
Switch Position
Function
$00
In this switch position, the operating system can be programmed via the online interface. User Flash is only
deleted after the update begins.
The bootstrap loader mode is only required when PCCSW < 2.0 is installed. The procedure is the same as
described in Section 5.5.14 "Programming System Flash", on page 174. In an additional dialog box, the baud rate
and the interface must only be set, from which a connection to the PLC is created.
$FF
Diagnostics mode
Table 74: IP161 CAN node number switch
163
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
5.5.6 Reset Button

5.5.8 RS232 Interfaces (IF1 and IF3)
The IP161 programmable I/O processor is equipped with two RS232 interfaces. The signals are
fed through together via a DSUB plug. The interfaces are not electrically isolated (shared GND
connection).
The IF1 RS232 interface is designed to be used as an online interface. An AC961 bus adapter
is needed to use the IF3. The IF3 can e.g. be used for visualization while the IF1 remains free
as the online interface.
An RS232 cable is available from B&R for connecting programmable I/O processors with the PG
software (PC).
Model No.
0G0001.00-090
Interface
Application interface
RS232
Description
Pin Assignments
The RS232 interfaces are not electrically

isolated.
Pin
Status LEDs RXD1 and TXD1 are lit

during data exchange via either of the two
RS232 interfaces.
RXD1
TXD1
Max. Baud Rate:

Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
15 m
IF1
IF3
4
5
TXD3
GND
GND
RXD3
RTS1
CTS1
9
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 75: IP161 RS232 interfaces (IF1 and IF3)
164

AC961 Bus Adapter
An AC961 bus adapter is needed to use both RS232 interfaces. The bus adapter is connected
to both DSUB plugs.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The (IF1) online interface is connected to the bus adapter with a 9-pin DSUB plug. Both the
RS232 interface IF3 and the CAN interface are connected to one multipoint connector. One
120 terminating resistor is included with the delivery of the AC961. If required, the resistor can
be connected between the CAN_L and CAN_H.
Figure 64: IP161 bus adapter for the AC961
5.5.9 CAN Interface (IF2)

Interface
CAN
Description
Pin Assignments
The 82527 controller is used as the CAN

controller.
Pin
The interface is electrically isolated. The

connection is made using a T-connector
(7AC911.9).
CAN_L
CAN_GND
The status LEDs RXD2 and TXD2 are lit

during data transfer via the CAN interface.
Max. Baud Rate:
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Bus Length:
60 m
Bus Length:
200 m
Bus Length: 1,000 m
CAN
4
5
6
7
CAN_H
8
9
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 76: IP161 CAN interface (IF2)
165

5.5.10 I/O Connections
The programmable I/O processor IP161 is equipped with three rows of terminals for analog and
digital I/Os. The connection is made using the TB170 20-pin terminal block. The assignments for
the three terminal blocks are the same. Only the channel numbers are different.
Connection
Assignment
VREF +10 V
Channel number for

I/O Group
1
TB170
VREF -10 V
+ Analog input
- Analog input
Analog GND
+ Analog input
- Analog input
Analog GND
Shield analog inputs
10
11
1+2
3+4
5+6
Analog output
0 V analog outputs
12
analog output
13
0 V analog outputs
14
Shield Analog Outputs
1+2
3+4
5+6
15
+24 V 1)
1-4
5-8
9 - 12
16
Digital input / output 1
17
10
18
11
19
12
20
COM 1)
1-4
5-8
9 - 12
Table 77: IP161 I/O connections

1) The digital inputs and digital outputs are arranged in three electrically isolated groups.
166

Analog Inputs
Signal Cable Connection
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Shielded cables must be used for wiring the analog inputs. The shield is grounded on the module
using the shield connections provided on the terminal block.
Figure 65: IP161 connections for analog inputs
The shielded connection (pin 9) is connected via an RC element with ground ( , i.e. spring
contact and mounting rail).
R: 22 k, C: 10 nF / 60 V
Figure 66: IP161 shielded connection
167

Potentiometer Connection
The module provides two potentiometer voltages (+10 V and -10 V). The sum of all currents from
all three I/O groups amounts to +80 mA or -80 mA. The two voltages are short circuit proof.
Figure 67: IP161 potentiometer connection
168

Analog Outputs
Figure 68: IP161 connection for analog outputs
The shielded connection (pin 14) is connected via an RC element with ground ( , i.e. spring
contact and mounting rail)
R: 22 k, C: 10 nF / 60 V.
Figure 69: IP161 shielded connection
169
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Shielded cables must be used for wiring the analog outputs. The shield is grounded on the
module using the shield connections provided on the terminal block.

Digital I/O Group
Each digital I/O group has over four I/Os. As default, they are configured as digital inputs. They
can be switched to digital outputs in two groups using software.
Each digital I/O group is supplied externally with +24 VDC (reverse polarity). The groups are
electrically isolated by the system.
The digital inputs can be configured as interrupt inputs using the TPU Code Linker in the
application program.
Connecting an I/O Group with Four Inputs
The inputs are wired as sink circuits.
Note:
Although only inputs are used, the 24 V supply must also be connected to pin 15.
Figure 70: IP161 connecting an I/O group with four inputs
Connecting an I/O Group with Four Outputs
Figure 71: IP161 connecting an I/O group with four outputs
170

Connecting an I/O Group with Two Inputs and Two Outputs
The inputs are wired as sink circuits.
Note:
The digital outputs are push/pull outputs. They can switch the load using a sink
or source circuit.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 72: IP161 connecting an I/O group with two inputs and two outputs

User RAM
System RAM
Real-time clock
The backup battery is either in the B&R 2005 rack or in the AC240 battery module
Battery Monitoring
If the IP161 module is operated as the CPU, the I/O processor carries out cyclical monitoring of
the battery voltage. The cyclic load test of the battery does not considerably shorten the battery
life, instead it gives an early warning of weakened buffer capacity.
"SYS_battery".
171

Since the IP161 module does not have its own expansion master, the EX350 I/O master
controller is needed for local I/O bus expansion. By using this controller, up to four expansion
racks with all I/O modules can be used with the IP161.
5.5.13 Operating Modes
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are set in all operating modes using LTX functions.
1) Fast Analog Value Registering
a) Cyclic Mode
The six analog inputs are converted as quickly as possible. The conversion time for all six
channels is less than 100 s. When inputs are read with corresponding LTX functions from the
application program, the values are a maximum of 100 s old.
b) Triggered Mode
Conversion of the six analog inputs is started either by the application program or by the TPU
cyclically using a specified frequency (max. 10 kHz).
2) Measurement Values are Recorded in FIFO Memory
a) Cyclic Mode
The six analog inputs are converted as quickly as possible. The converted analog values are
stored in a FIFO memory. The FIFO memory must be allocated by the user.
b) Triggered Mode
cyclically using a specified frequency (max. 10 kHz). The converted analog values are stored in
a FIFO memory. The FIFO memory must be allocated by the user.
172

3) Comparator
a) Cyclic Mode
The six analog inputs are converted as quickly as possible and compared with a comparator
value using hardware. The comparator value is evaluated by the TPU. The TPU can handle fast
links to digital I/O or trigger an exception to the processor without loading the processor.
Depending on the TPU, the reaction time ranges from 50 s to 150 s.
using a specified frequency (max. 10 kHz). Analog values are compared with the comparator
value using hardware. The comparator value is evaluated by the TPU. The TPU can handle fast
links to digital I/O's or trigger an exception to the processor without loading the processor.
Depending on the TPU, the reaction time ranges from 50 s to 150 s.
Analog Outputs
The six analog outputs are output cyclically with approximately 10 kHz.
Digital Inputs/Outputs
Digital I/O are set in all operating modes using LTX functions.
Application Example for Digital Inputs/Outputs
Evaluating digital inputs using link function and exception generation
Reading digital inputs using a time stamp
Differential time measurements
Period or pulse duration measurement using internal or external counter frequency
Pulse width modulated outputs
Controlling outputs using the link function
Operating up to five incremental encoders using the comparator function
Operating up to five SSI absolute value encoders
Operating up to six 2 phase stepper motors using the external power supply
173
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
b) Triggered Mode

General Information
CPUs are delivered with a runtime system. The CAN node number switch is set to switch
position 00 at delivery i.e. the bootstrap loader mode is set.
A switch position must be set in order to boot the PLC in RUN mode (see Section 5.5.7 "CAN
Node Number Switch", on page 163). A runtime system update is only possible in RUN mode.
Runtime System Update when Operated as a Parallel Processor
system (runtime system update), the following procedure must be carried out:
1) A runtime system update is only possible using the CPU interfaces. This means that
updating the runtime system must take place using a CPU interface (also applies to parallel
processors).
2) An online runtime system update is only possible if the CPU processor and the parallel
processor are in RUN mode. The RUN mode can be set with the operating mode switch.
PC) and the CPU. An online runtime update is possible using the serial RS232 interface.
Automation Studio.
After pressing Next >, a dialog box appears where the user can set the CAN baud rate, CAN
ID and the CAN node number (the CAN node number set here is only relevant, if an interface
174

message window.
again.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
175
B&R 2005 Modules CPUs XP152
5.6 XP152
The XP152 module is a CPU insert for power supply modules. This means that the CPU does
not require its own slot.
Optionally, the XP152 module can be operated as intelligent CAN bus processor together with a
CPU (e.g. CP260). With this type of operation, the XP152 cannot access local modules on the
2005 unit. It is controlled by the CPU, collects data from the CAN stations (e.g. I/O) and provides
this data to the CPU.
5.6.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
CPU
3XP152.60-2

interface, 1 CAN interface, CAN: electrically isolated,
network capable, insert for power supply modules
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
7AC911.9
Bus connector, CAN
0AC912.9
0AC913.92
Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm

connection cable
Table 78: XP152 order data
176

Product ID
XP152
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$11
Slot
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 4 W
--Max. 4 W
0.8 s
SRAM
User RAM / DPR
System RAM
118 KB
138 KB
FlashPROM
User PROM
System PROM
512 KB
512 KB
Data Buffering
with Battery Module AC240
Battery Monitoring
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Processor
At least 4 years
At least 2 years
Yes, when operated as main CPU (starting with Rev. 12.00)
Peripherals
Real-time Clock
Resolution
Nonvolatile (external buffering)

1s
Reset Button
Yes
Status Display
LEDs
Standard Communication Interfaces

Design
Max. Distance
Max. Baud Rate
RS232
9-pin DSUB plug
No
15 m / 19200 Baud
64 baud

Design
Max. Distance
Max. Baud Rate
Bus Length 60 m
Bus Length 200 m
Bus Length 1,000 m
CAN
9-pin DSUB plug
Yes
1,000 m
500 kBits/s
250 kBits/s
50 kBits/s
Dimensions (H, W, D) [mm]
130, 28, 105
Table 79: XP152 technical data
177

On the module, there is a Reset key, status LEDs, two HEX number dials for the CAN bus station
number and the connector for a RS232 and a CAN interface.
Figure 73: XP152 operational and connection elements
5.6.5 Status LEDs

LED
Description
ERROR
RUN
Lit in Run, Service and diagnostics mode
READY
MODE
Lit when programming FlashPROM
CAN
Lit during data exchange via the CAN interface
RS232
Lit during data exchange via the RS232 interface
Table 80: XP152 status LEDs
All LEDs are lit when the reset button is pressed. They are still lit for another 0.4 s after being
released.
178

5.6.6 Reset Button
Operating Mode
Effects
CAN Bus Processor
Local Reset
- All XP152 application programs are stopped
CPU

Table 81: XP152 reset button
The CAN node number is set with the two hex switches. The switch setting can be evaluated by
the application program at any time. If the switch position is changed during operation, a warning
can be generated. The operating system only interprets the switch position when switched on.
The settings $00, and $FF are reserved for special functions.
Switch Position
Function
$00
In this switch position, the operating system can be programmed via the online interface. User Flash is only
deleted after the update begins.
The bootstrap loader mode is only required when PCCSW < 2.0 is installed. The procedure is the same as
described in Section 5.6.12 "Programming System Flash", on page 182. In an additional dialog box, the baud rate
and the interface must only be set, from which a connection to the PLC is created.
$FF
diagnostics mode
Table 82: XP152 CAN node number switch
179
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

An RS232 cable is available from B&R for connecting the CPU and PG (PC).
Model No.
0G0001.00-090
Interface
RS232
Description
Pin Assignments
The RS232 interface is not electrically

isolated.
The RS232 status LED is lit when data is
transferred via the RS232 interface.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
64 kBaud
15 m
Pin
RS232
1
2
RXD
TXD
4
5
GND
6
7
RTS
CTS
9
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 83: XP152 RS232 Interface (IF1)

Interface
CAN
Description
Pin Assignments
The 82527 processor is used as the CAN

controller.
Pin
The interface is electrically isolated. The

connection is made using a T-connector
(7AC911.9).
CAN_L
CAN_GND
The CAN status LED is lit when data is

transferred via the CAN interface.
Max. Baud Rate:
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Bus Length:
60 m
Bus Length:
200 m
Bus Length: 1,000 m
CAN
4
5
6
res.
CAN_H
8
9
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 84: XP152 CAN interface (IF2)
180

User RAM
System RAM
Real-time clock
The backup battery is either in the B&R 2005 rack or in the AC240 battery module Data can also
buffered be by module with a rechargeable battery such as e.g. CP260.
Battery Monitoring
"SYS_battery".
181
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
If the XP152 is operated as the CPU, it carries out cyclical monitoring of the battery voltage. The
cyclic load test of the battery does not considerably shorten the battery life, instead it gives an
early warning of weakened buffer capacity.

The XP152 is equipped with a module fastener starting from revision 12.00. The module fastener
prevents the power supply from falling out of the CPU during transport.
power supply and XP152 at the same height as the sloped marking (see figure below). By
XP152, the CPU is taken out from its bracing and can be removed from the power supply.
Figure 74: XP152 module fastener

General Information
CPUs are delivered with a runtime system. The CAN node number switch is set to switch
position 00 at delivery i.e. the bootstrap loader mode is set.
A switch position must be set in order to boot the PLC in RUN mode (see Section 5.6.7 "CAN
Node Number Switch", on page 179). A runtime system update is only possible in RUN mode.
182

system (online runtime system update), the following procedure must be carried out:
1) An online runtime system update is only possible, if the processor is in RUN mode.
PC) and the XP152. An online runtime update is possible using the serial RS232 onboard
interface.
After pressing Next > a dialog box appears where the user can set the CAN baud rate, CAN
ID and the CAN node number (the CAN node number set here is only relevant if an interface
message window.
183
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Automation Studio.

again.
184
B&R 2005 Modules Programmable Modules Overview
6. Programmable Modules
6.1 Overview
Module
Description
DM455
2005 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, sink, 8 transistor outputs, 0 to 50 VDC, 1 A. Order terminal blocks
separately.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 85: Programmable module overview
185
B&R 2005 Modules Programmable Modules DM455
6.2 DM455
The DM455 is equipped with a powerful processor. The functionality (DM455 operating system)
is transferred via a coupling memory from the CPU into the DM455. Therefore, it is possible to
provide functions such as stepper motor control, PWM positioning, connection of an
asymmetrical incremental encoder, gear measuring, etc.
6.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
3DM455.60-2
2005 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, 2.5 s, sink,

8 transistor outputs, 0 to 50 VDC, 1 A. Order terminal
blocks separately.
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Terminal blocks not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").
Table 86: DM455 order data
186

Product ID
DM455
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$20
Status LEDs
Inputs
Outputs
ERROR
RUN
8 (green)
8 (yellow)
Red
Green
Number of Inputs
Input Connections
Sink
Input - PLC
Input - Output
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
Input Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
Input Voltage to Ground
Max. 70 VDC
Input Current at Nominal Voltage
Approx. 5 mA
Input Resistance
4.4 k
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
Applications
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Inputs
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Encoder evaluation, signal measurement, high-speed signal processing
Input Frequency
Max. 100 kHz, decisively limited by the software
Input Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Max. 2.5 s
Max. 2.5 s
Outputs
Number of Outputs
Design
Transistor
Output - PLC
Output - Input
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
Supply Voltage
0 -50 VDC
Supply Voltage Range

+ to ground
- to ground
Continuous Current per Output
Push, Pull or Push/Pull Operation
Motor Operation
Max. +70 VDC

Max. -70 VDC
Max. 1 A
See Section 6.2.11 "Maximum Permitted Load on the Motor Windings", on page 198
Table 87: DM455 technical data
187

Product ID
Current Threshold
Offset Error
Amplification Error
Digital Value -> Analog Value
Minimum Permitted Setting
Maximum Setting
Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Switching Frequency (resistive load)
Short Circuit Protection
Switching On after Short Circuit Cutoff
Protective Circuit
Internal
External
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions
DM455
Max. 40 mA
Max. 8%
1 LSB = 1 mA
0.1 A
2.55 A
Max. 7 s
Max. 7 s
Max. 100 kHz, decisively limited by the software
Yes
Using software
2.55 A 15%
Yes
Generally required (fuse)
Max. 3.5 W
--Max. 3.5 W
Table 87: DM455 technical data (cont.)
188

6.2.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
1 -8, green
The 8 green status LEDs indicate the relevant logical

status of the corresponding inputs. The LED is lit if the
operating system sets the corresponding LED because
of the input information.
RUN
LED blinks ......the DM455 is not initialized

LED not lit .......the DM455 is initialized
ERROR
LED blinks ......LED blinks during the boot phase

LED lit .............module error
1 -8, yellow
The 8 yellow status LEDs indicate the relevant logical

status of the corresponding outputs.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 88: DM455 Status LEDs
189

6.2.5 Pin Assignments
Connection
TB170
Assignment
COM (Inputs 1 - 8)
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
10
Shield
11
COM (Outputs 1 - 8)
12
Output 1
13
Output 2
14
Output 3
15
Output 4
16
Output 5
17
Output 6
18
Output 7
19
Output 8
20
Supply of Outputs
Table 89: DM455 pin assignments
6.2.6 Connection Example

1) Push Operation
Output
IN
OUT
T1
Off
Off
T2
On
Off
Table 90: DM455 connection examples
190

2) Pull Operation
Output
IN
OUT
T1
On
Off
T2
Off
Off
3) Push/Pull Operation
Output
IN
T1
Off
On
T2
On
Off
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Current flow, if output = IN
OUT
Current flow, if output = OUT
Table 90: DM455 connection examples (cont.)
191

4) Motor Operation
Output
Direction 1
Direction 2
T1
On
Off
T2
Off
On
T3
Off
On
T4
On
Off
Table 90: DM455 connection examples (cont.)
192

6.2.7 Installation Notes
Wiring the Ground Connection (pin 10)
with Unshielded Cables
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Wiring the Ground Connection (pin 10)

with Shielded Cables
Figure 75: DM455 installation guidelines
193

6.2.8 Input Circuit Diagram
Figure 76: DM455 input circuit diagram
194
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
6.2.9 Output Circuit Diagram
Figure 77: DM455 output circuit diagram
195

6.2.10 Detailed Description of Outputs
The DM455 is equipped with eight outputs. Two outputs are grouped together into one pair:
Pair
Outputs
1+2
3+4
5+6
7+8
Table 91: DM455 outputs
Operating Modes
The DM455 provides four operating modes which can be configured by the user using software.
Operating Mode
Description
Push
Switched to plus
Pull
Switched to GND
Push/Pull
Switched to plus and GND
Motor
Full-bridge
Table 92: DM455 operating modes
The first three operating modes are defined in pairs.

Example:
196
Pair
Outputs
Operating Mode
1+2
Push
3+4
Push
5+6
Pull
7+8
Push/Pull

Motor Operation
Up to two motors can be controlled using the DM455.
Motor
Outputs
1-4
5-8
Two outputs are required per motor windings.

Motor Windings
1+2
3+4
Outputs
5+6
7+8
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Motor
A set current value can be given by the software for each motor.
Motor
Set Value
Configuration examples for motor operation.

Example 1:
Operating Mode
Outputs
Motor
1-4
Push
5+6
Pull
7+8
Operating Mode
Outputs
Push
1+2
Push/Pull
3+4
Motor
5-8
Operating Mode
Outputs
Motor 1
1-4
Motor 2
5-8
Example 2:
Example 3:
197

6.2.11 Maximum Permitted Load on the Motor Windings
The following diagram displays the maximum load on the motor windings depending on the
power supply voltage and the switch off time.
Figure 78: DM455 maximum permitted load on the motor windings
198

6.2.12 Current Surge Cutoffs
Push, Pull or Push/Pull Operation
Current surge cutoff occurs at 2.55 A (15%).
Operation as a Motor Bridge Circuit
Each of the four motor bridge circuits monitors the current for the plus and minus supply. A short
circuit message is given if the current exceeds 2.55 A (15%).
6.2.13 Communication Memory
The communication memory can be freely defined by the user.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Division
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
UDINT
UDINT
199
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Input Modules General Information
7. Digital Input Modules

Digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the
PLC. The states of the digital inputs are shown with status LEDs.
The distinguishing features relevant for the input modules are:
Number of Inputs
Input voltage
Input delay (filter)
Special functions (e.g. counter inputs)
7.1.1 Input Filter

An input filter is available for each input. The input delay is shown in the technical data sections.
Disturbance pulses which are shorter than input delay are suppressed by the input filter.
Figure 79: Input filter for digital input modules
200

7.1.2 Sink/Source Wiring
Most 24 VDC B&R SYSTEM 2005 input modules can be either wired as sink or source circuits.
The inputs on a module are normally separated in electrically isolated groups of four inputs.
Therefore individual group can also be wired differently.
In a sink circuit (current consumer for the sensor), the COM connection for an input group
is connected to signal ground and the inputs are connected to sensors that switch to
24 VDC.
For source wiring (current supplier from the sensor's point of view), the COM connection
of an input group is connected to +24 VDC, and the inputs are connected to GND
switching sensors.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 80: Digital input modules sink/source connections
201

7.1.3 Overview
Module
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
Input Delay
Remarks
DI450
DI475
DI476
DI477
DI486
DI695
16
16
16
32
32
16
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
120 / 230 VAC
1 ms (inputs 1 - 8)
10 ms (inputs 9 -16)
10 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
50 ms
Input 1 - 4: Counter Inputs

Input 5 - 6: Gate Measurement
Connection:
DSUB
connector
Connection:
Terminal
Table 93: Digital input module overview

Module
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
Switching Threshold
Switching range
Hysteresis
Input Delay
DI875
16 Namur inputs
8.05 VDC
1.2 mA to 2.1 mA
Typ. 100 A
1 ms
Table 94: Digital input module overview (cont.)
7.1.4 Programming
The digital inputs are accessed directly in the application program using a variable name. The
relationship between the input channel for a certain module and the variable name is defined in
the variable declaration. The declaration is made identically for each programming language
using a table editor.
202
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Input Modules DI450
7.2 DI450
The DI450 is equipped with the following functions:
Standard digital inputs
4 Counter inputs
2 Channels for gate or period measurement
7.2.2 Order Data

Short Description
3DI450.60-9
2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms / 10 ms,

sink or sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups,
4 counter inputs, 100 kHz, gate or period measurement.
Figure
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
Table 95: DI450 order data

Product ID
DI450
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$08
Table 96: DI450 technical data
203

Product ID
DI450
Number of Inputs
Total
in 4 Groups of
Type of Inputs
Channels 1 -4
Channels 5 -6
Channels 7 - 16
16
4
8-bit counter
Gate, period measurement (starting with Rev. 30.00)
Digital input
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Input - Input (same group)
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
No
Wiring
Groups 1 + 2 (input 1 - 8)
Groups 3 +4 (input 9 -16)
Sink
Sink or source
Input Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
24 VDC
30 VDC
Input current
at 24 VDC
at 30 VDC
Approx. 8 mA
Approx. 10 mA
Input Resistance
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
2.8 k
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Input Delay
for inputs 1 - 8
Typical
Max.
for inputs 9 -16
Typical
Max.
1 ms
1.2 ms
10 ms
12 ms
Counter Inputs
Inputs
Counter Size
Count Frequency
1-4
8-bit (individual) 1)
Max. 100 kHz
Gate Measurement
Channels
Gate Frequency
Gate Pause
5 and 6
Max. 10 kHz
> 50 s
Period Measurement (Rev. 30.00 and up)

Channels
Input Frequency
5 and 6
Max. 10 kHz

Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions
500 V for 50 s max. every 100 ms

Max. 2 W
--Max. 2 W
Table 96: DI450 technical data (cont.)

1) Counter inputs 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 can be linked together as a 16-bit counter.
204

7.2.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
1 - 16
The status LEDs indicate the logical status of the corresponding

inputs. Regardless of the type connection (sink or source
connection), the LED is lit if the input is logical 1, i.e. when the
current flows through the optocoupler.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure
Table 97: DI450 status LEDs
205

Connection
TB170
Assignment
COM (1-4)
Input 1
Input 2
Counter 2: 8-bit
Input 3
Counter 3: 8-bit
Input 4
Counter 4: 8-bit
Input 5
Gate/Period Measurement Channel 2: 16-bit
Input 6
Gate/Period Measurement Channel 4: 16-bit
Input 7
Input 8
10
COM (5-8)
11
COM (9-12)
12
Input 9
13
Input 10
14
Input 11
15
Input 12
16
Input 13
17
Input 14
18
Input 15
19
Input 16
20
COM (13-16)
Counter 1: 8-bit
Counter 1 and 2: 16-bit
Group 1
Counter 3 and 4: 16-bit
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Table 98: DI450 pin assignment
7.2.6 Pulse Measurement

Channels 1 to 4 can be used as 8-bit counter inputs (input frequency max. 100 kHz). Channel
pairs 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 can be linked together as 16-bit counters. In this case, the
counter inputs for the channel are 2 or 4.
The counters run continually. This means an overflow is not recognized. The application program
can read the counter states and e.g. use the previous cycle value for the differential peak.
Reset / Enable
All counters are automatically reset and and then enabled with a hardware reset. The counter
status is increased with every negative edge (change from logical 1 to logical 0) of the respective
input.
A reset causes one or more counters to be set to zero. Counting begins after the counter is
enabled again. Since the status out byte is only written to at the end of a task cycle, the reset
and enable must be carried out in two different task cycles.
206

To avoid pulses from the configuration process, a reset of the effected counter is necessary after
counter configuration.
Connection Examples for Pulse Measurement
Example 1: 8-bit counter for inputs 1 - 4
Configuration Register:
$00
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Pin Assignments:
Figure 81: DI450 connection example 1 for pulse measurement
Example 2: 16-bit counter for inputs 2 and 4

$03
Pin Assignments:
Figure 82: DI450 connection example 2 for pulse measurement
207

7.2.7 Gate Measurement
A signal connected to channel 5 or 6 can be evaluated using gate measurement. The resolution
is 16-bit. The frequency of the signal to be measured can be a maximum of 10 kHz. The signal
to be measured is also called the gate frequency. The pause between two gate measurements
must be larger than 50 s.
An internal or external counter frequency can be selected for the measurement. The setting is
made with the configuration register.
Internal counter frequency (31250 Hz or 4 MHz)
External counter frequency (max. 100 kHz)
The external counter frequency is connected to inputs 2 (for counters 1/2) and 4 (for
counters 3/4).
Gate Measurement Principle
Figure 83: DI450 gate measurement principle
Pulse counting is started by a rising edge on the gate and stopped by a falling edge. The count
is placed in a temporary register when the falling edge occurs. The counter is started again by
the next rising edge.
During gate measurement, the count stored last (the gate) can be read by the active application
program. The value in the temporary register is only updated after at the end of the active
measurement (falling edge).
Mixed operation between pulse measurement and gate measurement is possible (see
connection example 2).
208

Connection Example for Gate Measurement
Example 1: Gate measurement on channels 5 and 6.
An external frequency is used for measurement:
Channel 2: 100 kHz
Channel 4: 20 kHz
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Pin Assignments
Figure 84: DI450 connection example 1 for gate measurement
209

Example 2: Pulse measurement with counters 1/2 (16-bit resolution).
Gate measurement on channel 6.
An external frequency is used for measurement (channel 4): 15 kHz
Connection Example:
Figure 85: DI450 connection example 2 for gate measurement
210

7.2.8 Period Measurement
The period can be measured from a signal connected to channel 5, 6 or 7. The resolution is 16bit. The frequency of the signal to be measured can be a maximum of 10 kHz.
An internal or external counter frequency can be selected for the measurement. The setting is
made with the configuration register.
Internal counter frequency (31250 Hz or 4 MHz)
External counter frequency (max. 100 kHz)
The external counter frequency is connected to inputs 2 (for counters 1/2) and 4 (for
counters 3/4).
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Period Measurement Principle
Figure 86: DI450 period measurement principle
Pulse counting is started by a high edge on the input and stopped by the next rising edge. The
count is placed in a temporary register. The counter is started again by the same rising edge.
During period measurement, the count stored last (the period) can be read by the active
application program. The value in the temporary register is only updated at the end of the active
measurement.
211

Connection Example for Period Measurement
Period measurement on channels 5 and 6.
An external frequency is used for measurement:
Channel 2: 100 kHz
Channel 4: 20 kHz
Pin Assignments:
Figure 87: DI450 connection example for period measurement
212

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Inputs 1 - 6 (counter and gate inputs)
Figure 88: DI450 input circuit diagram for inputs 1 - 6 (counter and gate inputs)
Inputs 7 -16
Figure 89: DI450 input circuit diagram for inputs 7 - 16
213

7.2.10 Variable Declarations
The variable declaration is made in B&R Automation Studio:
Function
Variable Declarations
Scope
Read single digital input (channel x)

Read 8-bit counter (input 1 to 4):
Read 16-bit counter (input 2 and 4):
Resetting one or more counters by writing

with $7F:
Enabling one or more counters by writing

with $FF:
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
1 ... 16
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
Input 1
tc_global
USINT
Transp. In
Input 2
tc_global
USINT
Transp. In
Input 3
tc_global
USINT
Transp. In
Input 4
tc_global
USINT
Transp. In
Input 21)
tc_global
UINT
Transp. In
Input 41)
tc_global
UINT
Transp. In
All counters
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counters 1 and 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counters 3 and 4
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 3
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 4
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
All counters
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counters 1 and 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counters 3 and 4
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 3
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter 4
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Counter configuration (see section "Configuration Register")
Table 99: DI450 variable declaration

1) If input 2/4 is used as a 16-bit counter, it is not possible to simultaneously use input 1/3 as an 8-bit counter.
All digital inputs can be read at any time regardless if an input is used as a
counter.
214

Configuration Register
Configuration Reg.
Description
Period
- Period measurement
Int C4
- Internal frequency for channel 4
Gate C4
- Gate measurement for channel 4
Int C2
- Internal frequency for channel 2
Gate C2
- Gate measurement for channel 2
4 MHz
- Internal 4 MHz
Z1/2 16-bit
- Counter 1 and counter 2 16-bit resolution
Z1/4 16-bit
- Counter 3 and counter 4 16-bit resolution
Period
0 ......Pulse measurement and gate measurement

1 ......Period measurement
Gate C2
0...... Pulse measurement for channel 2

1...... Gate measurement or period measurement for
channel 2
Int C4
0 ......External frequency for channel 4

1 ......Internal frequency for channel 4
4 MHz
0...... Internal 31250 Hz

1...... Internal 4 MHz
Gate C4
0 ......Pulse measurement for channel 4

1 ......Gate measurement or period measurement for
channel 4
Z1/2 16-bit
0...... counter 1 and 2: 8-bit

Int C2
0 ......External frequency for channel 2

1 ......Internal frequency for channel 2
Z3/4 16-bit

215
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Bit
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Input Modules DI475 / DI476
7.3 DI475 / DI476

The DI475 and DI476 are standard digital input modules.
7.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DI475.6
2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 10 ms,

sink/source, 4 electrically isolated input groups. Order
TB170 terminal blocks separately.
Figure
3DI476.6

TB170 terminal blocks separately.
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Table 100: DI475 / DI476 order data

DI475
DI476
C-UL-US Listed
Product ID
Yes
Yes
B&R ID Code
$01
$07
Number of Inputs
Total
in 4 Groups of
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Wiring
16
4
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
No
Sink or source
Table 101: DI475 / DI476 technical data
216

Product ID
DI475
DI476
Input Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
24 VDC
30 VDC
Input Resistance
4.8 k
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Input Delay
Typical
Maximum
10 ms
12 ms
1 ms
1.2 ms
Approx. 5 mA
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
Table 101: DI475 / DI476 technical data (cont.)
7.3.4 Status LEDs

Figure
LED
Description
1 - 16

connection) the LED is lit, if the input is logical 1, i.e. when the
Table 102: DI475 / DI476 status LEDs
217

Connection
Assignment
COM (1-4)
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
TB170
10
COM (5-8)
11
COM (9-12)
12
Input 9
13
Input 10
14
Input 11
15
Input 12
16
Input 13
17
Input 14
18
Input 15
19
Input 16
20
COM (13-16)
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Table 103: DI475 / DI476 pin assignments
Figure 90: DI475 / DI476 input circuit diagram
218

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 16
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 104: DI475 / DI476 variable declaration
219
7.4 DI477
The DI477 is a standard digital input module.
7.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DI477.6

sink/source, 8 electrically isolated input groups
Figure
Connection made using DSUB connector.

Product ID
DI477
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$05
Number of Inputs
Total
in 8 Groups of
32
4
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Wiring
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
No
Sink or source
220

Product ID
DI477
Input Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
24 VDC
30 VDC
Input Resistance
4.8 k
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Input Delay
Typical
Maximum
1 ms
1.2 ms
Approx. 5 mA
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
7.4.4 Status LEDs

Figure
LED
Description
1 - 32

connection), the LED is lit if the input is logical 1, i.e. when the
221

7.4.5 Connection Elements
Since the DI477 module has 32 digital inputs and B&R 2005 controller terminal blocks are only
20-pin, two 25-pin DSUB sockets are built into the module.
The connection for the DSUB socket is made using two 25-pin DSUB connectors. Due to space
restrictions it is necessary to use crimp connectors and rolled ribbon cable for the connection.
Figure 91: DI477 connection elements
222

7.4.6 Pin Assignments for DSUB Sockets
With these pin assignments, a COM line and the lines for the four inputs that belong to it are
located beside each other for this ribbon cable. Therefore, it is possible to split the ribbon cable
and run electrically isolated groups for external connection. For an external contact, terminal
blocks can be used with a 1:1 conversion DSUB connector (e.g. from Phoenix).
Pin
1
Assignment
Group
---
Input 15
Input 13
---
Input 11
Input 9
---
Input 7
Input 5
10
---
11
Input 3
12
Input 1
13
---
14
Input 16
15
Input 14
16
COM (13-16)
17
Input 12
18
Input 10
19
COM (9-12)
20
Input 8
21
Input 6
22
COM (5-8)
23
Input 4
24
Input 2
25
COM (1-4)
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Upper 25-pin DSUB Socket
Table 108: DI477 pin connections for the upper 25-pin DSUB socket
223

Lower 25-pin DSUB Socket
Pin
1
Assignment
Group
---
Input 31
Input 29
---
Input 27
Input 25
---
Input 23
Input 21
10
---
11
Input 19
12
Input 17
13
---
14
Input 32
15
Input 30
16
COM (29-32)
17
Input 28
18
Input 26
19
COM (25-28)
20
Input 24
21
Input 22
22
COM (21-24)
23
Input 20
24
Input 18
25
COM (17-20)
Table 109: DI477 pin connections for the lower 25-pin DSUB socket
224

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 92: DI477 input circuit diagram

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 32
225
7.5 DI486
The DI486 is a standard digital input module. It offers very high component density using
standard 3.5 mm terminal blocks.
7.5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DI486.6

2 x TB718 terminal blocks separately!
Figure
7TB718.9
Accessory terminal block, 18-pin, screw clamp, 1.5 mm
7TB718.91
Accessory terminal block, 18-pin, cage clamp, 1.5 mm
7TB718:90-02
Accessory terminal block, 18-pin, 20 pieces, screw clamp,

1.5 mm
7TB718:91-02
Accessory terminal block, 18-pin , 20 pieces, cage clamp,

1.5 mm
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "General Accessories").
226

Product ID
DI486
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$09
Number of Inputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
32
16
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
No
Wiring
Sink or source
Input Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
24 VDC
30 VDC
6 k
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching Range
HIGH Range
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Input Resistance
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Input Delay
Typical
Maximum
0.5 ms
1 ms
Approx. 4 mA
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.2 W
--Max. 1.2 W
Dimensions
7.5.4 Status LEDs

Figure
LED
Description
DCOK
The DCOK LED is controlled by the respective input supply and is lit if the
supply voltage is over +18 VDC.
1 - 32
Input state of the corresponding digital inputs.
227

Two 18-pin terminal blocks are located next to each other in the lower part of the housing so that
all signals can be connected using terminal blocks.
The TB718 terminal blocks are available with screw and cage clamps.
Figure 93: DI486 Connection Elements
228

Left 18-pin Terminal Block
Connection
Assignment
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
10
Input 10
11
Input 11
12
Input 12
13
Input 13
14
Input 14
15
Input 15
16
Input 16
17
COMs (+24 VDC in sink operation)
18
COM (GND in sink operation)
Group
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 114: DI486 pin assignment for terminal block X1
229

Right 18-pin Terminal Block
Connection
Assignment
Input 17
Input 18
Input 19
Input 20
Input 21
Input 22
Input 23
Input 24
Input 25
10
Input 26
11
Input 27
12
Input 28
13
Input 29
14
Input 30
15
Input 31
16
Input 32
17
18
Group
230
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
231

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 32
Status Register
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register
Status Register
Bit
Description
DCOK
- Supply voltage in the valid range
x x x x x x x
7
DCOK
232
0...... No supply voltage or supply voltage too low for digital inputs
1...... Supply voltage in the valid range
7.6 DI695
The DI695 is a standard digital input module.
7.6.2 Order Data
Short Description
3DI695.6
2005 digital input module, 16 inputs 120/230 VAC, 50 ms,

2 electrically isolated input groups, Order TB170 terminal
block separately.
Figure
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number

Product ID
DI695
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$B2
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
233

Product ID
DI695
Module Type
Number of Inputs
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Connections (Sink/Source)
Limit Values
0-Signal UL
0-Signal IL
1-Signal UH
1-Signal IH
B&R 2005 I/O module

16
264 VAC
120 / 230 VAC
50 / 60 Hz
--- (AC input module)
Max. 40 VAC
Max. 15 mA
Min. 79 VAC
Min. 2 mA
Delay 0 to 1
Max. 50 ms
Delay 1 to 0
Max. 50 ms
Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
external
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
Max. 4 W
Status Displays for Inputs
1 green LED per channel
Consequences of Incorrect Input
Connections
Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating
Conditions between Channel and
Bus
Group 1 - Group 2
Tapping Point and Binary Status of Visual
Displays
Consequences of Removing/Inserting
Input Modules with Voltage Applied
No effects on the module
2500 VAC
500 VAC
PLC in logic part
Additional Exterior Load when Inputs and

Outputs are Switched Together (if
required)
Additional load depending on leakage current for the corresponding outputs
Explanation of Signal Evaluation
AC voltage travels to the optocoupler via an RC combination.

Evaluation is carried out every second with a comparator using a filter circuit.
Further signal processing in the digital section.

Different Circuits Possible
COM connection to neutral, input to switch phase

Yes (but not different phases)
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Terminal Layout

See Section 7.6.5 "Pin Assignments", on page 236
234

7.6.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
1 - 16

inputs. The LED is lit when the input is log. 1, i.e. when the current
flows through the optocoupler.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure
235

Connection
Assignment
---
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
10
COM (1-8)
11
COM (9-16)
12
Input 9
13
Input 10
14
Input 11
15
Input 12
16
Input 13
17
Input 14
18
Input 15
19
Input 16
20
---
Group 1
Group 2
TB170
Table 120: DI695 pin assignment
The connections COM (1 - 8) and COM (9 - 16) are not permitted to be used with
the different phases (L1, L2, L3).
236


Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 16
237
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
7.7 DI875
The DI875 module is used to transfer digital signals from Namur encoders according to
EN 60947-5-6.
In addition to Namur encoders normal switches can also be used.
7.7.2 Examples of Possible Encoders
Proximity Switch
Switch according to EN 60947-5-6 (Namur)
Mechanical Contacts (instead of Namur encoders)
Without open line recognition and without short circuit

recognition
Without open line recognition and with short circuit

recognition
Table 122: DI875 Examples of possible encoders
238

Mechanical Contacts (instead of Namur encoders)
With open line recognition and without short circuit

recognition
With open line recognition and with short circuit recognition
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 122: DI875 Examples of possible encoders (cont.)
7.7.3 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
3DI875.6
2005 digital input module, 16 Namur inputs, 8.05 VDC,

2 electrically isolated input groups. Order 2 x TB718
Figure
239

Product ID
DI875
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
In preparation
B&R ID Code
$B4
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Module Type
Number of Inputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
No Load Voltage
B&R 2005 I/O module

16
8
8.05 V 5%
Internal Resistance
Approx. 1 k
Open Line Detection
<200 A
Short Circuit Recognition
> 7 mA
Maximum short circuit current
< 9 mA
Switching Threshold
Switching range
Hysteresis
1.2 mA to 2.1 mA
Typ. 100 A
Delay 0 to 1
Max. 1 ms
Delay 1 to 0
Max. 1 ms
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.3 W
Max. 4.8 W
Max. 6.1 W
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Yes
Yes
No
Dimensions
Terminal Layout

See 7.7.7 "Pin Assignments", on page 242
240
Figure
LED
Description
2 x DCOK
The orange DCOK LED is lit when there is a Namur supply voltage of 8 VDC
(supply for Namur encoder).
16 x green
16 x Dual LED
Operating status for the corresponding digital inputs.

Status
Description
Not lit
Normal Operation
Red blinking
Open line recognition for the respective input
Red lit
Short circuit recognition for the respective input
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
7.7.5 Status LEDs
Figure 96: DI875 connection elements
241

Pin
Assignment
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ input 2
- Input 2
+ Input 3
- Input 3
+ Input 4
- Input 4
+ Input 5
10
- Input 5
11
+ Input 6
12
- Input 6
13
+ Input 7
14
- Input 7
15
+ Input 8
16
- Input 8
17
NC
18
NC
Group
Table 126: DI875 pin assignments for terminal block X1
242

Pin
Assignment
+ Input 9
- Input 9
+ input 10
- Input 10
+ Input 11
- Input 11
+ Input 12
- Input 12
+ Input 13
10
- Input 13
11
+ Input 14
12
- Input 14
13
+ Input 15
Group
14
- Input 15
15
+ Input 16
16
- Input 16
17
NC
18
NC
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
243


B&R Automation Studio Support: See B&R Automation Studio Help starting with V1.40.
Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 16
Read open line registers 1 - 8
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Read open line registers 9 -16
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Read short circuit registers 1 - 8
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Read short circuit registers 9 -16
tc_global
USINT
Status In
244

Open Line Register (read)
No ..... No open line
Yes ... Open line
Bit
Chan.
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Status
Description
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Legend:
Table 129: DI875 open line register (read)
245

Short Circuit Register (read)
Legend:
No ..... No short circuit

Yes ... Short circuit
Bit
Chan.
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Status
Description
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Table 130: DI875 short circuit register (read)
246
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Output Modules General Information
8. Digital Output Modules

Digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states
of the digital outputs are indicated by status LEDs.
The distinguishing features relevant for output modules are:
Number of Outputs
Type (relays, transistors, triacs)
Switching Voltage
Continuous Current
The transistor output modules DO479 and DO480 have overload protection and an internal
protective circuit for overload peaks or reverse polarity. The braking voltage allows fast switching
of inductive loads without external inverse diodes.
Relays and triac output modules have external overload protection (fuse).
247
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
8.1.1 Protective Circuit
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Output Modules General Information

8.1.2 Overview
Module
DO479
DO480
DO486
16
16
32
Design
Transistor
Transistor
FET positive switching
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
19.5 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
0 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
Continuous Current per

Output
Group
Module
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 4 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 2 A
Max. 12 A
Max. 24 A
Number of Outputs
Rev. <E0
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 6 A
Max. 12 A
Rev. E0
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 16 A
Table 131: Overview of digital output modules

Module
Number of Outputs
Design
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
Output
Group
Module
DO650
DO690
DO750
DO760
16
Relay
Triac
Relay
Relay
120 VAC / 24 VDC

144 VAC / 30 VDC
30 VAC
120 VAC
144 VAC
230 VAC / 24 VDC

250 VAC / 30 VDC
30 VDC / 240 VAC

125 VDC / 264 VAC
Max. 2 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 32 A
Max. 1 A
Max. 2 A
Max. 4 A
Max. 3 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 16 A
Max. 4 A
Max. 32 A
Table 132: Overview of digital output modules
8.1.3 Programming
The digital outputs are accessed directly in the application program using a variable name. The
relationship between the output channel for a certain module and the variable name is defined
in the variable declaration. The declaration is made identically for each programming language
248
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Output Modules DO479
8.2 DO479
The DO479 is a standard digital output module.
8.2.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 digital output module, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC,
0.5 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups. Order TB170
terminal block separately.
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3DO479.6
Table 133: DO479 order data

Product ID
DO479
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$40
Number of Outputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
16
8
Design
Transistor
Table 134: DO479 technical data
249

Product ID
DO479
Output - PLC
Group - Group
Output - Output
Yes
Yes
No
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
19.5 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC

Output
Group
Module
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 4 A
Max. 8 A
Leakage Current when Switched Off

Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Overload Protection
Switching On after Overload Cutoff
Protective Circuit
Internal
External
Braking Voltage when Switching Off
Inductive Loads
Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
Terminal Side at 24 V
Dimensions
0.3 mA
Typ. 5 s / max. 110 s
Typ. 60 s / max. 100 s
Max. 500 Hz
Yes
Automatically after approx. 5 s
0.75 to 1.5 A
Yes
Only if necessary (surge)
45 to 55 V
Max. 1 W
--Max. 1 W
Max. 2 W per Group
Table 134: DO479 technical data (cont.)
250

8.2.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
1 - 16
The status LEDs indicate the logical status of the

corresponding outputs.
OL x-y
The LEDs OL x-y (overload) indicate that the overload or

short circuit cutoff has been activated for the respective
LED group. If e. g. the OL 1-4 LED is lit, it means that a
transistor (output 1, 2, 3 or 4) has been switched off (for
more information see Section 8.2.7 "Overload
Protection", on page 254).
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 135: DO479 status LEDs
251

Connection
Assignment
+24 V supply for inputs 1 - 8
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
10
GND for output 1 - 8
Group 1
11
GND for output 9 -16
12
Output 9
13
Output 10
14
Output 11
15
Output 12
16
Output 13
17
Output 14
18
Output 15
19
Output 16
20
+24 V supply for inputs 9 -16
Group 2
TB170
Table 136: DO479 pin assignment
When connecting the terminal block, it is important to ensure that any potential difference does
not exceed 50 V. This is valid for:
Potential Difference <50 V
Group Group
+24 V connection PLC ground
+24 V connection ground
Table 137: DO479 the potential difference must be smaller than 50 V
Both electrically isolated groups can also be supplied by 2 separate 24 V sources.
252

Connection Example
Figure 98: DO479 connection example
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 99: DO479 output circuit diagram
253

8.2.7 Overload Protection
The overload protection is activated in the following cases:
Junction temperature for transistors exceeds the limit value (typ. 150 C, min. 135 C,
max. 175 C). Causes: Short circuit, overload or environmental temperature is too high.
The 24 V supply voltage (terminal side) is smaller than typ. 13 V (min. 10 V,

max. 14.5 V).
The affected output remains switched off until ...

... the junction temperature is again within the limit value (hysteresis typ. 20 C). The time until
it is switched on again is within seconds.
... the voltage supply is again within the valid range (typ. >14.5 V).
8.2.8 Switching Inductive Loads
Transistors are suitable for switching inductive loads off quickly and safely. Inverse diodes are
not necessary on inductive loads. It should be noted that the maximum switching frequency at a
given inductance is limited by a set braking voltage of 45 V to 55 V.
Braking Voltage:
is a negative voltage on the switching element (e.g. valve). If the switching

element is unable to operate with a negative voltage, an external inverse
diode must be installed to limit the voltage to approx. -0.6 V.
Figure 100: DO479 schematic representation for braking voltage
254

The maximum switching frequency decreases as the inductance increases. A coil with an
inductivity of 0.5 H can be easily switched with 0.5 Hz at 24 V / 0.5 A and 60 C environmental
temperature.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The maximum switching frequency in relation to a given inductance can be seen from the
following diagram.
Figure 101: DO479 switching frequency in relation to a given inductance

Function
Single digital output (channel x)
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 16
Table 138: DO479 variable declaration
255
8.3 DO480
The DO480 is a standard digital output module.
8.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DO480.6

2 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups. Order TB170
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02

Product ID
DO480
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$41
Number of Outputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
16
8
Design
Output - PLC
Group - Group
Output - Output
Transistor
Yes
Yes
No
256

Product ID
DO480
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
0 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC

Output
Group
Module
Max. 2 A
Max. 12 A1)
Max. 24 A
Switching Capacity of Filament Lamps
15 W / 24 V
0.1 mA
Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Typ. 4 s / max. 120 s

Typ. 100 s / max. 120 s
Max. 500 Hz
Overload Protection
Yes
Automatically after approx. 1 s
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Max. 90 A
Protective Circuit
Internal
External
Yes
Residual Voltage of Transistors
Max. 0.3 V (at 2 A)

Inductive Loads
Typ. 56 V
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.5 W
Max. 1 W
Max. 2.5 W
Dimensions

1) Simultaneousness factor = 75%, maximum 12 of the 16 outputs can be fully loaded at the same time.
257

8.3.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
1 - 16
The status LEDs indicate the logical status of the

OL x-y
The LEDs OL x-y (overload) indicate that the overload or

short circuit cutoff has been activated for the respective
LED group. If e.g. the OL 1-4 LED is lit, it means that a
transistor pair (output 1/2 or 3/4) has been switched off
(for more information see Section 8.3.7 "Overload
Protection", on page 261).
258

Connection
Assignment
+24 V supply for inputs 1 - 8
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
10
--- 1)
11
--- 1)
12
Output 9
13
Output 10
14
Output 11
15
Output 12
16
Output 13
17
Output 14
18
Output 15
19
Output 16
20
+24 V supply for inputs 9 -16
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Group 1
Group 2
TB170

1) For technical reasons it is recommended to connect these pins to ground to enable the DO480 to be replaced by the DO479 at a future
point in time. This step also avoids any rewiring.
When connecting the terminal block, it is important to ensure that any potential difference does
not exceed 50 V. This is valid for:
Potential Difference <50 V
Group Group
+24 V connection PLC ground
+24 V connection ground
Table 143: DO480 the potential difference must be smaller than 50 V
Both electrically isolated groups can also be supplied by 2 separate 24 V sources.
259

Connection Example
Table 144: DO480 connection example
260

The sum of all currents from output pairs (1/2, 3/4, 5/6, etc.) is greater than 4.4 A (at 60 C
environmental temperature). The cutoff delay is typically 5 ms. The more the 4.4 A limit
is exceeded, the faster the cutoff.
When switching loads with high starting current (e.g. lamps) this switch-off functionality
must be taken into consideration.
If the total current (output pair) reaches approximately 15 A the cutoff takes place without
delay.

The transistors are suited for fast and secure switching of inductive loads using Zener diodes.
The transistors are switched on at a voltage of >56 V ( braking voltage) and provide protection
from large voltage spikes. For this reason, inverse diodes are not necessary on inductive loads.
Braking Voltage:
is a negative voltage on the switching element (e.g. valve). If the switching

element is unable to operate with a negative voltage, an external inverse
diode must be installed to limit the voltage to approx. -0.6 V.
Figure 103: DO480 schematic representation for braking voltage
261
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
When an output pair is turned off because of an overload (overload LED lit), an attempt to restart
is made after approximately 1 s. If the overload still exists, this causes a continual switching on
and off until the respective output is turned off by the application program or the overload no
longer exists.

The protective switch reduces the maximum switching frequency as inductivity increases. A coil
with an inductivity of 1 H can be easily switched with 5 Hz at 48 V / 0.5 A and 60 C
environmental temperature.
The maximum switching frequency in relation to a given inductance can be seen from the
following diagram.
Figure 104: DO480 switching frequency in relation to a given inductance

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 16
262
8.4 DO486
The DO486 is a standard digital output module. For output monitoring, the status of each
individual channel can be read.
The DO486 offers very high component density using standard 3.5 mm terminal blocks.
8.4.2 Order Data
Short Description
Image
3DO486.6

0.5 A, 2 electrically isolated output groups. Order
2 x TB718 terminal block separately.
7TB718.9
7TB718.91
7TB718:90-02

1.5 mm
7TB718:91-02

1.5 mm
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery.
263

Product ID
DO486
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$42
Module Type
B&R 2005 I/O module
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Number of Outputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
32
16
Design
Output - PLC
Group - Group
Output - Output
Yes
Yes
No
Diagnosis Status
Voltage monitoring
Output Monitoring
Supply voltage <18 VDC

Output Status
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
Output
Group
Module
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
Rev. E0
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 16 A
Rev. <E0
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 6 A
Max. 12 A
To increase the output current, outputs can be switched in parallel.

Residual Voltage
<120 A
<200 mV @ 0.5 A
Short Circuit - Peak Current

Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
External 24 VDC
Protection
<13 A
Automatically within seconds depending on the module temperature
Max. 1.2 W
--Max. 1.2 W
Max. 4.4 W
Thermal cutoff for over-current and short circuit
Integrated protection for switching inductances
Reverse polarity protection
Status Display
32 yellow output LEDs

2 yellow DCOK LEDs
2 red ERROR LEDs
264

Product ID
DO486
Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Rev. E0
< 225 s
< 330 s
Rev. <E0
< 475 s
< 550 s
Switching Frequency
Resistive Load
Inductive Load
Max. 100 Hz
See Section 8.4.10 "Switching Inductive Loads", on page 270 (with 90% duty cycle)
Braking Voltage when Switching Off Inductive Loads
50 VDC
Dimensions
Image
LED
Description
ERR
The ERR LED is an accumulative indication for all high-side drivers in an output
group. This LED is lit if an output which is being controlled has a short circuit or
over-temperature or if the module voltage sinks below 18 VDC.
DCOK
The DCOK LED is controlled by the respective output supply and is lit if the
supply voltage is over +18 VDC.
1 - 32
Control status of the corresponding digital output.
Table 148: DO486 Status LEDs
265
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
8.4.4 Status LEDs

Figure 105: DO486 connection elements
266

Connection
Assignment
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9
10
Output 10
11
Output 11
12
Output 12
13
Output 13
14
Output 14
15
Output 15
16
Output 16
17
+24 VDC
18
GND
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 149: DO486 pin assignments for terminal block X1
267

Connection
Assignment
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19
Output 20
Output 21
Output 22
Output 23
Output 24
Output 25
10
Output 26
11
Output 27
12
Output 28
13
Output 29
14
Output 30
15
Output 31
16
Output 32
17
+24 VDC
18
GND
Table 150: DO486 pin assignments for terminal block X2
Figure 106: DO486 connection example
268
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
269

8.4.9 Output Monitoring
The output states are compared to the set values on the module. The output driver is used to
control desired states. Output monitoring is only active if the supply voltage for the group is in
the valid range.
The status of each individual channel can be read using a register. Additionally, an accumulative
bit for output monitoring is created. The status of the supply voltage can also be read.
Figure 108: DO486 switching inductive loads
270

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 32
Single output status (channel x)
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
65 ... 96
Status register
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register
Bit
Description
DCOK_2
- Supply voltage for output group 2 in the valid range
DCOK_1
- Supply voltage for output group 1 in the valid range
ERR_2
- Error occurred in output group 2
ERR_1
- Error occurred in output group 1
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Status Register
x x x x
7
ERR_1
0...... Outputs for group 1 working correctly

1...... A controlled output for group 1 has short circuited or has an over-temperature status, or the module voltage has dropped
below 18 VDC
ERR_2
0...... Outputs for group 2 working correctly

1...... A controlled output for group 2 has short circuited or has an over-temperature status, or the module voltage has dropped
below 18 VDC
DCOK_1
0...... No supply voltage or supply voltage too low for output group 1
1...... Supply voltage for output group 1 in the valid range
DCOK_2
0...... No supply voltage or supply voltage too low for output group 2
1...... Supply voltage for output group 2 in the valid range
271
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Output Modules DO650 / DO750
8.5 DO650 / DO750

The DO650 and DO750 are standard digital output modules.
8.5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DO650.6
2005 digital output module, 16 relay outputs

120 VAC / 24 VDC, 2 A, 4 electrically isolated output
groups. Order TB170 terminal block separately.
Image
3DO750.6
2005 digital output module, 8 relay outputs

230 VAC / 24 VDC, 3 A, 2 electrically isolated output
groups. Order TB170 terminal block separately.
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Table 152: DO650 / DO750 order data

DO650
DO750
C-UL-US Listed
Product ID
Yes
Yes
B&R ID Code
$03
$04
Number of Outputs
Total
in 4/2 Groups of
16
4
8
4
Design
Relay / N.O.
Output - PLC
Group - Group
Output - Output
Yes / max. 144 VAC

Yes / max. 250 VAC
No
Yes / max. 250 VAC

Yes / max. 430 VAC
No
Switching Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
120 VAC / 24 VDC

144 VAC / 30 VDC
230 VAC / 24 VDC

250 VAC / 30 VDC
Table 153: DO650 / DO750 technical data
272

Product ID
Output
Group
Module
Starting Current
DO650
DO750
Max. 2 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 32 A
Max. 3 A
Max. 8 A
Max. 16 A
Max. 12 A / Channel
Max. 12 A / Channel
Switching Capacity
Minimum
Maximum
0.1 mA / 0.1 VDC

300 VA / 90 W
10 mA / 5 VDC
500 VA / 150 W
Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Typ. 5.6 ms / max. 10 ms

Typ. 2.5 ms / max. 5 ms
Typ. 4 ms / max. 6 ms
Typ. 6 ms / max. 8 ms
Short Circuit Protection (external)
Fuse 8 A time lag per group (on COM connection)
External Protective Circuit
Generally required
Voltage Limitations on the Relay Contacts

(internal)
400 VSS
100 m
Switching Frequency (nominal load)
Max. 10 Hz
Operating Cycles
Mechanical
Electrical (nominal load)
Per Hour (nominal load)
>2 x 107
>1 x 105
Max. 600
Dielectric Strength
Contact
Contact - Coil
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Contact Resistance at Maximum Load
280 VAC (due to voltage limitations)

2000 VAC / 1 min
Max. 0.7 W
Max. 3.3 W
Max. 4 W
Dimensions
Max. 0.7 W
Max. 2.3 W
Max. 3 W
Table 153: DO650 / DO750 technical data (cont.)
273

8.5.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
1 - 16 / 1 - 8
Status LEDs indicate the logic status of the

corresponding output, also when the terminal block is not
connected and there is no voltage to the terminal block.
The LED is lit when the relay contact is closed.
Table 154: DO650 / DO750 status LEDs
274

Connection
DO650
Group
DO750
COM for Output 1 -4
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
---
Output 4
Output 2
Output 5
---
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 4
10
COM for Output 5 - 8
---
11
COM for Output 9 -12
---
12
Output 9
13
Output 10
14
Output 11
15
Output 12
---
16
Output 13
Output 7
17
Output 14
---
18
Output 15
19
Output 16
---
20
COM for Output 13 -16
Group
COM for Output 1 -4

--1
Output 1
1
Output 3
2
---
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Output 5
3
--Output 6
2
TB170
Output 8
Table 155: DO650 / DO750 pin assignments
For the connection of the terminal block, it is important to ensure that any potential difference
does not exceed 50 V. This is valid for:
Potential Difference Between
DO650
DO750
Group Group
250 VAC
430 VAC
COM x PLC Ground
144 VAC
250 VAC
COM x Ground
144 VAC
250 VAC
Table 156: DO650 / DO750 maximum potential difference not exceeded
275

Figure 109: DO650 / DO750 output circuit diagram

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 8/16
Table 157: DO650 / DO750 variable declaration
276
8.6 DO690
The DO690 is a standard digital output module. Outputs are triac outputs.
8.6.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 digital output module, 8 triac outputs 120 VAC, 1 A,
2 electrically isolated output groups. Order TB170 terminal
block separately.
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3DO690.6
277

Product ID
DO690
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$61
Number of Outputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
8
4
Design
Triac
Output - PLC
Group - Group
Output - Output
Yes (optotriac)
Yes (optotriac)
No
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
30 VAC
120 VAC
144 VAC
Switching Voltage Frequency

Output
Group
Module
45 to 63 Hz
Max. 1 A
Max. 2 A (simultaneousness factor = 50%) 1)
Max. 4 A
Leakage Current
4 mA (resistive load)
Minimum Holding Current

At 0 C
At 60 C
Switching Delay
Switching Voltage Frequency
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Overload Protection
Internal
External
Protective Circuit
Internal
External
Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
External
Dimensions
3 mA
3 mA
At 50 Hz
10 ms
10 ms
At 60 Hz
8.5 ms
8.5 ms
Max. 100 Hz
Yes
By user
Yes
Generally required (fuse)
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
Max. 6 W (simultaneousness factor = 50%) 1)

1) Simultaneous factor = 50%: A maximum 4 of 8 outputs are allowed to be fully loaded at the same time.
278

8.6.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
1-8

outputs.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
279

Connection
1
Assignment
COM for Output 1 -4
---
Output 1
---
Output 2
---
Output 3
Group 1
---
Output 4
10
---
11
---
12
Output 5
13
---
14
Output 6
15
---
16
Output 7
17
---
18
Output 8
Group 2
TB170
19
---
20
280

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 8
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
281
8.7 DO760
The DO760 is a standard digital output module. The outputs are single channel isolated.
8.7.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DO760.6
2005 Digital Output Module, 8 relay outputs

240 VAC / 30 VDC, 4 A, outputs electrically isolated. Order
TB170 terminal block separately.
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
282

Product ID
DO760
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$B0
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Module Type
B&R 2005 I/O module
4 change over contacts

4 normally open contacts
The outputs are single channel isolated.
Maximum Switching Voltage
125 VDC / 264 VAC

Externally limited to a maximum of 460 V
Rated Voltage
30 VDC / 240 VAC
min. 5 VDC @ 1 mA
Rated Frequency
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
DC or 45 - 63 Hz
4 A (resistive load)
Rated Current (1-Signal)Ie

Current Range at 1-Signal (continuous at
maximum voltage)
DC
AC
1 mA - 4 A (resistive load)
100 mA -8 A (resistive load)
Switching Capacity
2000 VA; 120 W @ 30 VDC (resistive load)
Contact Resistance (DC)
Max. 100 m @ 6 VDC / 100 mA
Power Loss on Contact (AC)
Typical 1 W (max. 5 W)
Fuse
External Fuse
Wiring
4 change-over contacts / 4 normally open contacts
Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
External
Max. 4 W
--Max. 4 W
Max. 4 W
Status Display
1 yellow LED per channel
Protection Characteristics
Type of Protection
AC
DC
Overvoltage Protection for Contacts
DC Connection
Fuse 8 A time lag (required externally)

Fuse 4 A time lag (required externally)
Limited to 460 V (required externally)
Spark protection as required (to be connected externally)
283

Product ID
DO760
Output Delay for Signal Changes from
log 0 - log 1
log 1 - log 0
Max. 13 ms (including chatter time)

Max. 16 ms (including chatter time)
Consequences when Outputs Incorrectly
Connected
Output Behavior when the Controller Falls

Out During Voltage Dips, Interruptions
and when the Unit is Switched On-or Off
The outputs are reset in the event of malfunction

(normally closed)
Relay Contact Lifespan

Total Output Current
Following Condition must be Fulfilled
Wire Cross Section
Isolation Voltage under Normal Operating
Conditions between Channel and
Bus
Other Channels
Supply Interfaces
Isolation Strength between Open Relay
Contacts
Different Phases Possible
Point at which the LED for Each Channel
is Switched On
Method of Operation
See Section 8.7.8 "Switching Cycles", on page 289

Max. 32 A
In 200
See alsoSection 8.7.7 "Total Output Current Allowed", on page 288
2.5 mm, for currents4 A or if a recommended value is reached
1 Minute 2800 VAC or 4 kV @ 1.2 x 50 s pulse

1 Minute 1000 VAC or 1.4 kV @ 1.2 x 50 s pulse
--1 Minute 1000 VAC or 1.4 kV @ 1.2 x 50 s pulse
Yes, but only for 110 VAC
When a relay coil signal is received
Latches are written using the bus, which are switched via the relay's transistor driver
Standard N.O. and changeover circuit,
Sink and source connection possible
Dimensions
Pin Assignments

See Section 8.7.5 "Pin Assignments", on page 286
284

8.7.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
1-8
Status LEDs indicate the logic status of the corresponding output,

also when the terminal block is not connected and there is no voltage
to the terminal block. The LED is lit if the relay contact is made (N.O.
contact closes, N.C. contact opens).
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
285

Connection
Assignment
Output 1
COM
Output 1
N.O.
Output 1
N.C.
Output 2
COM
Output 2
N.O.
Output 3
COM
Output 3
N.O.
Output 4
N.C.
Output 4
N.O.
10
Output 4
COM
11
Output 5
COM
12
Output 5
N.O.
13
Output 5
N.C.
14
Output 6
COM
15
Output 6
N.O.
16
Output 7
COM
17
Output 7
N.O.
Group 1
Group 2
TB170
18
Output 8
N.C.
19
Output 8
N.O.
20
Output 8
COM
For the connection of the terminal block, it is important to ensure that any potential difference
does not exceed 50 V. This is valid for:
Potential Difference Between
Voltage
COM x PLC Ground
250 VAC
COM Ground
250 VAC
Table 167: DO760 maximum potential difference not exceeded
286
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
287

8.7.7 Total Output Current Allowed
The DO760 digital output module is set up for a total output current of 32 A. The following
conditions must be fulfilled to protect against the module overheating:
In 32 A
and
In 200
n ... Channel number 1 to 8
Wire Cross Section

For currents of 4 A or when one of the above recommended values has been reached, wires
with a cross section of 2.5 mm are required.
Calculation Example
Example 1
Each of the eight channels is loaded with 4 A.
1) Recommended Value 1: Total current 32 A
Itotal = 8 x 4 A = 32 A -> condition fulfilled
2) Recommended Value 2: In 200
In = 8 x 4 = 128 -> condition fulfilled
Both conditions have been fulfilled. The load is therefore permitted. Wires with a cross section
of 2.5 mm are required.
Example 2
Three channels are supplied with a maximum current of 8 A.
1) Recommended Value 1: Total current 32 A
Itotal = 3 x 8 A = 24 A -> condition fulfilled
2) Recommended Value 2: In 200
In = 3 x 8 = 192
Both conditions have been fulfilled. The load is therefore permitted. Wires with a cross section
of 2.5 mm are required.
288

8.7.8 Switching Cycles
Mechanical Load
The relay contacts are set up for 5 x 106 switching cycles.
Electrical Load
The following table contains an overview of switching cycles that can be carried out by the
DO760 with various electromagnetic loads.
Maximum 30 switching cycles per minute
Entries for N.O. and N.C., but not for change over contact. That means only N.O. or N.C.
contacts are connected, but not both.
Load
Operating Cycles
Nominal load 8 A, 230 VAC, resistive
1 x 105
Motor load 230 VAC (starting current 12 A, cos 0.5, nominal current 1.8 A)
4 x 105
Valve load 0.1 A, 230 VAC
1 x 106
Hydraulic valve 2 A, 24 VDC (with external spark protection)
1 x 106
8 A, 30 VDC, resistive
>1000
1 A, 24 VDC
2 x 105
Table 168: DO760 electrical load

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 8
289
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Valid for each specification:
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Mixed Modules General Information
9. Digital Mixed Modules

Digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules. The states of the
digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs.
9.1.1 Overview
Module
DM476
DM486
Digital Inputs
Number of Inputs
Nominal Input Voltage
Input Delay
16
16
24 VDC
24 VDC
1 ms
1 ms
Digital Outputs
Number of Outputs
Nominal Switching Voltage
Continuous Current
16
16
24 VDC
24 VDC
0.4 A
0.5 A
DSUB connector
Terminal Block
Connection
Connection via
Table 170: Digital Mixed Module Overview
9.1.2 Programming
The digital inputs and outputs are accessed directly in the application program using a variable
name. The relationship between an input or output channel for a certain module and the variable
name is defined in the variable declaration. The declaration is made identically for each
programming language using a table editor.
290
B&R 2005 Modules Digital Mixed Modules DM476
9.2 DM476
The DM476 is a standard digital mixed module.
9.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3DM476.6
2005 digital mixed module, 16 inputs, 24 VDC / 24 VAC,

1 ms, DC: Sink/Source, 4 electrically isolated input groups,
Image
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Connection made using DSUB connector.

Product ID
DM476
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$62
Inputs
25-pin DSUB socket (upper)
Number of Inputs
Total
in 4 Groups of
16
4
Input Connections
Sink or source
291

Product ID
DM476
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Yes (optocoupler)
Yes (optocoupler)
No
Input Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
24 VDC / 24 VAC
30 VDC / 30 VAC
Input Resistance
4.8 k
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Input Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Max. 1 ms
Max. 1 ms

Outputs
Number of Outputs
Design
Approx. 5 mA
25-pin DSUB plug (lower)
16
Transistor
Output - PLC
Output - Output
Yes
No
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC

Output
Module
Max. 0.4 A
Max. 4.8 A1)
0.3 mA
Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Max. 100 s
Max. 100 s
Max. 500 Hz
Overload Protection
Protective Circuit
Internal
External
Inductive Loads
Yes
Automatically within seconds (depends on the module temperature)
0.75 to 1.5 A
Yes
45 to 55 V
292

Product ID
DM476
Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
Terminal Side at 24 V
Max. 2.5 W
--Max. 2.5 W
Max. 2 W
Dimensions

1) Simultaneousness factor = 75%: A maximum 12 of 16 outputs are allowed to be fully loaded at the same time.
Image
LED
Description
1 - 16, green
The 16 green status LEDs indicate the logical status of the

corresponding inputs. Regardless of the type connection (sink or
source connection) the LED is lit if the input is logical 1, i.e. when the
1 - 16, yellow
The 16 yellow status LEDs indicate the logical status of the

A, B
LEDs A and B indicate the operating status.

B
OFF
OFF
Description
Outputs work normally.
OFF
ON
A short circuit or over temperature has

occurred with at least one of the outputs (see
also Section 9.2.10 "Overload Protection", on
page 298).
ON
OFF
An output is switched on, even though no

load is connected.
ON
ON
The supply voltage for the output driver has

sunk to <12 V.
293
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
9.2.4 Status LEDs

The DM476 module is supplied with 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs. However, the
terminal block for B&R 2005 controllers is only 20-pin. The connection elements are made up of
a 25-pin DSUB sockets and a 25-pin DSUB plug.
Due to space restrictions, it is necessary to use press connectors and rolled ribbon cable for the
connection.
Figure 112: DM476 connection elements
294

Pin
1
Assignment
Group
---
Input 15
Input 13
---
Input 11
Input 9
---
Input 7
Input 5
10
---
11
Input 3
12
Input 1
13
---
14
Input 16
15
Input 14
16
COM (13-16)
17
Input 12
18
Input 10
19
COM (9-12)
20
Input 8
21
Input 6
22
COM (5-8)
23
Input 4
24
Input 2
25
COM (1-4)
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Upper 25-pin DSUB socket
Table 174: DM476 pin connections for the upper 25-pin DSUB socket
295

Lower 25-pin DSUB plug
Pin
Assignment
+24 V
Output 1
Output 3
+24 V
Output 5
Output 7
+24 V
Output 9
Output 11
10
+24 V
11
Output 13
12
Output 15
13
+24 V
14
Output 2
15
Output 4
16
GND
17
Output 6
18
Output 8
19
GND
20
Output 10
21
Output 12
22
---
23
Output 14
24
Output 16
25
---
Table 175: DM476 pin assignments for the lower 25-pin DSUB plug
296
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
9.2.7 Connection Example for Digital Outputs
Figure 113: DM476 connection example for digital outputs

The inputs can be connected with a 24 VDC or a nominal 24 VAC. For DC input voltages, sink
or source circuits are allowed within a group of four. The logical status of each input is indicated
by a green LED.
297

The output driver requires an external supply, which is divided into five socket contacts because
of the high current requirement (approximately 410 mA/channel).
The logical status of each output is indicated by a yellow LED. The operational status is indicated
with LEDs A and B (see also Section 9.2.4 "Status LEDs", on page 293).

Junction temperature for transistors exceeds the limit value (typ. 150 C, min. 135 C,
max. 175 C). Causes: Short circuit, overload or environmental temperature is too high
The 24 V supply voltage (terminal side) is smaller than typ. 12 V (min. 10 V,

max. 14.5 V).
The affected output remains switched off until ...

... the junction temperature is again within the limit value (hysteresis typ. 20 C). The time until
it is switched on again is within seconds.
... the voltage supply is again within the valid range (typ. >14.5 V).
298

Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 16
Read digital inputs I01 - I08

Bit 0 ... I01
Bit 7 ... I08
tc_global
USINT
Transp. In
Read digital inputs I09 - I16

Bit 0 ... I09
Bit 7 ... I16
tc_global
USINT
Transp. In
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 16
Digital Outputs O01 - O08

Bit 0 ... O01
Bit 7 ... O08
tc_global
USINT
Transp. Out
Digital Outputs O09 - O16

Bit 0 ... O09
Bit 7 ... A16
tc_global
USINT
Transp. Out
Read Status Register
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Table 176: DM476 variable declaration
299
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Function

Status Register
Status Register
Bit
Description
Status
Diag1
- Diagnostics bit 1
Diag2
- Diagnostics bit 2
- 24 V on the output
x x x x x
7
Output
Status
Diag1
Diag2
Information
Outputs work normally.
An output is switched on even though no load is connected.
A short circuit or over temperature has occurred with at least one of the outputs.
The supply voltage for the output driver has sunk to <12 V.
Table 177: DM476 status register states
300
9.3 DM486
The DM486 is a standard digital mixed module. The properties are the same as the DI486 and
DO486.
The DM486 supplements the DI486/DO486 and likewise offers very high component
density using standard 3.5 mm terminal blocks.
9.3.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 digital mixed module, 16 inputs 24 VDC, 1 ms,
sink/source, 16 transistor outputs 24 VDC, 0.5 A,
electrically isolated input and output groups. Order
2 x TB718 terminal blocks separately!
Image
7TB718.9
7TB718.91
7TB718:90-02

1.5 mm
7TB718:91-02

1.5 mm
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3DM486.6
301

Product ID
DM486
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$63
Module Type
B&R 2005 I/O module
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Power Consumption
Internal
5V
24 V
Total
External 24 VDC (DO)
Yes
Yes
Max. 1.2 W
--Max. 1.2 W
Max. 2.2 W
Static Characteristics for Inputs

Number of Inputs
Design
16
IEC1131 - Type 1
Input - PLC
Input Groups Output Groups
Input - Input
Wiring
Diagnosis Status
Voltage monitoring
Input Monitoring
Rated Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
Yes
Yes
No
Sink or source
Input State
+24 VDC
+30 VDC
Approx. 4 mA
Input Resistance
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
6 k
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Isolation Voltage between Input and Bus
50 V
Additional Characteristics for Inputs

Status Display
16 green Input LEDs

1 yellow DCOK LED
Dynamic Characteristics for Inputs

Input Delay
Typical
Maximum
0.5 ms
1 ms
302

Product ID
DM486
Static Characteristics for Outputs

Number of Outputs
16
Design
Output - PLC
Output Groups Input Groups
Output - Output
Yes
Yes
No
Diagnosis Status
Voltage monitoring
Output Monitoring

Output Status
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
Rev. E0
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 8 A
Rev. <E0
Max. 0.5 A
Max. 6 A
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

Output
Module
To increase the output current, outputs can be switched in parallel.

<120 A
Residual Voltage
<200 mV @ 0.5 A
Short Circuit - Peak Current
<13 A
Automatically within seconds depending on the module temperature
Protection
Thermal cutoff for over-current and short circuit

Integrated protection for switching inductances
Reverse Polarity Protection
Additional Characteristics for Outputs

Status Display
16 yellow output LEDs

1 yellow DCOK LED
1 red ERROR LED
Dynamic Characteristics for Outputs

Switching Delay
Log. 0 - Log. 1
Log. 1 - Log. 0
Rev. E0
< 225 s
< 330 s
Rev. <E0
< 475 s
< 550 s
Switching Frequency
Resistive Load
Inductive Load
Max. 100 Hz
See Section 9.3.11 "Switching Inductive Loads", on page 310 (with 90% duty cycle)
50 VDC
Dimensions
303

9.3.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
ERR
The ERR LED is an accumulative indication for all high-side drivers. The LED
is lit if an output which is being controlled has a short circuit or over-temperature
or if the module voltage sinks below 18 VDC.
DCOK
The DCOK LED is controlled by the respective supply and is lit if the supply
voltage is over +18 VDC.
1 - 16, yellow
Control status of the corresponding digital output.
1 - 16, green

Figure 116: DM486 connection elements
304

Connection
Assignment
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9
10
Output 10
11
Output 11
12
Output 12
13
Output 13
14
Output 14
15
Output 15
16
Output 16
17
+24 VDC
18
GND
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 181: DM486 pin assignments for terminal block X1
305

Connection
Assignment
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
10
Input 10
11
Input 11
12
Input 12
13
Input 13
14
Input 14
15
Input 15
16
Input 16
17
18
Table 182: DM486 pin assignments for terminal block X2
306

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Digital Outputs
Figure 117: DM486 digital output connection example
307

Digital Inputs
Sink Connection
Figure 118: DM486 digital input connection examples (sink)
Source Connection
Figure 119: DM486 digital inputs connection examples (source)
308
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
309

9.3.10 Output Monitoring
The output states are compared to the set values on the module. The output driver is used to
control desired states. Output monitoring is only active if the supply voltage for the group is in
the valid range.
The status of each individual channel can be read using a register. Additionally, an accumulative
bit for output monitoring is created. The status of the supply voltage can also be read.
Figure 122: DM486 switching inductive loads
310

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
1 ... 16
Single digital input (Channel x)
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
1 ... 16
Single output status (channel x)
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. In
65 ... 80
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status register
Table 183: DM486 variable declaration
Status Register
x
7
Bit
Description
DCOK_DI
DCOK_DO - Supply voltage for outputs in the valid range
ERR_2
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Status Register
- Supply voltage for inputs in the valid range
- Error occurred in output group
x x x x
0
ERR
0...... Outputs working correctly

1...... A controlled output has short circuited or has an over-temperature status or the module voltage has dropped below 18 VDC
DCOK_DO
0...... No supply voltage or supply voltage too low for outputs

1...... Supply voltage for outputs in the valid range
DCOK_DI
0...... No supply voltage or supply voltage too low for inputs

1...... Supply voltage for inputs in the valid range
311
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Input Modules General information
10. Analog Input Modules

10.1 General information
Measured values (voltages, currents) are converted into numerical values which can be
processed by the PLC using analog input modules.
In the PLC, analog data is always in 16-bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution.
Therefore, the resolution of the module used does not have to be taken into consideration when
creating an application program.
All analog input modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the A/D
converter is active.
10.1.1 Overview
Module
AI350
AI375
AI775
Input Signal
10 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
12-bit
12-bit
12-bit
16-bit
Number of Channels
AI780
Table 184: Analog Input Module Overview
10.1.2 Programming
The analog data points are accessed directly in the application program using a variable name.
The relationship between the channel for a certain module and the variable name is defined in
312
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Input Modules AI350 / AI375
10.2 AI350 / AI375

10.2.1 General information
The AI350 and AI375 are standard analog input modules.
10.2.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, +/- 10 V, 12-bit. Order
Image
3AI375.6
2005 Analog Input Module, 8 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12-bit.

3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3AI350.6
Table 185: AI350 / AI375 order data

Product ID
AI350
AI375
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Yes
B&R ID Code
$82
$80
Number of Inputs
8 differential inputs
Input - PLC
Input - Input
Yes
No
Input signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
-10 to +10 V
-20 to +20 V
0 to +10 V
-20 to +20 V
Table 186: AI350 / AI375 technical data
313

Product ID
AI350
Operating Modes
Normal Operation
Special Operating Mode 1
AI375
Cyclic measurement with optional averaging

Direct software timing
Software timing using a default time of 2000 - 65535 s
12-bit
12-bit
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Output Format
INT $8000 - $7FF0

1 LSB = $0010 = 4.883 mV
INT $0000 - $7FF8

1 LSB = $0008 = 2.441 mV
Conversion Time for all Channels

Normal and Special Operation
Normal Operation with Active Averaging
< 1 ms
< 1.5 ms
Differential Input Resistance
2 M
Input Filter
Low pass 1st order / cut-off frequency: 450 Hz

0.1% 1)
Basic Accuracy at 25 C
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0037% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.0075% / C 2)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
Cross-Talk between Channels
-66 dB
Common-Mode Rejection
DC
50 Hz
50 dB
45 dB
Maximum Modulation Compared to Ground

Potential
Common Mode Modulation Capability between
Two Channels
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
50 V
5 V
10 V
Max. 1 W
Max. 3.5 W
Max. 4.5 W
Dimensions
Table 186: AI350 / AI375 technical data (cont.)

1) Refers to the measurement range.
2) Refers to the current measurement value.
314

10.2.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
RUN
The RUN LED indicates that the analog/digital converter is running.
MODE
The MODE LED flashes briefly if a start pulse is detected in one of

the two special operating modes.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 187: AI350 / AI375 status LEDs
315

Connection
TB170
Assignment
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ Input 2
- Input 2
+ Input 3
- Input 3
+ Input 4
- Input 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Input 5
14
- Input 5
15
+ Input 6
16
- Input 6
17
+ Input 7
18
- Input 7
19
+ Input 8
20
- Input 8
Table 188: AI350 / AI375 pin assignments

Shielded cables must be used with analog input modules. The ground connection for the shield
is made on one of the terminal block shield connections provided for the two inputs.
For EMC reasons, it is recommended to short circuit the inputs which are not used.
Figure 123: AI350 / AI375 signal cable connection
316

The four shielded connections are of the same value and each connected via 100 resistors
with ground ( , that means: a spring contact and a mounting rail).
Figure 124: AI350 / AI375 shielded connection
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 125: AI350 / AI375 input circuit diagram

Three operating modes are available:
Normal operation (default setting)
Special Operating Mode 1: Direct software timing
Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time
Change of Operating Mode
Normal operation is set during power-on or after a reset.
Changing from normal operation to one of the special operating modes is possible at any
time. To do this, the mode register 2 must be set to the respective value. When a change
in operating mode is carried out, it is acknowledged in status register 2, the register which
displays the current operating mode.
However changing from one of the special operating modes to another operating mode
is not possible.
317

Normal Operation
Normal operation is set after power-on.
All channels are converted cyclically and data is deposited in the dual ported RAM in the agreed
INT format. The conversion time for all channels is <1 ms.
Averaging can only be switched on in cyclic operation, using mode register 1. The conversion
time increases slightly to <1.5 ms due to the higher computing time needed.
Mode register 2 must be set to the following value :
%00010000
With this type of operation, the measurement cycle is started on the module by the application
program, which sets bit 7 from mode register 8 to 0 (start pulse). Conversion of all eight channels
is carried out without responding to further start pulses. The end of the cycles is registered by
setting bit 7 in the status register 2.
Application example:
Data acquisition (without jitter) in high-speed task classes (e.g. for a

controller).
Mode Register 8
Analog Input Module
Write access with bit 7 = 0 (start pulse)
Module in delay loop
t_0
Bit 7 in the status register 2 = 0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Start measurement channel 1
t_c1 = t_0 + 128 to 130 s
t_c1 + 1 * 85 s
t_c1 +2 * 85 s
t_c1 +3 * 85 s
t_c1 +4 * 85 s
t_c1 +5 * 85 s
t_c1 +6 * 85 s
The next start pulse is possible
Time
t_c1 +7 * 85 s
Write measurements in the DPR (start up)
1)
Write measurements in the DPR (end)
1)
Bit 7 in the status register 2 = 1(cycle end)
t_0 + 900 s
Table 189: AI350 / AI375 special operating mode 1: Direct software timing
1) Writing the measurement value in the Dual Ported RAM (DPR) can be interrupted by accessing the module using the bus. Therefore,
it is recommended that handling of affected I/O variables in the special operating modes should only be made by the "Direct_IO" FBKs.
318

%00110000
The procedure is similar to special operating mode 1. However, in special operating mode 2
there is the option to set the time when the next measurement should be ended. The default time
is entered in s as UINT in mode register 7 + 8. This write access works in the same way as a
start pulse (independent of bit 7 in the mode register 8). Further write accesses are ineffective
until the end of the cycles. The conversion of all eight channels is not started immediately but
rather 1000 s before the end of the default time. The end of the cycles is registered by setting
bit 7 in the status register 2. Unlike special operating mode 1, the time scale is left unchanged.
Value range for default times:
equidistant data acquisition for controllers in normal task classes with the
option of calculating the measurement time in the main CPU (e.g. using
the timer function "TIM_musec" or "TIM_ticks" -> user program).
Example: Task 1 has a cycle time of 10 ms in task class 1 . At the end of the cycles, current
analog values must be available for the next cycle.
The "TIM_musec" function measures the current time period. If the measurement
results in 2 ms, then the analog conversion must be completed in 8 ms. Defining the
default time carried out with the "IO_data" function. The value 8000 is written in mode
registers 7 + 8.
If the time measured in the next cycle results in e.g. 2.2 ms, then the value 7800 must
be written in mode registers 7 + 8 .
Mode Registers 7 + 8
Analog Input Module
Default time written in s as UINT
Time
t_0
Bit 7 in status register 2 = 0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Delay Loop
Depends on t_pre
Starting internal cycles
t_St = t_pre - 1000 s
t_c1 = t_St + 128 to 130 s
t_c1 + 1 * 85 s
t_c1 +2 * 85 s
t_c1 +3 * 85 s
t_c1 +4 * 85 s
t_c1 +5 * 85 s
t_c1 +6 * 85 s
t_c1 +7 * 85 s
1)
1)
Bit 7 in status register 2 = 1(cycle end)
t_pre - 100 s
Table 190: AI350 / AI375 special operating mode 2: Software timing using default time
319
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
2000 to 65535 s

Analog Input Module
Time
Time entry sequence
t_pre
Table 190: AI350 / AI375 special operating mode 2: Software timing using default time (cont.)
10.2.8 Relationship between Input Voltage and Converter Value

AI350
The converter value (INT format) changes in increments of 16 (0, 16, 32, etc.).
Converter Value
Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
-10 V
8000
-32768
-4.883 mV
FFF0
-16
0V
0000
4.883 mV
0010
16
10 V
7FF0
32752
Table 191: AI350 Relationship between input voltage and converter value
AI375
Converter Value
Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
0 V
0000
2.441 mV
0008
10 V
7FF8
32760
Table 192: AI375 Relationship between input voltage and converter value

Function
Single Analog Input (Channel x)
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan
.
tc_global
INT
Analog In
1 ... 8
Table 193: AI350 / AI375 variable declaration
320

Mode Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Special Operating Mode 2 "Software Timing using Default Values"
tc_global
UINT
Status Out
Mode Register 8
Start pulse in the special operating mode 1 "Direct Software Timing"
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Status Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Table 193: AI350 / AI375 variable declaration
Mode Register 1
Bits 0 and 2 - 7 must be assigned with 0.
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0
Description
AV
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 1
- Averaging switched on
321

Averaging
Averaging can be activated during normal operation. It should be noted that the conversion time
increases to <1.5 ms.
AV= 0 ....... Averaging switched off (default setting)
AV = 1 ...... Averaging switched on
When this option is switched on, the average value is generated and transferred to the central
unit. The calculation is formulated as follows:
Old Average Value + New Value
New Average Value =
The positive final value when averaging is switched on is $7FEF with the AI350 instead of $7FF0
and $7FF7 instead of $7FF8 with the AI375.
Mode Register 2
Bits 0 and -3 as well as 6 and 7 must be assigned with 0.
Mode Register 2
0 0
7
Bit
Description
SWT_TIM
- Software timing using default time
SWT_DIR
- Direct software timing
0 0 0 0
0
SWT_DIR
0 ......Normal operation (default setting)

1 ......Special operating mode 1 (Direct Software Timing)
SWT_TIM
SWT_TIM is only active if SWT_DIR is set to 1!

0 ......Operating mode dependent on SWT_DIR (default setting)
1 ......Special operating mode 2 (software timing using default times)
Changing from one of the special operating modes to another operating mode is not possible!
322

Mode Register 7 + 8 (UINT)
When using special operating mode 2 "Software Timing using Default Times", the time is defined
in s in both of these registers. The measurement of the eight channels must be completed when
this time has passed.
Value range:
2000 to 65535 s
Mode Register 8
Bits 0 - 6 must be assigned with 0.
Bit
Description
TRIGn
- Start pulse
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
TRIGn
TRIGn is only active in "Direct Software Timing" operating mode (SWT_DIR to 1, SWT_TIM to 0)
A write access using TRIGn = 0 triggers the immediate measurement of all eight channels.
A write access with TRIGn = 1 is ignored.
323

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
AV
I_ERR
- Module error
x x x x x x
7
I_ERR
0 ..... Data values in the dual ported RAM (DPR) correspond to definitions
1 ..... An internal error exists. That means that the data values in the Dual Ported RAM (DPR) do not
correspond to the definitions. Please contact B&R if this occurs.
MW
Averaging in normal operation is active (mode register 1 settings are repeated)
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
x
7
Bit
Description
SWT_RDY
- Software timed measurement is completed
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
x x x x
0
SWT_DIR
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR and SWT_TIM indicate the operating mode in which in the module can be found.
SWT_RDY
SWT_RDY is only active if a special operating mode is set.

0 ......Measurement or waiting loop is running
1 ......The last cycle is completed
324
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Input Modules AI775
10.3 AI775
The AI775 is a standard analog input module.
10.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AI775.6
2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12-bit.

Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 194: AI775 order data

Product ID
AI775
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$81
Number of Inputs
Input - PLC
Input - Input
Yes
No
Input signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
0 to 20 mA
-50 to +50 mA
Operating Modes
Normal Operation

Table 195: AI775 technical data
325

Product ID
AI775
12-bit
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7FF8

1 LSB = $0008 = 4.883 A

Normal Operation with Active
Averaging
< 1 ms
< 1.5 ms
50
Load
Voltage Drop at 20 mA
1V
Input Filter

0.1% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.01% / C 2)
0.05% 1)
Repeat Precision
-66 dB
DC
50 Hz
55 dB
50 dB
Maximum Modulation Compared to

Ground Potential
50 V
Common Mode Modulation Capability

between Two Channels
15 V
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1 W
Max. 3.5 W
Max. 4.5 W
Dimensions

2) Referring to the current measurement value.
326

10.3.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
RUN
The RUN LED indicates that the analog/digital converter is running.
MODE

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 196: AI775 status LEDs
327

Connection
TB170
Assignment
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ Input 2
- Input 2
+ Input 3
- Input 3
+ Input 4
- Input 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Input 5
14
- Input 5
15
+ Input 6
16
- Input 6
17
+ Input 7
18
- Input 7
19
+ Input 8
20
- Input 8
Table 197: AI775 pin assignment

Shielded cables must be used with analog input modules. The ground connection for the shield
is made on one of the terminal block shield connections provided for the two inputs.
Figure 126: AI775 signal cable connection
328

Figure 127: AI775 shielded connection
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 128: AI775 input circuit diagram

Normal operation is set during power-on or after a reset.
However, changing from one of the special operating modes to another operating mode
is not possible.
329

Normal Operation
time increases slightly to <1.5 ms, due to the higher computing time needed.
%00010000
With this type of operation, the measurement cycle is started on the module by the application
program, which sets bit 7 from mode register 8 to 0 (start pulse). Conversion of all eight channels
is carried out, without responding to further start pulses. The end of the cycles is registered by
setting bit 7 in the status register 2.

controller).
Mode Register 8
Analog Input Module
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
t_c1 = t_0 + 128 to 130 s
t_c1 + 1 * 85 s
t_c1 +2 * 85 s
t_c1 +3 * 85 s
t_c1 +4 * 85 s
t_c1 +5 * 85 s
t_c1 +6 * 85 s
Time
t_c1 +7 * 85 s
1)
1)
t_0 + 900 s
Table 198: AI775 Special Operating Mode 1: Direct software timing

330

%00110000
The procedure is similar to special operating mode 1. However in special operating mode 2 there
is the option to set the time when the next measurement should be ended. The default time is
entered in s as UINT in mode register 7 + 8. This write access works in the same way as a start
pulse (independent of bit 7 in the mode register 8). Further write accesses are ineffective until
the end of the cycles. The conversion of all eight channels is not started immediately but rather
1000 s before the end of the default time. The end of the cycles is registered by setting bit 7 in
the status register 2. Unlike special operating mode 1, the time scale is left unchanged.
Value range for the default times:
Example:
Task 1 has a cycle time of 10 ms in task class 1. At the end of the cycles, current
default time carried out with the "IO_data" function. The value 8000 is written in
mode registers 7 + 8.
If the time measured in the next cycle results in e.g. 2.2 ms, then the value 7800
must be written in mode registers 7 + 8 .
Analog Input Module
Time
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Delay Loop
Depends on t_pre
t_St = t_pre - 1000 s
t_c1 = t_St + 128 to 130 s
t_c1 + 1 * 85 s
t_c1 +2 * 85 s
t_c1 +3 * 85 s
t_c1 +4 * 85 s
t_c1 +5 * 85 s
t_c1 +6 * 85 s
t_c1 +7 * 85 s
1)
1)
t_pre - 100 s
Table 199: AI775 Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time
331
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
2000 to 65535 s

Analog Input Module
Time
Time entry sequence
t_pre
Table 199: AI775 Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time (cont.)
10.3.8 Relationship between Input Current and Converter Value

The converter value (INT format) changes in increments of 8 (0, 8, 16, ...).
Converter Value
Current
Hexadecimal
Decimal
0000
0 A
4.883 A
0008
20 mA
7FF8
32760
Table 200: AI775 Relationship between input current and converter value

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
INT
Analog In
1 ... 8
Mode Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
UINT
Status Out
Mode Register 8
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Status Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Table 201: AI775 variable declaration
332

Mode Register 1
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0
Description
AV
Averaging
New Average Value =

2
The positive limit for averaging is $7FF7 instead of $7FF8.
333
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 1

Mode Register 2
Mode Register 2
0 0
7
Bit
Description
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
0 0 0 0
0
SWT_DIR

SWT_TIM

in s in both of these registers. The measurement of the eight channels must be completed when
this time has passed.
Value range:
334
2000 to 65535 s

Mode Register 8
Mode Register 8
Bit
Description
TRIGn
- Start pulse
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TRIGn
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
A write access using TRIGn = 0 triggers the immediate measurement of all eight channels.
335

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
AV
I_ERR
- Module error
x x x x x x
7
I_ERR
0 ......Data values in the dual ported RAM (DPR) correspond to definitions.

1 ......An internal error exists. That means that the data values in the Dual Ported RAM (DPR) do not
correspond to the definitions. Please contact B&R if this occurs.
MW
Averaging in normal operation is active (mode register 1 settings are repeated).
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
x
7
Bit
Description
SWT_RDY
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
x x x x
0
SWT_DIR
SWT_TIM
SWT_RDY

336
10.4 AI780
The AI780 is an 8-channel analog input module. The channels are single channel isolated. An
individual analog/digital converter is used for each channel.
An electrically isolated encoder supply is created for each channel from a 24 VDC module
supply.
10.4.2 Order Data
Short Description
3AI780.6
2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 16-bit,

24 VDC encoder supply, single channel isolation and
encoder supply. Order 2 x TB718 terminal blocks
separately.
Figure
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
Table 202: AI780 order data

Product ID
AI780
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
In preparation
B&R ID Code
$84
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
337

Product ID
AI780
Module Type
Input Type
Number of Inputs
Module Supply
Encoder Supply General Information
Encoder Supply
Voltage
Current
Common Potential between
Channels
Protection of all Channels
against Incoming Voltage and Reverse
Polarity
Overload Display
Output of the Digital Value during
Overload
Limits Exceeded
Limits not Reached
Data Format Delivered to the Application
Program
Default setting
0 mA
20 mA
Conversion Method
Continuous Mode
50 Hz
60 Hz
Trigger Mode
50 Hz
60 Hz
B&R 2005 I/O module

Current Signal 0 - 25 mA
8
24 VDC 10% (21.6 - 26.4 VDC)
An electrically isolated encoder supply is created from the module supply for each channel.
Module supply -15% / +25%
Max. 30 mA
None (single channel isolation)
Up to 30 VDC
LED
Depends on module configuration
$7FFF
$8001
16-bit
INT
$0000
$7FFF
Sigma Delta
20 ms
16.67 ms
60 ms
50 ms
Max. 400
Zero Error at 25 C
0.005% 1)
0.05% 1)
Offset Drift
0.001%/C1)
Gain Drift
0.007%/C2)
Common Mode Range
300 VAC/VDC
Noise (Peak to Peak)
0.001% 1)
Cross-talk between Channels for DC

Voltage, 50 Hz, 60 Hz and up to
300 VAC/VDC
Linearization Method
<1 LSB
Electronic compensation on the module

Measurement value adjustment can be made by the user using application software
Table 203: AI780 technical data (cont.)
338

Product ID
AI780
Measurement Ranges
0 - 25 mA @ converter resolution 16-bit
Wiring
See 10.4.7 "Connection Examples", on page 342
Power Consumption
internal
5V
24 V
Total
Module Supply
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W
Max. 14 W
Total System Input Transfer Time
System dependent, cyclic in task class intervals
Analog filter
Cut-off Frequency
Attenuation
Step-response
Digital filter for first notch frequency of
50 Hz and 60 Hz
>120 dB
Maximum short term deviation during

every defined electrical disturbance
check
1%
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
80 Hz
20 dB/Decade
63% in 2 ms
Operating Voltage
Channel to Ground
Channel to Channel
Max. 300 Veff

Max. 600 Veff
Pulse Dielectric Strength at 2000 m above

Sea Level
Channel to Ground
Channel to Channel
Operating Modes
Operating Mode 1
Operating Mode 2
4000 V
4000 V
For a more detailed explanation see section 10.4.10 "Operating Modes", on page 345
continuous mode (Standard Mode)
Trigger mode

Accuracy Class
None
<0.003% 1)
Non-Linearity
Operational conditions
Environmental temperature during
operation
0 to +60 C (see also section 10.4.9 "Derating", on page 345)
Relative humidity during operation
5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Terminal Layout
See 10.4.6 "Pin Assignments", on page 341
Table 203: AI780 technical data (cont.)

1) Refers to the measurement range (0 - 25 mA)
2) Refers to the current measurement value
339

10.4.4 Status LEDs
Figure
LED
Description
RUN
Indicates that the analog/digital converter is running and is being accessed on

the module via the I/O bus.
CONT.
Continuous mode is set (standard mode).
TRIGG.
Trigger mode is set. The LED is lit when a measurement cycle is started by a
trigger pulse for all eight channels.
50Hz
The filter time is 20 ms.
60 Hz
The filter time is 16.67 ms.
Supply Overload 1 - 8
Status display for encoder supply. Each channel is assigned one LED.
Out of Range 1 - 8
DCOK
Status
Description
Constant light
An over-current or a short circuit has occurred in the

respective channel supply.
Blink signal
A converter error exists or the module supply is too low.
Status display for input range and converter function. Each channel is
assigned one LED.
Status
Description
Constant light
The input signal for the channel is outside the valid range.
Blink signal
When the Out of Range LED is blinking, then the converter

for this channel is out of service.
Double pulse
When the LED Out of Range blinks as a double pulse, then

the input signal for the channel is outside the valid range
and converter for this channel is out of service.
The DCOK LED is controlled by the respective module supply and is lit if the
supply voltage is over 18 VDC.
Table 204: AI780 status LEDs
Figure 129: AI780 connection elements
340

Pin
Assignment
+ Encoder supply 1
+ Current input 1
- Current input 1
Free
+ Encoder supply 2
+ Current input 2
- Current input 2
Free
+ Encoder supply 3
10
+ Current input 3
11
- Current input 3
12
Free
13
+ Encoder supply 4
14
+ Current input 4
15
- Current input 4
16
Free
17
+24 VDC
18
GND
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 205: AI780 pin assignments for terminal block X1
341

Pin
Assignment
+ Encoder supply 5
+ Current input 5
- Current input 5
Free
+ Encoder supply 6
+ Current input 6
- Current input 6
Free
+ Encoder supply 7
10
+ Current input 7
11
- Current input 7
12
Free
13
+ Encoder supply 8
14
+ Current input 8
15
- Current input 8
16
Free
17
+24 VDC
18
GND
Table 206: AI780 pin assignment for terminal block X2
10.4.7 Connection Examples

Encoder Connection with External Supply
Figure 130: AI780 encoder connection with external supply
342
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Encoder Connection with Internal Supply
Figure 131: AI780 encoder connection with internal supply
Two Wire Connection with Supply via AI780
Figure 132: AI780 two wire connection with supply via AI780
343

Figure 133: AI780 input circuit diagram
344

10.4.9 Derating

Two operating modes can be configured for the AI780. The configured operating mode is valid
for all eight channels.
Continuous Mode
The continuous mode is also known as the standard mode. In this mode, the AI780 is found after
power-on. The analog/digital converters run asynchronous to one another and convert the
respective channel as fast as possible.
Trigger Mode
The trigger mode is configured by setting bit 0 in the configuration register. The analog/digital
converter for a measurement cycle are activated using a trigger pulse. For the remainder of the
time, they are stopped.
10.4.11 Standardization
The input signal is converted to a raw value by the analog/digital converter. A measurement
value is calculated from this raw value, which is then made available to the user for his program.
The operating system for the AI780 offers the possibility of standardization. Therefore the
measurement value is calculated in a defined physical unit by the user.
345
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 134: AI780 derating

B&R Automation Studio Support: See B&R Automation Studio Help starting with V1.40
Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module Type
Chan.
Read single analog input (channel x)

Depending on the configuation, the measurement value or the
standardized measurement value is read.
tc_global
INT
Analog In
1 ... 8
Lower limit values were exceeded
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Upper limit values exceeded
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Read converter function register
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Read supply overload register
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Read module status
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Sends trigger pulse by setting bit 7
tc_global
USINT
Transparent Out
Configure module
tc_global
USINT
Transparent Out
Switches standardization on or off.

The following settings are accepted using the positive edge when
switching on the standardization:
All settings in the data module (see section "Data for the
Standardization", on page 353)
The variable "Standardization using Coordinates or Slope and
Offset"
The variable "Standardization absolute/relative"
tc_global
USINT
Transparent Out
Standardization using two coordinates (x0/y0) and (x1/y1) or using

slope k and offset d.
tc_global
USINT
Transparent Out
Standardization absolute/relative (see section "Absolute or relative

standardization", on page 354).
tc_global
USINT
Transparent Out
Table 207: AI780 variable declaration Data Area
346

Lower Limit Values were Exceeded (read)
Lower limit values are defined in the data module (default: $8001). The data module is described
in section "Data for the Standardization", on page 353.
Description
0 ... signal from channel 1 is in the valid range

1 ... Signal from channel 1 is below the limit value

0 ... Signal from channel 3 is in the valid range






Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Bit
Upper Limit Values Exceeded (read)

The upper limit value is defined in the data module (default: $7FFF). The data module is
described in section "Data for the Standardization", on page 353.
Bit
Description

1 ... Signal from channel 1 is above the limit value







347

Converter Function Register (read)
Bit
Description
0 ... Converter for channel 1 is running

1 ... Converter for channel 1 is out of service 1)




0 ... converter for channel 6 is running



1) The converter can be out of service either because of a disturbance or because the 24 VDC industrial voltage to terminal blocks X1
and X2 is missing (Pin 17 and 18).
Supply Overload Register (read)

Bit
Description
0 ... Encoder supply for channel 1 is in the valid range

1 ...An over-current or a short circuit has occurred in the encoder supply for channel 1.
0 ... encoder supply for channel 2 is in the valid range







348

Status Register (read)
Description
0 ... Continuous Mode

1 ... Trigger Mode
0 ... Filter 50 Hz (20 ms measurement cycle)

1 ... Filter 60 Hz (16.67 ms measurement cycle)
0 ... The errors are displayed in the status registers and also in the measurement value.
$7FFF ... Overflow
$8001 .... Underflow
$8000 .... Converter is out of service
1 ... The errors are only displayed in the corresponding status register (overflow, underflow, converter is out of service)
This bit has only one function, if bit 4 is set in the configuration register (errors are only displayed in the corresponding status register).
0 ... The measurement values are not limited
1 ... The measurement values are limited downwards with the lower limit value and upwards with the upper limit value.
0 ... The measurement values correspond to the definitions.

1 ... A system error exists. This means that the measurement values do not correspond to the definitions. Please contact B&R if this
occurs.
0 ... Measurement is running

1 ... Measurement completed. The bit is set differently depending on the operating mode:
Continuous Mode ... after the first measurement
Trigger Mode ................. after each measurement
Trigger Pulse (write)

Bit
0-6
7
Description
0
0 ... Measurement is not triggered
1 ... Measurement is triggered
349
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Bit

Configuration Register (write)
Bit
Description
0 ... Continuous Mode (default setting)

1 ... Trigger Mode
0 ... Filter 50 Hz (20 ms measurement cycle) (default setting)

1 ... Filter 60 Hz (16.67 ms measurement cycle)
0 ... The errors are additionally displayed in the status registers also in the measurement value (default setting).
$7FFF ... Overflow
$8001 .... Underflow
$8000 .... Converter is out of service
1 ... The errors are only displayed in the corresponding status register (overflow, underflow, converter is out of service)
This bit has only one function, if bit 4 is set in the configuration register (errors are only displayed in the corresponding status register).
0 ... The measurement values are not limited (default setting)
1 ... The measurement values are limited downwards with the lower limit value and upwards with the upper limit value.
6-7
Switches Standardization On / Off (write)

Bit
Description
0 ... Channel 1 is not standardized

1 ... Channel 1 is standardized







350

Standardization using Two Coordinates or using Slope and Offset (write)
Description
0 ... Channel 1: Standardization using two coordinates

1 ... Channel 1: Standardization using slope and offset







Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Bit
Standardization Absolute/Relative (write)

Bit
Description
0 ... Channel 1: Absolute standardization

1 ... Channel 1: Relative standardization







351

10.4.13 Standardization
General Information
Through standardization, the measurement value is assigned a value corresponding to the
physical unit. The conversion takes place along a standardization line:
Figure 135: AI780 standardization
The line equation is:
y=k*x+d
y ..... standardized value
k ..... slope
x ..... measurement value
d ..... y, if x = 0 (offset)
Definition for the Standardizing Line

The definition can be made in two ways:
Using two coordinates
Using slope k and offset d
Definition for Equations using Two Coordinates

If the slope and the offset for the line equation is unknown, then the standardization line must be
defined using two coordinates (x0/y0) and (x1/y1).
Standard setting:
352
0 mA ..... $0000
20 mA ... $7FFF

Defining the Coordinates
The coordinates are defined using corresponding values y0 and y1 for the physical units and
using the corresponding values x0 and x1 for the measurement values. The values for y0 and
y1 (set value) are known. x0 and x1 (actual value) are defined as follows:
No.
Command to be Executed
Create conditions which correspond to the first coordinates (x0/y0) (weight, load etc.). The setting corresponds to the encoder minimum
value.
Read the measurement value and save.
Create conditions which correspond to the second coordinates (x1/y1). The setting corresponds to the encoder maximum value.
Read the measurement value and save.
Table 208: Defining the Coordinates
The various configuration data is created in the form of a data module, which is transferred to
the module using the Spooler library. The variable "Switching Standardization On/Off" must be
set to 0 and then to 1 for the data to be accepted. The data is accepted using the positive edges.
The text at the beginning of the data module is used for identification of the module and is not
allowed to be changed or moved.
The data module is created/configured using B&R Automation Studio in offline mode and then
transferred to the PLC.
The library DataObj is available for manipulation during the operation of the system. Value
changes can be made e.g. using the visualization device.
In section 10.4.15 "Configuration Examples" two data modules are listed.
353
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Data for the Standardization

Definition of the Straight Lines using Slope and Offset
If the slope k and the offset d for the line equation is known, then the definition for the
standardizing lines can be made using these two parameters.
Standard setting:
0 mA ..... $00000000
20 mA ... $00010000
Number Format
The number format for k and d is DINT. The 2 high-order bytes are the integer part and the 2 loworder bytes are the decimal places. To ensure the correct processing, both values must be
multiplied by 65536.
Example:
k = 2.4 and d = 0.5

Slope = k x 65536 = 2.4 x 65536 = 157286 = $00026666
Offset = d x 65536 = 0.5 x 65536 = 32768 = $00008000
Special Functions
Other standardization parameters can be configured for each channel
Standardization can be switched on or off separately for each channel
Standardization can be made absolute or relative for each channel
Absolute or relative standardization

1) Absolute standardization
Normally, absolute standardization is used. The slope k and the offset d are taken directly from
the operating system for the AI780 and calculated from the coordinates provided.
2) Relative standardization
The relative standardization can e.g. be used during commissioning or for matching a line
equation to modified operating conditions.
With relative standardization, the AI780 records the current values for the slope and the offset
when switching off. The parameters for k and d transferred during the boot phase are not directly
accepted, rather used as factor. The new slope and the new offset are calculated using these
factors:
knew = kold x kfactor
dnew = dold x kfactor + dfactor
354

10.4.14 Commissioning
1) Creating the data module. The data module is created offline using B&R Automation
Studio and in the operation using the library DataObj. The following data is defined:
Lower/upper limit value
Coordinates
Slope k and Offset d
If the data module was created using B&R Automation Studio, then the data module must
be transferred to the PLC.
2) Spool the data module onto the AI780 using the Spooler library.
4) Define whether standardization is made absolute or relative.

5) Switch standardization on/off. Switching on standardization is interpreted as the start signal
for the converters. Converters are operated differently, depending on the operating mode:
Continuous Mode:
Converters are started
Trigger Mode:
Converters can be started using a trigger pulse for one

measurement cycle at a time
10.4.15 Configuration Examples

Example 1 - Standard setting
The standard settings are described in the following example. The measurement values are
standardized to 0 - 20 mA. Settings for the lower and upper limit values correspond to the
respective maximum value.
Setting the lower limit to $8001
Setting the upper limit to $7FFF
All coordinates are 0/0, which means that the x/y calculation is deactivated
Data Module
"6098_cfg",0,0,0,0,0,
$0100,
$8001,
$8001,
$8001,
$8001,
$8001,
;
;
;
;
;
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
; text is not allowed to be changed

; Version code AI780 configuration structure
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
355
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3) Define whether standardization should be made using two coordinates or using slope k and
offset d.

$8001,
$8001,
$8001,
; Lower limit channel 6

$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
00000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$00010000,
$00010000,
$00010000,
; k * 65536 channel 1
; k * 65536 channel 2
; k * 65536 channel 3
356
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

$00010000,
$00010000,
$00010000,
$00010000,
$00010000,
;
;
;
;
;
k
k
k
k
k
*
*
*
*
*
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
4
5
6
7
8
$00000000,
$00000000,
$00000000,
$00000000,
$00000000,
$00000000,
$00000000,
$00000000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The measurement values are standardized to auf 4 - 20 mA in the following example.

Additionally, the data for the lower and upper limit values were changed.
Setting the lower limit to 0
Setting the upper limit to $7FF0
The x/y coordinates correspond to measurement value standardization to 4 - 20 mA
The k/d coordinates correspond to measurement value standardization to 4 - 20 mA
Data Module
"6098_cfg",0,0,0,0,0,
$0100,
; text is not allowed to be changed

; Version code AI780 configuration structure
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
$7FF0,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
limit
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$1999,
; x0 channel 1
357
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Example 2

$1999,
$1999,
$1999,
$1999,
$1999,
$1999,
$1999,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
x0
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
$0000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
y0
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
$7FFF,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
y1
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$00014000,
$00014000,
$00014000,
$00014000,
$00014000,
$00014000,
$00014000,
$00014000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
$E0004000,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
65536
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
358

Program Example
if (enable_cfg)
/* Spool configuration to AI780? */
{
if (DldDataM.enable == 0)
/* first cycle? */
{
DldDataM.io_type
= 1;
/* 2005 IO */
DldDataM.master_no = 1;
/* always 1 */
DldDataM.slave_no
= 0;
/* always 0 */
DldDataM.module_adr = 4;
/* Slot for the AI780 */
DldDataM.mode
= 0x00;
/* always 0 */
DldDataM.pName
= (UDINT)"6098_cfg"; /* Name of the configuration module
*/
DldDataM.enable
= 1;
/* was first cycle */
}
SPDownModule(&DldDataM);
/* Calls function block cyclically */
if (DldDataM.status != 6666)
{
Status = DldDataM.status; /* FBK ready with or without error, see status */
DldDataM.enable = enable_cfg = 0;
}
}
After the data module has been spooled to the AI780, the variable "Switching Standardization
On/Off" must be set to 0 and then to 1 for the data to be accepted. The data is accepted using
the positive edges.
359
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
This program example describes a possible variant for spooling the data module to the AI780.
For more details, please consult the online help for the Spooler library in B&R Automation Studio.
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Output Modules General information
11. Analog Output Modules

11.1 General information
Analog output modules convert PLC internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The
numbers to be converted must be in 16-bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place
independent of the resolution of the output module used.
All analog output modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A
converter is active.
11.1.1 Overview
Module
Number of Outputs
AO350
AO360
AO775
Output Signal
10 V
10 V
0 to 20 mA
12-bit
16-bit
11-bit
Table 209: Analog output module overview
11.1.2 Programming
360
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Output Modules AO350
11.2 AO350
The AO350 is a standard analog output module.
11.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AO350.6
2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12-bit.

Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 210: AO350 order data

Product ID
AO350
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$A0
Number of Outputs
8 voltage outputs
Output - PLC
Output - Output
Yes
No
Output Signal
-10 to +10 V
12-bit
Output Filter
Low pass 1st order / cut-off frequency: 1 kHz
250 s
Table 211: AO350 technical data
361

Product ID
AO350
Max. 10 mA (load 1 k)
Load per Output

Short Circuit Protection (current limit)
15 mA
Precision
Basic Accuracy (at 20 C)
Precision (0 to 60 C)
0.25%
0.5%
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1 W
Max. 4 W
Max. 5 W
Dimensions
Table 211: AO350 technical data (cont.)
11.2.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN
The RUN LED indicates that the digital/analog converter is running.
Table 212: AO350 status LEDs
362

TB170
Assignment
+ Output 1
- Output 1
+ Output 2
- Output 2
+ Output 3
- Output 3
+ Output 4
- Output 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Output 5
14
- Output 5
15
+ Output 6
16
- Output 6
17
+ Output 7
18
- Output 7
19
+ Output 8
20
- Output 8
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Connection
Table 213: AO350 pin assignment

Shielded cables must be used with analog output modules. The ground connection for the shield
is made on one of the terminal block shield connections provided for the two outputs.
Figure 136: AO350 signal cable connection
The four shielded connections are of the equal value and each connected via RC elements with
ground ( , i.e.: a spring contact and a mounting rail).
363

R: 22 k, C: 10 nF / 60 V.
Figure 137: AO350 shielded connection
Figure 138: AO350 output circuit diagram
11.2.7 Relationship between Numerical Value and Output Voltage

Numerical Value
Output Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
8000
-32768
C000
-16384
-10 V
-5 V
FFF0
-16
-4.88 mV
0000
0V
0010
16
4.88 mV
4000
16384
5V
7FF0
32752
10 V
Table 214: AO350 relationship between numerical value and output voltage
364

Function
Single analog output (channel x)
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
1 ... 8
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 215: AO350 variable declaration
365
11.3 AO360
11.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AO360.60-1
2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, +/- 10 V, 16-bit.

Image
7TB718.9
7TB718.91
7TB718:90-02

1.5 mm
7TB718:91-02

1.5 mm

Product ID
AO360
General information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$A2
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Module Type
Number of Outputs
Output Signal
B&R 2005 I/O module

8 voltage outputs
-10 V to +10 V
366

Product ID
AO360
16-bit
Output Filter

0.011% 1) 700 V

Temperature Drift
Offset
Gain
100 V / C
25 ppm / C 1)
10 mA (load 1 k)
Maximum Load per Output

Continuous Short Circuit Protection
Yes
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.1 W
Max. 4 W
Max. 5.1 W
192 s
Internal enable relay
Default Setting: 10 k between output + and output -
Output - PLC
Output - Output
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Switch On/Off Behavior
Yes
No
Dimensions

1) Referring to the current output value.
11.3.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN
Indicates that the module is in operation.
Figure 139: AO360 status LEDs
367

Connection
Assignment
Shield
Shield
+ Output 1
- Output 1
+ Output 2
- Output 2
+ Output 3
- Output 3
+ Output 4
10
- Output 4
11
+ Output 5
12
- Output 5
13
+ Output 6
14
- Output 6
15
+ Output 7
16
- Output 7
17
+ Output 8
18
- Output 8
Table 218: AO360 pin assignments

is made on one of the terminal block shield connections provided for the four outputs.
368

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
11.3.7 Relationship between Numerical Value and Output Voltage

Numerical Value
Output Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
8000
-32768
-10.0003 V
-10 V
8001
-32767
C001
-16383
-5 V
FFFF
-1
-305 V
0000
0V
305 V
0001
3FFF
16383
5V
7FFF
32767
10 V
Table 219: AO360 relationship between numerical value and output voltage

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
1 ... 8
369
11.4 AO775
11.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AO775.6
2005 analog output module, 8 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 11-bit.

Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02

Product ID
C-UL-US Listed
B&R ID Code
AO775
Yes
$A1
Number of Outputs
8 current outputs
Output - PLC
Output - Output
Yes
No
Output Signal
Output Filter
0 to 20 mA
11-bit
250 s
370

Product ID
AO775
Max. 600
Load
Precision
0.5%
0.75%
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1 W
Max. 4.5 W
Max. 5.5 W
Dimensions
11.4.4 Status LEDs

LED
Description
RUN
The RUN LED indicates that the digital/analog converter is running.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 223: AO775 status LEDs
371

Connection
TB170
Assignment
+ Output 1
- Output 1
+ Output 2
- Output 2
+ Output 3
- Output 3
+ Output 4
- Output 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Output 5
14
- Output 5
15
+ Output 6
16
- Output 6
17
+ Output 7
18
- Output 7
19
+ Output 8
20
- Output 8
Table 224: AO775 pin assignment

is made on one of the terminal block shield connections provided for the two outputs.
The four shielded connections are of the equal value and each connected via RC elements with
372

R: 22 k, C: 10 nF / 60 V
Figure 143: AO775 shielded connection
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
11.4.7 Relationship between Numerical Value and Output Current

Numerical Value
Output Current
Hexadecimal
Decimal
0000
0 mA
0010
16
9.77 A
4000
16384
10 mA
7FF0
32752
20 mA
Table 225: AO775 relationship between numerical value and output current
373

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
1 ... 8
374
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Mixed Modules General Information
12. Analog Mixed Modules

Analog mixed modules are a combination of analog input and output modules.
All analog mixed modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that the D/A and
A/D converters are active.
12.1.1 Overview
Number of Inputs
Input signal
Number of Outputs
AM050
AM051
AM055
AM374
4
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA 1)
Output signal
10 V
0 to 20 mA
10 V
10 V / 0 - 20 mA 1)
Digital Converter
Resolution
12-bit
12-bit
12-bit
12-bit
Table 227: Analog Mixed Module Overview

1) Can be switched in groups of 2
12.1.2 Programming
375
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Module
B&R 2005 Modules Analog Mixed Modules AM050
12.2 AM050
The AM050 is a standard analog mixed module.
12.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AM050.6
2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12-bit,

4 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12-bit. Order terminal block separately.
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Table 228: AM050 order data

Product ID
AM050
General information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$88
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Inputs
Input Signal
4
0 -10 V
Outputs
Output Signal
4
10 V
Table 229: AM050 technical data
376

Product ID
AM050
Channel - PLC
Channel - Channel
Yes
No
Operating Modes
Normal Operation


Averaging
< 1 ms
< 1.5 ms
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.5 W
Max. 5 W
Max. 6.5 W
Analog Inputs
Input Signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
0 to +10 V
-20 to +20 V
12-bit
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7FF8 (1 LSB = $0008 = 2.441 mV)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
2 M
Input Filter

0.1% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.0075% / C 2)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
-66 dB
DC
50 Hz
50 dB
45 dB

Ground Potential
50 VDC

10 VDC
Analog Outputs
Output signal
10 V
12-bit
Output Format
INT $8080 - $7F80 (1 LSB = $0010 = 4.90 mV)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Load
Min. 1 k
Table 229: AM050 technical data (cont.)
377

Product ID
AM050
Short-circuit-proof
Current limit -15 mA to -30 mA / +15 mA to +30 mA
Output Filter
Offset
Total
0.025% 1)
0.15% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0015% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.0050% / C 2)
Error caused by Load Change
Max. 0.013%
(from 10 M -> 1 k, resistive)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
Internal enable relay, default setting: Short circuit
Dimensions

12.2.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN
A lit RUN LED indicates the analog/digital converter and

digital/analog converter are running.
MODE

Table 230: AM050 status LEDs
378

TB170
Assignment
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ Input 2
- Input 2
+ Input 3
- Input 3
+ Input 4
- Input 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Output 1
14
- Output 1
15
+ Output 2
16
- Output 2
17
+ Output 3
18
- Output 3
19
+ Output 4
20
- Output 4
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Connection
Table 231: AM050 pin assignment
Figure 145: AM050 signal cable connection
379

Shielded cabling should be used for the mixed module's analog input and output signal cables.
The shield is grounded for two inputs/outputs using one of the terminal block shield connections
provided.
Minus connections for the analog outputs are switched over 22 to the internal ground. A
floating connection is recommended for large cable lengths. The potential displacement between
minus connections is allowed to be a maximum of 4 V.
Figure 146: AM050 shielded connection
Figure 147: AM050 input circuit diagram
Figure 148: AM050 output circuit diagram
380

Normal operation is set during power-on or after a reset. The enable relay releases the
outputs approximately 300 ms after a reset.
is not possible.
Normal Operation
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
All values are read, and written on the analog output channels. The update time for the analog
outputs should be considered in the above listed conversion times for the analog inputs.
381
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

%00010000
In this operating mode, the conversion cycle is started on the module by the application program,
which sets bit 7 from mode register 8 to 0 (start pulse).
All analog output values are then immediately read and written on the output channels. Finally,
the conversion of all four input channels is carried out so that it does not react to another start
pulse. The end of the cycles is registered by setting bit 7 in the status register 2.

controller).
Mode Register 8
Analog Mixed Module
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Analog output values read from the DPR (start)
1)
Analog output values read from the DPR (end)
1)
Time
Update analog outputs 1 - 4
t_ao = t_0 + 328.5 to 330 s
Start measurement input channel 1
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
1)
1)
t_0 + 900 s
Table 232: AM050 Special Operating Mode 1: Direct software timing

1) Bus accesses on the module can lead to interruptions in the reading of analog output values from the dual ported RAM (DPR) and/or
the writing of the measurements in the dual ported RAM. Therefore, it is recommended that handling of affected I/O variables in the
special operating modes should only be made by the "Direct_IO" FBKs.
382

%00110000
The procedure is similar to special operating mode 1. However, in special operating mode 2
there is the option to set the time when the next conversion cycle should be ended. The default
time is entered in s as UINT in mode register 7 + 8. This write access works in the same way
as a start pulse (independent of bit 7 in the mode register 8). Further write accesses are
ineffective until the end of the cycles.
The reading of analog output values and the conversion of all eight channels is not started
immediately but rather 1000 s before the end of the default time. The end of the cycles is
registered by setting bit 7 in the status register 2. Unlike special operating mode 1, the time scale
is left unchanged.
2000 to 65535 s
Example: Task 1 has a cycle time of 10 ms in task class 1. At the end of the cycles, current
registers 7 + 8.
Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Delay Loop
Depends on t_pre
t_St = t_pre - 1000 s
1)
1)
t_ao = t_St + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
1)
1)
Table 233: AM050 Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time
383
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_pre - 100 s
Time entry sequence
t_pre
Table 233: AM050 Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time (cont.)
12.2.9 Relationship between Converter Value and Input / Output Signals

Input Voltage 0 - 10 V
Converter Value
Input Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Error Status
$8000
-32768
0 V
$0000
2.441 mV
$0008
9.997 V
$7FF0
32752
10 V
$7FF8
32760
Table 234: AM050 Relationship between input voltage and converter value
12.2.10 Output Voltage 10 V

The converter value (INT format) changes in increments of 16 (..., -32, -16, 0, 16, 32, etc.).
Converter Value
Output Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$8080
-32640
-10 V
$FFF0
-16
-4.901 mV
$0000
0V
$0010
16
4.901 mV
$7F80
32640
10 V
Table 235: AM050 Relationship between output voltage and converter value
384

Scope
Data Type
Length
Single analog input (Channel x)
tc_global
INT
tc_global
INT
Mode register 1
tc_global
USINT
Mode register 2
tc_global
USINT
Mode registers 7 + 8
Special operating mode 2 "Software Timing using Default Values"
tc_global
UINT
Mode Register 8
tc_global
USINT
Status register 1
tc_global
tc_global
Status register 2
Module
Type
Chan.
Analog In
1 ... 4
Analog Out
1 ... 4
Status Out
Status Out
Status Out
Status Out
USINT
Status In
USINT
Status In
Table 236: AM050 variable declaration
Mode Register 1
Mode Register 1
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0
Description
AV
385
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Function

Averaging
New Average Value =
The positive limit for averaging is $7FF7 instead $7FF8.

Mode Register 2
Mode Register 2
0 0
7
Bit
Description
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
0 0 0 0
0
SWT_DIR
0 ..... Normal operation (default setting)

1 ..... Special operating mode 1 (Direct Software Timing)
SWT_TIM

0 ..... Operating mode dependent on SWT_DIR (default setting)
1 ..... Special operating mode 2 (software timing using default times)
386

in s in both of these registers. The conversion cycle of all analog inputs and analog outputs
must be completed when this time has passed.
Value range:
2000 to 65535 s
Mode Register 8
Bit
Description
TRIGn
- Start pulse
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
TRIGn
A write access with TRIGn = 0 triggers a conversion cycle.
387

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
AV
I_ERR
- Module error
x x x x x x
7
I_ERR
0...... Data values in the dual ported RAM (DPR) correspond to definitions
1...... An internal error exists. Please contact B&R.
MW
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
x
7
Bit
Description
SWT_RDY
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
x x x x
0
SWT_DIR
SWT_TIM
SWT_RDY

388
12.3 AM051
The AM051 is a standard analog mixed module.
12.3.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12-bit,
4 outputs, 0 to 20 mA, 12-bit. Order TB170 terminal block
separately.
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3AM051.6

Product ID
AM051
General information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$89
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Inputs
Input Signal
4
0 - 20 mA
Outputs
Output Signal
4
0 - 20 mA
389

Product ID
Channel - PLC
Channel - Channel
Operating Modes
Normal Operation
Averaging
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
AM051
Yes
No
< 1 ms
< 1.5 ms
Max. 1.5 W
Max. 5 W
Max. 6.5 W
Analog Inputs
Input Signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
0 to 20 mA
-50 to +50 mA
12-bit
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7FF8 (1 LSB = $0008 = 4.883 A)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Load
Input Filter
50
1V
0.1% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.01% / C 2)
Repeat Precision
0.05% 1)
-66 dB
DC
50 Hz
55 dB
50 dB

Ground Potential
50 VDC

15 VDC
Analog Outputs
Output Signal
Output Format
Non-Linearity
0 - 20 mA
12-bit
INT $0000 - $7F80 (1 LSB = $0080 = 4.90 A)
1 LSB
390

Product ID
AM051
Max. 600
Load
Output Filter
Offset
Total
-0.013% to +0.039% 1)
0.15% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.008%/C 2) )
Max. 0.075%
(from 1 -> 600 k, resistive)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
Dimensions
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

2) Referring to the current measurement value
12.3.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN

MODE

391

Connection
TB170
Assignment
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ Input 2
- Input 2
+ Input 3
- Input 3
+ Input 4
- Input 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Output 1
14
- Output 1
15
+ Output 2
16
- Output 2
17
+ Output 3
18
- Output 3
19
+ Output 4
20
- Output 4
392

provided.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
393

is not possible.
Normal Operation
Analog Inputs
Averaging can only be switched on in cyclic operation using mode register 1. The conversion
Analog Outputs
All values are read and written on the analog output channels. The update time for the analog
394

%00010000
controller).
Mode Register 8
Analog Mixed Module
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
1)
1)
Time
t_ao = t_0 + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
1)
1)
t_0 + 900 s
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

395

The mode register 2 must be set to the following value :
%00110000
is the option to set the time when the next conversion cycle should be ended. The default time
until the end of the cycles.
is left unchanged.
2000 to 65535 s
registers 7 + 8.
Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Delay Loop
Depends on t_pre
t_St = t_pre - 1000 s
1)
1)
t_ao = t_St + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
1)
1)
396

Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_pre - 100 s
Time entry sequence
t_pre

Input Current 0 - 20 mA
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Converter Value
Input Current
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Error Status
$8000
-32768
0 A
$0000
4.883 A
$0008
19.995 mA
$7FF0
32752
20 mA
$7FF8
32760
Table 243: AM051 Relationship between input current and converter value
Output Current 0 - 20 mA
The converter value (INT format) changes in increments of 8 (0, 8, 16, etc).
Converter Value
Output Current
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$0000
0A
$0008
4.883 A
$7F80
32640
20 mA
Table 244: AM051 relationship between output current and converter value
397

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
tc_global
INT
tc_global
INT
Mode Register 1
tc_global
Mode Register 2
Mode Register 8
Status Register 1
Status Register 2
Module
Type
Chan
.
Analog In
1 ... 4
Analog Out
1 ... 4
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
UINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status In
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Mode Register 1
Mode Register 1
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0
398
Description
AV

Averaging
New Average Value =
The positive limit for averaging is $7FF7 instead of $7FF8.

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 2
Mode Register 2
0 0
7
Bit
Description
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
0 0 0 0
0
SWT_DIR
0...... Normal operation (default setting)

1...... Special operating mode 1 (Direct Software Timing)
SWT_TIM

0...... Operating mode dependent on SWT_DIR (default setting)
1...... Special operating mode 2 (software timing using default times)
399

Value range:
2000 to 65535 s
Mode Register 8
Mode Register 8
Bit
Description
TRIGn
- Start pulse
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
TRIGn
400
TRIGn is only active in "Direct Software Timing" operating mode (SWT_DIR to 1, SWT_TIM to 0).

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
AV
I_ERR
- Module error
x x x x x x
0
I_ERR
0...... Data values in the dual ported RAM (DPR) correspond to definitions.
MW
Averaging in normal operation is active (mode register 1 settings are repeated).
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
x
7
Bit
Description
SWT_RDY
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
x x x x
0
SWT_DIR
SWT_TIM
SWT_RDY
SWT_RDY is only active, if a special operating mode is set.

0 ......Measurement or waiting loop is running.
1 ......The last cycle is completed.
401
12.4 AM055
The AM055 is a standard analog mixed module. The module is equipped with a potentiometer
voltage. The potentiometer voltage is 2-fold and can be loaded parallel with 4 x 1 k.
12.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AM055.6
2005 analog mixed module, 5 inputs, 0 to 10 V, 12-bit,

3 outputs, +/- 10 V, 12-bit, 1 potentiometer voltage +10 V,
2x. Order TB170 terminal blocks separately.
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02

Product ID
AM055
General information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$97
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Inputs
Input Signal
5
0 -10 V
402

Product ID
AM055
Outputs
Output Signal
3
10 V
Potentiometer Voltage
+10 V
Channel - PLC
Channel - Channel
Yes
No
Operating Modes
Normal Operation


Averaging
< 1 ms
< 1.5 ms
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Max. 1.5 W
Max. 5.5 W, including potentiometer voltage
Max. 7 W
Analog Inputs
Input Signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
0 to +10 V
-20 to +20 V
12-bit
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7FF8 (1 LSB = $0008 = 2.441 A)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Load
2 M
0.05% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.005% / C 2)
Analog Outputs
Output Signal
10 V
12-bit
Output Format
INT $8080 - $7F80 (1 LSB = $0010 = 4.90 mV)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Load
Min. 1 k
Offset
Total
0.025% 1)
0.1% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0013% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.003% / C 2)
Internal enable relay during boot procedure or error: short circuit Short circuit
403

Product ID
AM055
Potentiometer Voltage
Output Voltage
+10 V
Load
4 x 1 k parallel, max total 40 mA
> 100 mA
Basic Accuracy
0.02% 3)
Drift over Temperature Range
0.04% 3)
Dimensions

3) Referring to 10 V.
12.4.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN

MODE

404

TB170
Assignment
Pot. Supply I1 + 2
AGND I1 + 2
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ Input 2
- Input 2
Pot. Supply I3 + 4
AGND I3 + 4
+ Input 3
10
- Input 3
11
+ Input 4
12
- Input 4
13
+ Input 5
14
- Input 5
15
+ Output 1
16
- Output 1
17
+ Output 2
18
- Output 2
19
+ Output 3
20
- Output 3
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Connection
405

The cable shield must be grounded near the terminal block.
Due to EMC reasons, it is recommended to short circuit the inputs which are not used.
Potentiometer Operation
Figure 154: AM055 potentiometer operation
406

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
407

is not possible.
Normal Operation
Normal operation is set after a power-on.
Analog Inputs
time increases slightly to <1.5 ms due to the higher computing time needed.
Analog Outputs
All values are read and written on the analog output channels. The update time for the analog
408

Mode register 2 must be set to the following value:
%00010000
the conversion of all five input channels is carried out so that it does not react to another start
Data acquisition (without jitter) in high-speed-task classes (e.g. for a
controller).
Mode Register 8
Analog Mixed Module
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
1)
1)
Time
Update analog outputs 1 -3
t_ao = t_0 + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
t_ao +5 * 85 s
1)
1)
t_0 + 900 s
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Application Example:

409

%00110000
is left unchanged.
2000 to 65535 s
Equidistant data acquisition for controllers in normal task classes with

the option of calculating the measurement time in the main CPU (e.g.
using the timer function "TIM_musec" or "TIM_ticks" -> user program).
Example: Task 1 has a cycle time of 10 ms in task class 1 . At the end of the cycles, current
registers 7 + 8.
Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Delay Loop
Depends on t_pre
t_St = t_pre - 1000 s
1)
1)
Update analog outputs 1 -3
t_ao = t_St + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
t_ao +5 * 85 s
1)
410

Analog Mixed Module
Time
1)
t_pre - 100 s
Time entry sequence
t_pre

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Converter Value
Input Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$8000
-32768
Error Status
0 A
$0000
2.441 mV
$0008
9.997 V
$7FF0
32752
10 V
$7FF8
32760
Output Voltage 10 V
Converter Value
Output Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$8080
-32640
-10 V
$FFF0
-16
-4.901 mV
$0000
0V
$0010
16
4.901 mV
$7F80
32640
10 V
411

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
tc_global
INT
tc_global
INT
Mode Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Mode Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
UINT
Status Out
Mode Register 8
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Status Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 2
Module
Type
Chan
.
Analog In
1 ... 5
Analog Out
1 ... 3
Status Out
Mode Register 1
Mode Register 1
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0
412
Description
AV

Averaging
New Average Value =
The positive limit for averaging is $7FF7 instead $7FF8.

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 2
Bits 0 - 3 as well as 6 and 7 must be assigned with 0.
Mode Register 2
0 0
7
Bit
Description
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
0 0 0 0
0
SWT_DIR

SWT_TIM

413

Value range:
2000 to 65535 s
Mode Register 8
Mode Register 8
Bit
Description
TRIGn
- Start pulse
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
TRIGn
414

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
AV
I_ERR
- Module error
x x x x x x
0
I_ERR
0...... Data values in the dual ported RAM (DPR) correspond to definitions
MW
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
x
7
Bit
Description
SWT_RDY
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
x x x x
0
SWT_DIR
SWT_TIM
SWT_RDY

415
12.5 AM374
The AM374 is a standard analog mixed module. Two channels at a time are combined into a
group. There are two input and output groups. The signal can be configured for each group
(voltage or current).
12.5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AM374.6
2005 analog mixed module, 4 inputs, 0-10 V / 0-20 mA, 12bit, 4 outputs, +/- 10 V / 0-20 mA, 12-bit, signals can be
switched in groups of 2. Order TB170 terminal blocks
separately !
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
416

Product ID
AM374
General information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$8A
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Inputs
Input signal
Group 1
Group 2
4
0 - 10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be switched in groups of 2
Channel 1 +2
Channel 3 + 4
Channel - PLC
Channel - Channel
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
4
10 V / 0 - 20 mA, can be switched in groups of 2
Channel 1 +2
Channel 3 + 4
Outputs
Output signal
Group 1
Group 2
Yes
No
Operating Modes
Normal Operation


Averaging
< 1 ms
< 1.5 ms
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.5 W
Max. 5 W
Max. 6.5 W
Analog Inputs Voltage

Input signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
0 to +10 V
-20 to +20 V
12-bit
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7FFF (1 LSB = $0008 = 2.441 mV)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
2 M
Input Filter

0.1% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.0075% / C 2)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
417

Product ID
AM374
-66 dB
DC
50 Hz
50 dB
45 dB

Ground Potential
50 VDC

10 VDC
Analog Inputs - Current

Input Signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
0 to 20 mA
-50 to +50 mA
12-bit
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7FFF (1 LSB = $0008 = 4.883 A)
Non-Linearity
1 LSB
Load
Input Filter
50
1V
0.1% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.01% / C 2)
Repeat Precision
0.05% 1)
-66 dB
DC
50 Hz
60 dB
55 dB

Ground Potential
50 VDC

15 VDC
Analog Outputs - Voltage

Output Signal
Output Format
Non-Linearity
Load
Short-circuit-proof
Output Filter
10 V
12-bit
INT $8080 - $7F80 (1 LSB = $0010 = 4.90 mV)
1 LSB
Min. 1 k
Current limit -15 mA to -30 mA / +15 mA to +30 mA
418

Product ID
AM374
Offset
Total
0.025% 1)
0.15% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0015% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.0050% / C 2)
Max. 0.013%
(from 10 M -> 1 k, resistive)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
Analog Outputs Current

Output signal
0 - 20 mA
12-bit
Output Format
INT $0000 - $7F80 (1 LSB = $0080 = 4.90 A)

1 LSB
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Non-Linearity
Max. 600
Load
Output Filter
Offset
Total
-0.013% to +0.039% 1)
0.15% 1)
Offset Drift
Max. 0.0025% / C 1)
Gain Drift
Max. 0.008% / C 2)
Max. 0.075%
(from 1 -> 600 k, resistive)
0.025% 1)
Repeat Precision
Dimensions

2) Referring to the current measurement value.
419

12.5.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
RUN
A slow blinking RUN LED indicates that the module has not yet been
configured.
digital/analog converter are running according to the configuration
made.
MODE

AI1, AI2
The LEDs AI1, AI2 indicate that input channels 1 and 2 are
configured as current inputs.
AI3, AI4
The LEDs AI3, AI4 indicate that input channels 3 and 4 are
configured as current inputs.
AO1, AO2
The LEDs AO1, AO2 indicate that output channels 1 and 2 are
configured as current outputs.
AO3, AO4
The LEDs AO3, AO4 indicate that output channels 3 and 4 are
configured as current outputs.
420

TB170
Assignment
+ Input 1
- Input 1
+ Input 2
- Input 2
+ Input 3
- Input 3
+ Input 4
- Input 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Output 1
14
- Output 1
15
+ Output 2
16
- Output 2
17
+ Output 3
18
- Output 3
19
+ Output 4
20
- Output 4
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Connection
421

provided.
422
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
12.5.8 Configuration
The signal for analog inputs and analog outputs channels can be configured using the
configuration register. The analog/digital and digital/analog converter begins to work after the
configuration has been made.
There is no standby status! Without valid configuration, analog inputs remain
highly resistive and the analog outputs are short circuited with the internal
enable relay. The RUN LED blinks slowly. The error value $8000 (-32768) is
returned as data value for the analog inputs.
The configuration remains in effect until the next start up or a reset is carried out in all operating
modes. Changing during the operation is not possible. Configuration ideally takes place during
the initialization sub-program (INIT SP). If PLC software V1.90 is used, then analog input
values are already valid when the main program is started.
423

Normal operation: is set after configuration takes place
The module must be configured after the start up or after a reset. Normal operation is then
active.
is not possible.
Normal Operation
Normal operation is set after start up and after configuration has been carried out.
Analog Inputs
All channels are converted cyclically and data is transferred to the dual ported RAM in the agreed
Analog Outputs
All values are read, and written on the analog output channels. The update time for the analog
424

%00010000
pulse. The end of the cycles is registered by setting bit 7 in status register 2.
controller).
Mode Register 8
Analog Mixed Module
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
1)
1)
Time
t_ao = t_0 + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
1)
1)
t_0 + 900 s
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

425

The mode register 2 must be set to the following value :
%00110000
reported by setting bit 7 in the status register 2. Unlike special operating mode 1, the time scale
is left unchanged.
2000 to 65535 s
registers 7 + 8.
Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_0
t_0 + 20 to 40 s
Delay Loop
Depends on t_pre
t_St = t_pre - 1000 s
1)
1)
t_ao = t_St + 328.5 to 330 s
t_ao + 1 * 85 s
t_ao +2 * 85 s
t_ao +3 * 85 s
t_ao +4 * 85 s
1)
1)
426

Analog Mixed Module
Time
t_pre - 100 s
Time entry sequence
t_pre

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Converter Value
Input Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Error Status1)
$8000
-32768
0 V
$0000
2.441 mV
$0008
9.997 V
$7FF0
32752
10 V
$7FFF
32767
1) For example, configuration that still has not been carried out.
Input Current 0 - 20 mA
Converter Value
Input Current
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Error Status1)
$8000
-32768
0
0 A
$0000
4.883 A
$0008
19.995 mA
$7FF0
32752
20 mA
$7FFF
32767
Table 262: AM374 Relationship between input current and converter value
1) For example, configuration that still has not been carried out.
427

Output Voltage 10 V
Converter Value
Output Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$8080
-32640
-10 V
$FFF0
-16
-4.901 mV
$0000
0V
$0010
16
4.901 mV
$7F80
32640
10 V
Output Current 0 - 20 mA
Converter Value
Output Current
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$0000
0A
$0008
4.883 A
$7F80
32640
20 mA
Table 264: AM374 relationship between output current and converter value

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan
.
tc_global
INT
Single Analog Output (channel x)
tc_global
INT
Analog In
1 ... 4
Analog Out
Mode Register 1
tc_global
USINT
1 ... 4
Status Out
Mode Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
UINT
Status Out
Mode Register 8
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Configuration Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Status Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
428

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan
.
Status Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 3 (Reproduction of the configuration register 1)
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 4 (Reproduction of the configuration register 2)
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Table 265: AM374 variable declaration (cont.)
Mode Register 1
Bit
0 0 0 0 0 0
Description
AV
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 1
Averaging
New Average Value =
429

Mode Register 2
Mode Register 2
0 0
7
Bit
Description
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
0 0 0 0
0
SWT_DIR
0...... Normal operation (default setting)

1...... Special operating mode 1 (Direct Software Timing)
SWT_TIM
SWT_TIM is only active, if SWT_DIR is set to 1!

0...... Operating mode dependent on SWT_DIR (default setting)
1...... Special operating mode 2 (software timing using default times)
Value range:
430
2000 to 65535 s

Mode Register 8
Mode Register 8
Bit
Description
TRIGn
- Start pulse
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TRIGn
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
431

Configuration Reg. 1
Bit
Description
VAL_AI
AI_ CONF4
AI_CONF3
AI_CONF2
AI_CONF1
0 0 0
7
AI_CONF1, AI_CONF2
Input signal definition for analog inputs 1 and 2
AI_CONF2
AI_CONF1
Input Signal for Inputs 1 + 2
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 266: AM374 Input signal definition for analog inputs 1 and 2
AI_CONF3, AI_CONF4
Input signal definition for analog inputs 3 and 4
AI_CONF4
AI_CONF3
Input Signal for Inputs 3 +4
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 267: AM374 Input signal definition for analog inputs 3 and 4
VAL_AI
432
0 ..... Configuration is not valid

1 ..... Configuration is valid but only accepted if VAL_AO is also 1 in configuration register 2

Configuration Reg. 2
Bit
Description
VAL_AO
AO_CONF4
AO_CONF3
AO_CONF2
AO_CONF1
0 0 0
0
AO_CONF1, AO_CONF2
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Output signal definition for analog outputs 1 and 2
AO_CONF2
AO_CONF1
Output Signal for Outputs 1 + 2
Voltage 10 V
Voltage 10 V
Voltage 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 268: AM374 Output signal definition for analog outputs 1 and 2
AO_CONF3, AO_CONF4
Output signal definition for analog outputs 3 and 4
AO_CONF4
AO_CONF3
Output Signal for Outputs 3 +4
Voltage 10 V
Voltage 10 V
Voltage 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 269: AM374 Output signal definition for analog outputs 3 and 4
VAL_AO
0 ..... Configuration is not valid

1 ..... Configuration is valid, but only accepted if VAL_AI is also 1 in configuration register 1
433

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
x x x x
Bit
Description
CONF_RDY
AV
I_ERR
- Module error
I_ERR
0 ......Data values in the dual ported RAM (DPR) correspond to definitions

1 ......An internal error exists or the configuration has still not been carried out. If this bit has still not been deleted after the
configuration has been made, please contact B&R.
MW
CONF_RDY
0 ......No valid configuration exists

1 ......Configuration of analog input and output is terminated
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
x
7
Bit
Description
SWT_RDY
SWT_TIM
SWT_DIR
x x x x
0
SWT_DIR
SWT_TIM
SWT_RDY

0 ..... Measurement or waiting loop is running
1 ..... The last cycle is completed
434

Status Register 3
Status register 3 indicates the configuration of analog inputs . The content of the status register
is valid if the CONF_RDY bit is set in status register 1.
Status Register 3
Bit
Description
AI_CONF4
AI_CONF3
AI_CONF2
AI_CONF1
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
x x x x
7
AI_CONF1, AI_CONF2
Input signal for analog inputs 1 and 2
AI_CONF2
AI_CONF1
Input Signal for Inputs 1 + 2
Voltage 0 - 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 270: AM374 input signal for analog inputs 1 and 2

AI_CONF3, AI_CONF4
Input signal for analog inputs 3 and 4
AI_CONF4
AI_CONF3
Input Signal for Inputs 3 +4

Voltage 0 - 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 271: AM374 input signal for analog inputs 3 and 4
435

Status Register 4
Status register 4 indicates the configuration of analog outputs. The content of the status register
is valid if the CONF_RDY bit is set in the status register 1.
Status Register 4
Bit
Description
AO_CONF4
AO_CONF3
AO_CONF2
AO_CONF1
x x x x
7
AO_CONF1,
AO_CONF2
Output signal for analog outputs 1 and 2
AO_CONF2
AO_CONF1
Output Signal for Outputs 1 + 2
Voltage 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 272: AM374 output signal for analog outputs 1 and 2

AO_CONF3, AO_CONF4
Output signal for analog outputs 3 and 4
AO_CONF4
AO_CONF3
Output Signal for Outputs 3 +4

Voltage 10 V
Current 0 - 20 mA
Table 273: AM374 output signal for analog outputs 3 and 4
436
B&R 2005 Modules Temperature Modules General Information
13. Temperature Modules

Temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed
by the PLC using temperature modules.
In the PLC, the number values are always in 16-bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution.
In this way, the resolution (number of steps) of the temperature module does not have to be
considered when creating the application program.
All temperature modules have a status LED labeled "RUN" which indicates that A/D conversion
is active.
13.1.1 Overview
Module
AT350
AT450
AT660
Number of Channels
Measurement Range
-50 to +450 C
-50 to +450 C
-200 to +950 C
-200 to +1,300 C
Sensor
PT100 / 3-line
PT100 / 4-line
FeCuNi / Type J + L
NiCrNi / Type K
13500 steps
13500 steps
23841 steps
Resolution
Table 274: Temperature module overview
13.1.2 Programming
437
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
For temperature measurements, the temperature module returns the measured value in 0.1
steps. That means, a result of 750 corresponds to 75.0 C. The data format 0.1 C is supported
as standard by all temperature modules. Some temperature modules can also be switched to
other formats.
B&R 2005 Modules Temperature Modules AT350 / AT450
13.2 AT350 / AT450

The AT350 and AT450 are temperature modules for PT100 temperature sensors.
13.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3AT350.6
2005 Analog Input Module, 4 inputs, PT100 (3-line

connection), -50 to +450 degrees C. Order TB170 terminal
block separately.
Image
3AT450.6
2005 Analog Input Module, 4 inputs, PT100 (4-line

connection), -50 to +450 degrees C. Order TB170 terminal
block separately.
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Table 275: AT350 / AT450 order data

Product ID
AT350
AT450
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Yes
B&R ID Code
$93
$92
Number of Inputs
4 inputs for resistance measurement
Input - PLC
Input - Input
Yes
No
Sensor
Type
Connection
Standard
Measurement Range
PT100
3 line connection
IEC/EN 60751
PT100
4 line connection
IEC/EN 60751
-50 to +450 C
Resolution
Internal 13500 steps
Measuring Procedure
Integrated Converter
Measuring Time per Channel
20 or 16.67 ms
Table 276: AT350 / AT450 technical data
438

Product ID
AT350
AT450
100 ms and 85 ms (depending on the measurement time per channel)
Input Filter
Bessel low pass 1st order / cut-off frequency: 8 Hz
Measurement Precision
0.1%
0.2%
Linearization
0.1%
0.15%
Automatic in the module
Measurement Current
2.5 mA (0.2%)
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1 W
Max. 3 W
Max. 4 W
Dimensions
13.2.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN
The analog/digital converter is running.
60Hz
This LED indicates, which measurement time is switched on. If this

LED is lit, the measurement time is set to 16.67 ms, which filters out
a 60 Hz mains power hum. Otherwise a measurement time of 20 ms
is selected (filtering of 50 Hz power hum).
Table 277: AT350 / AT450 status LEDs
439
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 276: AT350 / AT450 technical data (cont.)

AT350
TB170
Connection
Assignment
+ Sensor 1
+ Sense 1
- Sense/Sensor 1
Shield
+ Sensor 2
+ Sense 2
- Sense/Sensor 2
Shield
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Sensor 3
14
+ Sense 3
15
- Sense/Sensor 3
16
Shield
17
+ Sensor 4
18
+ Sense 4
19
- Sense/Sensor 4
20
Shield
Table 278: AT350 pin assignment
440
TB170
Connection
Assignment
+ Sensor 1
+ Sense 1
- Sense 1
- Sensor 1
+ Sensor 2
+ Sense 2
- Sense 2
- Sensor 2
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Sensor 3
14
+ Sense 3
15
- Sense 3
16
- Sensor 3
17
+ Sensor 4
18
+ Sense 4
19
- Sense 4
20
- Sensor 4
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
AT450

Shielded cables must be used for temperature sensor connection lines. The shield is grounded
using the terminal block's shield connection.
3 line connection (AT350)
Figure 161: AT350 signal cable connection
441
4 line connection (AT450)
Figure 162: AT450 signal cable connection
All shielded connections are of the equal value and each connected via RC elements with ground
( , i.e. a spring contact and a mounting rail).
R: 22 k, C: 10 nF / 60 V
Figure 163: AT350 / AT450 shielded connection
With a 3-line connection (AT350), only sensors may be used for which the
connection lines have the same electrical specifications i.e. same length, cross
section, material and therefore very close to the same ohmic resistance.
The maximum total resistance between the + and - sensor connections may not
exceed 600 , otherwise the overload of internal current will lead to
measurement errors.
Sensor or sensor lines are not allowed to be grounded or connected with any
other sensor lines.
442

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
AT350
Figure 164: AT350 input circuit diagram
AT450
443

13.2.7 Relationship between Temperature and Converter Value
Data Format 1/10 C
Converter Value
Temperature
Hexadecimal
Decimal
< -65.8 C
8000
-32768
-65.8 C
FD6E
-658
-50.0 C
FE0C
-500
-0.1 C
FFFF
-1
0.0 C
0000
0.1 C
0001
50.0 C
01F4
500
+450.0 C
1194
4500
+474.1 C
1285
4741
7FFF
32767
> +474.1 C
Table 280: AT350 / AT450 data format 1/10 C

Values within the range of -50 to +450 C corresponding to the precision given in the technical data.
Over-range or under-range measurements of the -50 to +450 C range of measurements will be still interpreted as temperature values
if they are between -65.8 to +474.1 C. However, the precision indicated in the technical data cannot be guaranteed for these values.
Values outside the range of -65.8 to +474.1 C give a conversion value of -32768 (8000) for under-range measurements and +32767
(7FFF) for over-range measurements.
444

Data Format 1/100 C
Converter Value
Hexadecimal
Decimal
< -64.65 C
8000
-32768
-64.65 C
E6BF
-6465
-50.00 C
EC78
-5000
-0.01 C
FFFF
-1
0.00 C
0000
0.01 C
0001
50.00 C
1388
5000
+250.00 C
61A8
25000
+265.07 C
678B
26507
> +265.07 C
7FFF
32767
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Temperature
Table 281: AT350 / AT450 data format 1/100 C
With this data format the measurement range is also (-50 C to +450 C) but because of the data
format, the output range is limited and the values between +265.08 to +450 C can no longer be
displayed. They receive the value 32767 (7FFF).
Values within the range of -50 to +250 C corresponding to the precision given in the technical data.
Over-range or under-range measurements of the -50 to +250 C range of measurements will be still interpreted as temperature values
if they are between -64.65 to +265.07 C. However, the precision indicated in the technical data cannot be guaranteed for these values.
Values outside the range of -64.65 to +265.07 C give a conversion value of -32768 (8000) for under-range measurements and +32767
445

Data format 1/10 F (Fahrenheit)
Converter Value
Temperature
Hexadecimal
Decimal
< -64.06 C
8000
-32768
-64.06 C
FCBF
-833
-45.56 C
FE0C
-500
-17.83 C
FFFF
-1
-17.78 C
0000
-17.72 C
0001
10.00 C
01F4
500
+454.44 C
2134
8500
+473.78 C
2290
8848
> +473.78 C
7FFF
32767
Table 282: AT350 / AT450 data format 1/10 F (Fahrenheit)

Values within the range of -50 to +850 F corresponding to the precision given in the technical data.
Over-range or under-range measurements of the -50 to +850 F range of measurements will be still interpreted as temperature values
if they are between -83.3 to +884.8 F. However, the precision indicated in the technical data cannot be guaranteed for these values.
Values outside the range of -83.3 to +884.8 F give a conversion value of -32768 (8000) for under-range measurements and +32767
446

13.2.8 Open Line Detection
The converter values -32768 (8000) and +32767 (7FFF) are not only sent to the PLC from the
module as under-range and over-range measurements, but are also given if inputs are open or
contacts broken.
AT350
Converter Value
Error
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Open Input (sensor is not connected)
8000
-32768
Broken Sensor Line
8000
-32768
7FFF
32767
Broken Sense Line
Table 283: AT350 open line detection
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
AT450
Converter Value
Error
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Open Input (sensor is not connected)
8000
-32768
Broken Sensor Line
8000
-32768
8000
-32768
Broken Sense Line
Table 284: AT450 open line detection

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
INT
Analog In
1 ... 4
Mode Register
The following settings can be changed by writing to this register:
- Measurement Time 20 or 16.67 ms
- Scan Order for the channels
- Selection of the data format
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Table 285: AT350 / AT450 variable declaration
447

13.2.10 Mode Register
The user can make different settings using the mode register. When writing to this register,
please make sure that only the relevant bits are changed.
Mode Register
Bit
Description
3-4
Choosing the desired data format (choice of three formats)
1-2
Scan order of the individual channels (choice of three options)
Measurement time 16.67 ms
0 0 0
7
Measurement Time
By setting the measurement time, a mains power hum of 50 or 60 Hz is supressed. A choice of
two measurement times are available:
Mode Register Bit 0
Measurement
Time
20 ms
16.67 ms
Remark
Standard setting after a hardware reset and switching on for 50 Hz
Setting for 60 Hz
Table 286: AT350 / AT450 measurement time
448

Scan Order
It is possible to change the scan order, i.e. channels are not scanned and converted in
succesion. Individual channels can be scanned more often in order to register fast thermal
changes more rapidly (e.g. heating cartridges).
Status Register
Bit 2
Bit 1
Scan Order
Remark
Standard settings after hardware reset or when switched on
not used (corresponds to the scan order 0)
The scan order is graphically shown in the following diagram (values in parentheses apply to a
set measurement time of 16.67 ms):
Figure 166: AT350 / AT450 scan order
449
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 287: AT350 / AT450 scan order definition

Data Format
In addition to the 1/10 C data format, two further formats are available, which can be selected
using bits 3 and 4 of the status register. The relationship between temperature and data format
is clarified in Section 13.2.7 "Relationship between Temperature and Converter Value", on
page 444.
The selected data format is always valid for all four inputs.
Status Register
Bit 4
Bit 3
Data Format
1/10 C
1/100 C
1/-12.22 C
---
Remark
Standard settings after hardware reset or when switched on
Not used (reserved for service)
Table 288: AT350 / AT450 data format definition
450
B&R 2005 Modules Temperature Modules AT660
13.3 AT660
The AT660 is a temperature module for temperature sensor type L, J and K.
13.3.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 analog input module, 8 inputs, temperature sensor
type L/J/K, -200 to +1300 degrees C. Order TB170
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3AT660.6
Table 289: AT660 order data

Product ID
AT660
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$95
Number of Inputs
Total
in 2 Groups of
8
4
Input - PLC
Group - Group
Input - Input
Yes
No
No
Table 290: AT660 technical data
451

Product ID
Each Group can be Set
Sensor
Sort
Type
Standard
Measurement Voltage Range
Measurement Range in 0.1 C Steps
Linearization
AT660
FeCuNi
L
Acc. to DIN 43710
-8.15 to 53.14 mV1)
-200.0 to +900.0 C
Yes
FeCuNi
J
Acc. to DIN IEC 584
-7.89 to 54.95 mV1)
-200.0 to +950.0 C
Yes
NiCrNi
K
Acc. to DIN IEC 584
-5.891 to 52.398 mV1)
-200.0 to +1,300.0 C
Yes
Raw Value
Measurement
--Standardized, 2 V 2)
-15 to +55 mV
Depends on sensor
in CPU
Each group can be set

Terminal Temperature Compensation
Internal
-20 to +80 C from internal compensation measurement
Can be read
External
-100 to +200 C adjustable
---
Reference Junction (internal)

Temperature Measurement
Measurement Precision (with natural
convection)
Temperature profile measurement on the module using four temperature sensors

Compensation temperature measured separately for each channel
Max. 4 C in total ambient temperature range (0 to 60 C)
Type +3 C / -1 C with an ambient temperature of 25 C
0.1 C
Repeat Precision
Internal >14-bit (23841 internal ADC converter values in 20 ms)
Thermo Voltage Raw Value 3)
-7500 ($E2B4) at -15 mV

0 at 0 mV
27500 ($6B6C) at +55 mV
Quantization (ADC value)
2.936 V (internal)
Measuring Procedure
Conversion Principle
Integrated (voltage/frequence converter)
Conversion Order of the Channels
1 and 5, 2 and 6, 3 and 7, 4 and 8 parallel
Measurement Time per Conversion
20 ms / 16.67 ms / 10 ms / 8.33 ms (module related setting)
Measurement Time for Internal

Compensation Measurement
20 ms + 6 ms
Maximum cycle time

4 * (measurement time per conversion
+ module computing time)
50 Hz
4 * (20 + 6) ms
60 Hz
4 * (16.67 + 6) ms
Internal Compensation Measurement

(if activated)
20 ms + 6 ms
20 ms + 6 ms
Cycle Time
Inputs
Input Resistance
Input Filter
130 ms
116.68 ms
Differential Inputs
>1 M
Bessel low pass 2nd order, cut-off frequency 8 Hz,

with NOTCH characteristic measurement procedure
(depending on the measurement time at 50 Hz / 60 Hz / 100 Hz / 120 Hz)
Table 290: AT660 technical data (cont.)
452

Product ID
AT660
Status Display
RUN LED (green), 6 status LEDs (yellow)
Measurement Range Monitoring

Open Inputs
Wire break
Range Exceeded (neg.)
Range Exceeded (pos.)
Type L
0.5 C
Type J
0.5 C
Type K
0.8 C
Offset Drift 6)
2.5 V / C
Gain Drift 7)
100 ppm / C
Common Mode Deviation
9 V between the channels
75 dB (DC) / 65 dB (50 Hz)

Ground Potential
---
50 V
Repeat Precision
Measurement time 20 ms
Measurement time 10 ms
2 LSB
3 LSB (scaled to 20 ms) 8)
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Measurement Precision at 25 C 5) 6)
$7FFF
$7FFF
$8000 4)
$7FFF
Max. 1.25 W
Max. 4.75 W
Max. 6 W
Dimensions
Table 290: AT660 technical data (cont.)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Standardized to 0 C compensation temperature.

Voltage standardized to 2 V starting with rev. xx.01.
Specifications refer to 2 V.
Not for raw value measurement.
Without consideration for the compensation measurement error.
Refers to the measurement range.
Refers to the current measurement value.
Depending on the measurement time, the internal resolution is reduced respectively, but the analog value is always scaled to 20 ms
and output in this form. This prevents a value from being changed when the measurement time is changed.
453

13.3.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
RUN
The analog/digital converter is running.
60Hz
This LED indicates which measurement time is switched on. If this LED is lit, the
measurement time is set to 16.67 ms, by which a 60 Hz mains power hum is
filtered out. Otherwise a measurement time of 20 ms is selected. The
measurement time is valid for all 8 channels.
Default Setting: 50 Hz; LED not lit
/2
This LED indicates if the half measurement time is set. If this LED is lit the
measurement time is 10 ms or 8.33 ms (depending on whether the 60Hz LED
is lit or not).
Default Setting: Full measuring time; LED not lit
1A/1B
These LEDs indicate the temperature sensor type setting for group 1
(channels 1 - 4).
Default Setting: Sensor type L; both LEDs not lit
1B
1A
Sensor Type
OFF
OFF
L (default setting) or wrong setting in

mode register 2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Output of thermocouple voltage as

standardized raw value 1) or
compensation temperature
1) Starting with Rev. xx.01.

2A/2B
These LEDs indicate the temperature sensor type setting for group 2
(channels 5 - 8).
Default Setting: Sensor type L; both LEDs not lit
2B
2A
Sensor Type
OFF
OFF
L (default setting) or wrong setting in

mode register 2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Output of thermocouple voltage as

standardized raw value 1) or
compensation temperature
1) Starting with Rev. xx.01.
Table 291: AT660 status LEDs
454

TB170
Assignment
+ Sensor 1
- Sensor 1
+ Sensor 2
- Sensor 2
+ Sensor 3
- Sensor 3
+ Sensor 4
- Sensor 4
Shield
10
Shield
11
Shield
12
Shield
13
+ Sensor 5
14
- Sensor 5
15
+ Sensor 6
16
- Sensor 6
17
+ Sensor 7
18
- Sensor 7
19
+ Sensor 8
20
- Sensor 8
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Connection
455

Shielded cables must be used for temperature sensor connection lines. The shield is grounded
for two inputs using one of the terminal block shield connections provided. The minus leg of the
sensor is grounded with some thermocouples, which does not affect the measurements
negatively.
Table 293: AT660 signal cable connection
The four shielded connections are of equal value and each connected via RC elements with
R: 22 k, C: 10 nF / 60 V
Figure 167: AT660 shielded connection
Influence of the Compensation Line Length

The measurement error caused by the line resistance can normally be disregarded. For a line
resistance of (this corresponds to a line length of approximately 40 m), the measurement
errror is 9 V.
456
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
13.3.7 Measurement Range Monitoring

1) Causes for Exceeding the Measurement Range in the Positive Direction ($7FFF)
No temperature sensor connected
The input voltage from the temperature sensor is higher than the:
a) Voltage range
b) Measurement range of the temperature sensor
2) Causes for Exceeding the Measurement Range in the Negative Direction ($8000)
The input voltage from the temperature sensor is lower than the:
a) Voltage range
b) Measurement range of the temperature sensor
457

3) Short Circuit Monitoring
Since a short circuit is generally a valid type of operation (0 mV), this cabling error status must
be recognized with a plausibility check in the application program.
If 0 C is also in the operating range for the application, B&R recommend a plausibility check
using additional logic.
Example: If the heater for t = n sec is switched on, the temperature must increase at least 2 C
(reference value that can also be automatically, adaptively calculated).
13.3.8 Installation Notes
Additional cooling lowers the absolute error of the internal compensation temperature
calculation especially at higher environmental temperatures for the AT660 (to
approximately 2 C).
For EMC reasons, it is recommended to short circuit open inputs.
5 minutes after switching on the controller, the AT660 has reached operating temperature
for calculating the compensation temperature The measurement precision is now valid.
13.3.9 Internal Measurement Processing

A scaled raw value is created from the input voltage which has a linear relationship to the input
voltage. Thermocouple temperature (for the given thermocouple type) is calculated from this raw
value taking the compensation into consideration (compensation and linearization takes place
internally).
The compensation temperature is calculated separately for each channel in the module. The
required temperature measurement is made using four temperature sensors on the terminal
block. The compensation temperature can be read by the user.
It is also possible to set the compensation temperature for each channel which will be used
instead of the measured value for internal compensation ("external compensation"). Operation
using external compensation is only possible for the entire module.
458

Special Types of Operation:
a) A thermocouple other than the defined types (J, K, L) is connected. Thermocouple
temperature is calculated in an application program (main CPU) from the raw value and the
compensation temperature measured on the module (for the respective channel).
b) It is necessary to install an external compensation reference junction (for long line lengths).
Calculating thermocouple temperature should be done on an AT660 module in spite of this.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The thermocouple voltage is sent from the external compensation reference junction to the
terminal of the AT660, the temperature measured on the external compensation reference
junction (e.g. with PT100 - AT350) is placed in the IO area for the AT660 module. The AT660
module calculates thermocouple temperature internally from the measured voltage and the
compensation temperature value (per channel).
Figure 169: AT660 operation using an external compensation reference junction
459

Function
Scope
Data
Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
tc_global
INT
Default External Reference Junction in 0.1 C Steps (channel x)
tc_global
INT
Analog In
1 ... 8
Analog Out
Mode Register 1
tc_global
1 ... 8
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 2
Mode Register 3
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 4
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Status Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 3
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 4
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Table 294: AT660 variable declaration
Mode Register 1
Mode Register 1
Bit
Description
/2
- Half measurement time
- Measurement time 16.67ms
0 0 0 0 0 0
7
0...... Measurement time per channel 20 ms (default setting) filtering of 50 Hz power hum
1...... Measurement time per channel 16.67 ms filtering of 60 Hz power hum
/2
0...... Depending on bit 0, the measurement time is 20 ms or 16.67 ms (default setting)

1...... Half measurement time: Depending on bit 0, the measurement time is 10 ms or 8.33 ms
460

Mode Register 2
Bits 4 - 7 must be assigned with 0. Please refer to the section "Relationship between Mode
Registers 2 and 3".
Mode Register 2
Bit
Description
2B
- Sensor type for group 2 (channels 5 - 8)
2A
1B
- Sensor type for group 1 (channels 1 -4)
1A
With standardized raw values, settings are not relevant and can be chosen in any way desired.
B&R Recommendation: $00
2
Sensor Type
L (default setting)
Invalid Sensor Type Output of: -3276.8
Table 295: Definition of the Sensor Type
461
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
0 0 0 0

Mode Register 3
Bits 2 and 3 as well as 6 and 7 must be assigned with 0. Please refer to the section "Relationship
between Mode Registers 2 and 3".
Mode Register 3
Bit
Description
0
0
Raw value 2 - Group 2: Temperature as standardized raw value
0
0
0 0
7
VS2
- Group 2: Compensation temperature
VS1
0 0
0
VS1
0...... Group 1: Sensor temperature output (default setting)

1...... Group 1: Compensation temperature output in 0.1 C steps 1)
VS2
0...... Group 2: Sensor temperature output (default setting)

1...... Group 2: Compensation temperature output in 0.1 C steps 1)
Raw
Value 1
0...... Group 1: Thermocouple voltage output as compensated temperature in 0.1 C steps (default setting)
1...... Group 1: Thermocouple voltage output as standardized raw value 2)
Raw
Value 2
0...... Group 2: Thermocouple voltage output as compensated temperature in 0.1 C steps (default setting)
1...... Group 2: Thermocouple voltage output as standardized raw value 2)
1) The compensation temperature is either the terminal temperature (bit 5 in the mode register 4 = 0) or the temperature of an external
compensation reference junction (bit 5 in the mode register 4 = 1).
2) It is not possible to output the compensation temperature as a standardized raw value. Standardization is made with 2 V starting
with rev. xx.01.
462

Relationship between Mode Registers 2 and 3
The output format is defined using both these registers.
1) Compensation Temperature Output
2) Thermocouple Voltage Output as Standardized

Raw Value
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3) L (default setting)
4) Sensor Type J
5) Sensor Type K
Table 296: AT660 relationship between mode register 2 and 3
463

Mode Register 4
Selectively switching off (locking) the channels or the compensation temperature reduces the
cycle time.
Bits 6 and 7 must be assigned with 0.
Mode Register 4
Bit
Description
COMPExternal
- External Compensation Temperature
TComp
- Updating the internal compensation temperature locking
C4/8
- Locking channels 4 and 8
C3/7
C2/6
C1/5
0 0
7
C1/5
0 ......Measuring Channels 1 and 5 (default setting)

1 ......Locking channels 1 and 5. The value last measured is retained.
C2/6

C3/7

C4/8

TComp
0 ......The internal compensation temperature (terminal temperature) is constantly updated (default setting)
1 ......The internal compensation temperature is no longer being updated. The values last measured are retained and are used
for terminal compensation temperature.
COMPExternal
0 ......Internal compensation reference junction is active (terminal compensation temperature is used - default setting)
1 ......External reference junction is active (applies to all 8 channels). If the operating mode is selected, Firmware does not use
the sensor measurement values on the module for compensation temperature. Instead, a value is set by the user is used.
These values are written in the I/O area in steps of 0.1 C using "Analog Out" channels 1 - 8.
464

Status Register 1
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
IERR
- Module error
x x x x x x x
IERR
0 ......Data values in the DPR correspond to definitions

1 ......An internal error exists. That means that the data values in the DPR do not correspond to the definitions. Please contact B&R
if this occurs.
Status Register 2, 3 and 4

Mode register settings 2, 3 and 4 are given again status registers 2, 3 and 4. Settings are only
valid if the status register is the same as the mode register.
The respective status register returns a message (mode register) to the application program
(task) when the settings have been transferred completely.
Status Register 2
Status Register 2
Bit
Description
2B
2A
1B
1A
x x x x
7
465
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

Status Register 3
Status Register 3
Bit
Description
x
x
x
x
x x
VS2
VS1
x x
Status Register 4
Status Register 4
Bit
Description
COMPExternal
- External Compensation Temperature
TComp
- Updating the internal compensation temperature locking
C4/8
C3/7
C2/6
C1/5
x x
7
466
B&R 2005 Modules Other Modules General Information
14. Other Modules

The universal mixed module is a combination of digital input/output modules and analog
input/output modules.
The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status LEDs. A status LED labeled
"RUN" indicates that D/A and A/D conversion is active.
Module
UM161
Digital Inputs
16
Type of Inputs
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channels 3 -14
Channels 15 - 16
16-bit event counter or period measurement

Latch input (Comparator input)
Digital inputs
Digital outputs (can also be used as digital inputs)
Nominal Input Voltage
24 VDC
Counter Input, Input 1

Rated Frequency
Latch Input, Input 2

Max. Switching Delay
10 s
Input Delay, inputs 3 - 16

Typical
Maximum
0.6 ms
1 ms
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Number of Inputs
Digital Outputs
Number of Outputs
Switching Voltage
24 VDC
Continuous Current
Output 1 (Channel 15)
10 mA
2A
Analog Inputs
Number of Inputs
Input Signal
10 V
14-bit
Analog Outputs
Number of Outputs
Output Signal
10 V
12-bit
Table 297: General information on other modules
467
B&R 2005 Modules Other Modules UM161
14.2 UM161
The UM161 is a universal analog/digital mixed module. It offers very high component
density using standard 3.5 mm terminal blocks.
Features
4 analog inputs 10 V
3 analog outputs 10 V
14 digital inputs 24 VDC
2 digital outputs 24 VDC (can be also used as digital inputs)
Features
1 potentiometer supply 10 V
The module is equipped with a comparator function, so that it can react quickly to
changing analog inputs.
14.2.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
3UM161.6
2005 universal mixed module, 1x4 analog inputs 10 V,

14-bit, 1x3 analog outputs 10 V, 12-bit, 1x14 digital inputs
24 VDC, 1 ms, 1 digital output 24 VDC, 2 A, 500 s,
1 digital output 24 VDC, 10 mA, 10 s, both outputs can be
used as inputs. Order 2 x TB718 terminal blocks
separately!
Image
7TB718.9
7TB718.91
7TB718:90-02

1.5 mm
7TB718:91-02

1.5 mm
Table 298: UM161 order data
468

Product ID
UM161
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$99
Module Type
B&R 2005 I/O module
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 2 W
Max. 4 W (+1.5 W for potentiometer supply)
Max. 6 W

Number and Type of Potentiometer Voltages
1 Potentiometer supply 10V

Yes
Total
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Electrical Isolation to PLC
0.4%
Temperature Drift
0.5 mV/C
Load
4 x 1 k parallel, total of max. 80 mA
Yes
Analog Inputs
Number of Inputs
Input Signal
Nominal
Min./Max.
-10 to +10 V
-20 to +20 V
14-bit
Data Format
INT

Static
Dynamic
>10 M
3 k/10 nF
50 V
Cut-off Frequency
8 kHz
Conversion Time
<45 s for all 4 inputs
Maximum Error at 25 C
Offset
Gain
4.5 mV
0.05% 1)
Linearity Error
0.9 mV
Temperature Drift
1.5 mV/C
Analog Outputs
Number of Outputs
3 voltage outputs
Output Signal
10 V
Table 299: UM161 technical data
469

Product ID
UM161
12-bit
Data Format
INT
1 k
Load Impedance
Output Response when Power Supply is Switched
On/Off
Conversion Time
Isolation Voltage between Output and Bus
Offset
Gain
Linearity Error
Temperature Drift
An enable relay is switched on at a defined value of 0 V,

Default setting = 10 k between the output terminals using relay contact
<45 s for all 3 outputs
50 V
4.9 mV
0.2% 1)
19.6 mV
1.2 mV/C
Digital inputs
Number of Inputs
Type of Inputs
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channels 3 -14
Channels 15 - 16
Rated Voltage
Nominal
Maximum
Switching Threshold
LOW Range
Switching range
HIGH Range
Wiring
Counter Input, Input 1
Rated Frequency
16
16-bit event counter or period measurement
Latch input (Comparator input)
Digital inputs
Digital outputs (can also be used as digital inputs)
+24 VDC
+30 VDC
Approx. 4mA (IEC 1131-2 type 1)
<5V
5 to 15 V
> 15 V
Sink or source
Latch Input, Input 2

Max. Switching Delay
10 s
Input Delay, Inputs 3 - 16

Typical
Maximum
0.6 ms
1 ms

Voltage Monitoring
50 V
Supply voltage >18 V
Digital Outputs
2 transistor outputs
Rated Current
10 mA
2A
Rated Voltage
24 VDC
Table 299: UM161 technical data (cont.)
470

Product ID
UM161
18 - 30 VDC
Wiring
Source
Yes
Overload Protection
Yes
59 V
Switching Delay 0 to 1
Output 1
Output 2
Max. 10 s
Max. 500 s
Switching Delay 1 to 0
Output 1
Output 2
Max. 10 s
Max. 500 s
Comparator Output
Evaluation
Reaction Time
Output 1 can be set by the comparator logic

< 50 s
Dimensions
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 299: UM161 technical data (cont.)

14.2.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
RUN
Indicates that both the analog/digital converter and digital/analog converter are
running.
DCOK
Lit as long as the supply for the digital inputs is in the defined range (greater
than +18 VDC).
CMP1
Comparator 1 is configured.
CMP2
Comparator 2 is configured.
1 - 14
15 - 16
Using channels 15 and 16 as digital inputs:

Using channels 15 and 16 as digital outputs:
Control status of the corresponding output. Take note that LEDs are also lit in
green in this instance.
Table 300: UM161 status LEDs
471

Figure 170: UM161 connection elements
472

Connection
Assignment
Potentiometer voltage +10 V (for channels 1 and 2)
Potentiometer voltage -10 V (for channels 1 and 2)
+ Analog input 1
- Analog input 1
+ Analog input 2
- Analog input 2
Potentiometer voltage +10 V (for channels 3 and 4)
Potentiometer voltage -10 V (for channels 3 and 4)
+ Analog input 3
10
- Analog input 3
11
+ Analog input 4
12
- Analog input 4
13
+ Analog output 1
14
- Analog output 1 / GND analog signal
15
+ Analog output 2
16
17
+ Analog output 3
18
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 301: UM161 pin assignments for terminal block X1
473

Connection
Assignment
Digital input 1 (counter input or period measurement)
Digital input 2 (Latch input)
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
Digital input 8
Digital input 9
10
Digital input 10
11
Digital input 11
12
Digital input 12
13
Digital input 13
14
Digital input 14
15
Digital input 15 or digital output 1 (10 mA)
16
Digital input 16 or digital output 2 (2 A)
17
18
Table 302: UM161 pin assignments for terminal block X2
474

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Analog Inputs/Outputs
Figure 171: UM161 analog inputs/outputs connection example
Potentiometer Connection
Figure 172: UM161 potentiometer connection example
475

Digital Inputs/Outputs
Figure 173: UM161 digital inputs/outputs connection example

Analog Inputs
Figure 174: UM161 input circuit diagram analog inputs
476

Digital Inputs
Figure 175: UM161 input circuit diagram digital inputs
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Analog Outputs
Figure 176: UM161 output circuit diagram analog outputs
Digital Outputs
Figure 177: UM161 output circuit diagram digital outputs
477

Figure 178: UM161 output circuit diagram potentiometer voltage outputs

Input Voltage 10 V
Converter Value
Input Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
-10 V
$8000
-32768
-1.221 mV
$FFFC
-4
0V
$0000
1.221 mV
$0004
10 V
$7FFC
32764
Table 303: UM161 Relationship between input voltage and converter value
Output Voltage 10 V
Converter Value
Output Voltage
Hexadecimal
Decimal
$8080
-32640
-10 V
$FFF0
-16
-4.902 mV
$0000
0V
$0010
16
4.902 mV
$7F80
32640
10 V
Table 304: UM161 relationship between output voltage and converter value
478

Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
Single Digital Input (Channel x)
tc_global
BOOL
tc_global
INT
Digit. In
1 ... 16
Analog In
Comparator 1 Actual Value
tc_global
INT
2 ... 5
Analog In
tc_global
INT
Analog In
Event Counter or Period Duration
tc_global
INT
Analog In
tc_global
BOOL
Digit. Out
15, 16
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
2 ... 4
Comparator 1 Comparison Value
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
Comparator 1 Switching Channel
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
Status Register 1: Timestamp for Comparator 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 3: Event for Comparator 1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Status Register 5: Timer reference value
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Mode Register 1: Configuration for Comparator 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 3: Acknowledge and Configure Comparator 1 and 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 4: Event counter / period duration
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Table 305: UM161 variable declaration

Analog actual value at the time of the comparator event.
Analog actual value at the time of the comparator event.
Event counter / period duration
16-bit event counter on digital input 1 or period duration (resolution 10 s).
479
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Function

Determines the comparator threshold for comparator 1.
Determines the comparator threshold for comparator 2.
After a comparator event, the switching value is output on the corresponding analog output until
the event is cleared again.
After a comparator event, the switching value is output on the corresponding analog output until
the event is cleared again.
Timer reference value at the time of the comparator event.
Timer reference value at the time of the comparator event.
480

Bits 0 - 4 indicate which input the comparator event has triggered. Bit 7 indicates the status of
the module supply for the digital component (24 VDC). It has the same status in status registers
3 and 4.
Bit
Description
0 ......No supply voltage or supply voltage too low (24 VDC)

1 ...... Supply voltage in the valid range
0 ......Comparator 1 not triggered by external latch input

1 ......Comparator 1 triggered by external latch input
0 ......Comparator 1 not triggered by analog input 4

1 ......Comparator 1 triggered by analog input 4



Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Status Register 3
x x
7
481

Bits 0 - 4 indicate which input the comparator event has triggered. Bit 7 indicates the status of
the module supply for the digital component (24 VDC). It has the same status in status registers
3 and 4.
Status Register 4
Bit
Description
0 ......No supply voltage or supply voltage too low (24 VDC)

1 ...... Supply voltage in the valid range
0 ......Comparator 2 not triggered by external latch input

1 ......Comparator 2 triggered by external latch input




x x
7
Status Register 5: Timer reference value

Free running 8-bit counter. Cycle time 20 s.
482

Along with the comparator source, an analog output can also be configured. The switching
channel is output immediately by this analog output, when a comparator event occurs. It is also
possible to output the switching value on several analog outputs.
Bit
Description
0 ......Switching value 1 not output on analog output 3

1 ......Switching value 1 output on analog output 3


0 ......External latch off

1 ......External latch triggers comparator 1
0 ......Comparator 1 analog input 4 off

1 ......Comparator 1 analog input 4 on



Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 1
483

Along with the comparator source, an analog output can also be configured. The switching
channel is output immediately by this analog output, when a comparator event occurs. It is also
possible to output the switching value on several analog outputs.
Mode Register 2
484
Bit
Description



0 ......External latch off

1 ......External latch triggers comparator 2





Mode Register 3: Acknowledge and Configure Comparators 1 and 2
In this register, the digital outputs are configured and the comparator event is acknowledged.
The comparator event is reset by writing the bits. That means the analog value is output again
on the analog output (no longer the switching value).
Bit
Description
0 ......Comparator 2 not acknowledged

1 ......Comparator 2 acknowledged
0 ......Comparator 2 triggers for value > comparison value

1 ......Comparator 2 triggers for value < comparison value
0 ......Digital output 14 normal operation

1 ......Digital output 14 is switched off by comparator event 2

1 ......Digital output 15 is switched on by comparator event 2
0 ......Comparator 1 not acknowledged

1 ......Comparator 1 acknowledged
0 ......Comparator 1 triggers for value > comparison value

1 ......Comparator 1 triggers for value < comparison value

1 ......Digital output 14 is switched off by comparator event 1

1 ......Digital output 15 is switched on by comparator event 1
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode Register 3
Mode Register 4: Event Counter / Period Duration

The read-out for the digital input 1 can be toggled between event counter and period duration in
this register.
Mode Register 4
Bit
1-7
0
Description
0
0 ...... Period Duration
1 ......Event Counter
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
485
B&R 2005 Modules Communication Modules Overview
15. Communication Modules

15.1 Overview
Module
Description
EX282
2005 ETHERNET Powerlink bus controller, 2 ETHERNET Powerlink interfaces, electrically isolated, power supply module
insert
IF050
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422, network capable, 1 RS232/TTY interface, all interfaces are
electrically isolated
IF060
2005 interface module, 1 insert slot for interface module inserts
IF613
2005 interface module, 3 RS232 interfaces, CPU and IF-module insert
IF621
2005 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, 1 CAN interface, both electrically isolated and network capable, insert for
CPU and IF-modules
IF622
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 RS485/RS422 interfaces: Electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and
IF-module insert
IF661
2005 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically isolated and network capable, transfer protocol: PROFIBUS-DP, CPU
and IF-module insert
IF671
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network capable, 1 CAN interface,
electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and IF-module insert
IF672
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN interfaces, CAN: Electrically isolated, network capable, CPU and
IF-module insert
IF681.95
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, with 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket
IF681.96
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET interface, with 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket
IF686
IF772
2005 aPCI interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN interfaces, max. 500 kbps, CAN: electrically isolated, network
capable, object buffer in send and receive direction. Order 2 x TB704 terminal blocks separately.
NW150
2005 PROFIBUS network module, electrically isolated RS485 interface used to connect to PROFIBUS networks
Table 306: Communication module overview
486
B&R 2005 Modules Communication Modules EX282
15.2 EX282
The EX282 module is a Powerlink bus controller module. It is equipped with an internal hub with
two RJ45 sockets.
The Powerlink bus controller is operated in an expansion slot on power supply module PS465.
The following should be noted:
Only I/O modules are allowed to be operated
The digital mixed module DM455 is not supported
System modules are not supported
Model Number
Short Description
3EX282.6
2005 ETHERNET Powerlink bus controller,

2 ETHERNET Powerlink interfaces, electrically isolated,
power supply module insert
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
15.2.2 Order Data

Figure
487

Product ID
EX282
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Slot
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 3.8 W
--Max. 3.8 W
Peripheral
Diagnosis LEDs
Yes
Station Number Dial
For setting the Powerlink station number
ETHERNET Powerlink Interface

Standard (Compliance)
ANSI/IEEE 802.3
Data Rate
100 Mbps
Signal
100 Base-T
Port Design
Internal 2x hub
2 x shielded RJ45 port
Line Length Between Two Stations

(Segment Length)
Max. 100 m
Figure 179: EX282 operational and connection elements
488

15.2.5 Status Display
Status of I/O Modules
Figure
LED
Color
Description
RUN
Green
Blinking ... No I/O-module registered

Lit .... At least one I/O-module is registered
I/O
Red
The LED is lit when a registered I/O-module is faulty or not

available.
Table 309: EX282 status display

LED
Status
Color
Red/Green
Description
See "Status LED", on page 489.
Tx
Orange
The Powerlink station is sending data.
Rx 1 + Rx 2
Orange
The RX LED is always lit when Powerlink activity is

present on the bus.
L/C 1 + L/C 2
Red/Green
Green ... Link

Red ...... Collision
Table 310: EX282 status display
Status LED
Boot Phase
The red LED is lit during booting. After selecting the boot block, the LED indicates which block
is being booted from:
Status LED Red Blinking
Boot Block
Blinking Slowly Twice
Blinking Slowly Three Times
Table 311: EX282 boot block indicator
After the initialization routines are executed without errors, the status LED changes from red to
green.
489
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure

Operation
During operation, the status LED indicate the following states:
Status LED
Green
Red
Status of the Powerlink Station
On
Off
The Powerlink station is running with no errors.
Off
On
A fatal system error has occurred. The error type can be read using the PLC log book. It concerns an
irreparable problem. The system cannot properly carry out its tasks. This status can only be changed
by resetting the module.
Blinking Alternately
Off
Powerlink Manager failed.
Blinking
System failure. The red blinking LED signals an error code (see Section"System Failure Error Codes",
on page 490).
Table 312: EX282 status LED
System Failure Error Codes

The error is displayed via the red status LED using four switch-on phases. The switch-on phases
are either 150 ms or 600 ms long. Error code outputs are repeated cyclically after 2 seconds has
passed.
Legend:
........... 150 ms
........... 600 ms
Pause ... 2 s delay
Error Description
Error Code Displayed by Red Status LED
Stack Overflow
Pause
Pause
RAM Error
Pause
Pause
Undefined Address:
Access to a Non-Existent Address.
Pause
Pause
Instruction Fetch Memory Abort:

Invalid Memory Access During Instruction Fetch (e.g. UINT access of an uneven
address).
Pause
Pause
Data Access Memory Abort:

Invalid Memory Access During Data Access (e.g. UINT access of an uneven address).
Pause
Pause
Error when Programming the FPGA.
Pause
Pause
Invalid Station Number (e.g. $00 for Controller Stations, and $FE, $FF)
Pause
Pause
Table 313: EX282 system failure error codes
490

15.2.6 ETHERNET Powerlink Station Number
Figure 180: EX282 station number dial
The station number for the Powerlink station is set using both number switches. Station numbers
are permitted between $01 and $FD.
$00
$01 - $FD
Description
Reserved for manager station, switch position is not permitted.
Station number for Powerlink station.
$FE
Reserved, switch position is not permitted.
$FF
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Switch Position
Table 314: EX282 station number
491

15.2.7 RJ45 Ports
Figure 181: EX282 RJ45 ports

Pin
Assignment
RXD
RXD\
TXD
Termination
Termination
TXD\
Termination
Termination
Table 315: EX282 pin assignments for RJ45 port

RXD ... Receive Data
TXD ... Transmit Data
15.2.8 SG3
The EX282 module is not supported at the moment on SG3 targets.
15.2.9 SG4
The firmware update takes place automatically. The firmware is a component of the PLC
operating system B&R Automation Runtime.
492

The EX282 module is equipped with a module fastener. The module fastener prevents the power
supply from falling out of the bus controller during transport.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
power supply and EX282 at the same height as the sloped marking (see figure). By
EX282, the bus controller is taken out from its bracing and can be removed from the power
supply.
493
B&R 2005 Modules Communication Modules IF050
15.3 IF050
PLC interface modules enable data transfer with other devices (other PLCs). This is especially
important for complex applications, if e.g. the CPU's interfaces are not sufficient.
Due to the low cable requirements and sufficient worldwide standardization, serial interfaces are
better suited for communication than parallel interfaces.
The following interfaces are available with the IF050 interface module. Operating the interfaces
takes place using software, which is available on request from B&R.
Interface
Description
RS232
Communication is made using at least three lines (send, receive and protective ground). For synchronizing the transmitter
and receiver (handshake), additional lines can be used. The coverage of the RS232 interface is limited to short distances.
Characteristics :
- Level: +3 V to +15 V / -3 V to -15 V

- Short circuit protection
- 19200 Baud with 15 m cable length
TTY
Communication takes place using a set current (20 mA). The TTY interface is therefore also called a current loop interface.
Using applied current, a greater noise immunity over the same distance is achieved (in industrial environments up to 200 m).
The maximum transfer rate is 2400 baud. The TTY interface requires four lines.
RS422
With this interface, send and receive lines and also handshake lines are doubled (differential signal). The distance that can
be achieved with an RS422 interface is significantly greater than the RS232 interface and is a maximum of 1200 m depending
on the baud rate.
RS485
This type of interface can be used in a network and is therefore best suited for industrial applications. The interface can handle
32 transmitters and receivers and two terminating resistors on one bus segment.
Table 316: IF050 interface description
494

15.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface module
3IF050.6
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface,

1 RS485/RS422, network capable, 1 RS232/TTY interface,
all interfaces are electrically isolated
Accesories
0G0001.00-090
0G1000.00-090
Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks,

remote I/O
0AC916.9

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Additional accessories see sections "Accessories" and "Manuals".

Product ID
IF050
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$60
Processor
RISC
Dual Ported RAM (DPR)
576 bytes
Number of Interfaces
3
RS232
RS485/RS422 1)
RS232/TTY 1)
Input Filter / Protective Circuit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interface - PLC
Interface - Interface
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9-pin
DSUB plug
9-pin
DSUB socket
9-pin
DSUB plug
Type
Design
495

Product ID
IF050
Maximum Distance
Handshake Lines
Baud Rates1)
Network Capable
15 m / 19200 Baud
1200 m (without repeater)
RS232: 15 m / 19200 Baud

TTY: 300 m
DCD, DTR, DSR,

RTS, CTS, RI
---
RS232: RTS, CTS

TTY: ---
Max. 64 kBaud
Max. 347 kBaud
RS232: Max. 64 kBaud

TTY: Max. 2.4 kBaud
No
Yes
(with a max. of 32 transmitters,
32 receivers and
two terminating resistors
can be loaded per bus
segment)
No
Data Formats 1)
5 to 8 data bits, parity yes / no / even / odd ,

1 / 1.5 / 2 stop bits
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 7 W
--Max. 7 W
Dimensions

1) Can be configured using software.
15.3.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
Tx y
Data is sent using interface Y.
Rx y
Data is received using interface Y.
Table 319: IF050 status LEDs
496

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Three interfaces are located behind the module door of the IF050 module. These interfaces can
be configured using software.
497

The electrically isolated IF1 application interface can be used for connecting a fiber optic cable.
The fiber optic cable is supplied with a short circuit proof 4.8 V voltage supply on pin 4 of the
DSUB plug.
The status LEDs Rx and Tx are lit during data transfer via the RS485 interface.
Cable Length: Max. 15 m
Baud Rate:
Max. 64 kBaud
Interface
RS232
Pin Assignments
Pin
RS232
DCD
RXmD
Data Carrier Detect

Receive Signal
TXD
DTR
Transmit Signal+
Data Terminal Ready (+4.8 V / 150 mA)
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
RI
Ring Indicator
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 320: IF050 RS232 Interface (IF1)
498

15.3.7 RS232/TTY Interface (IF2)
The application interface is electrically isolated. The configuration is made using software in the
application program.
RS232 Interface
Cable Length: Max. 15 m / 19200 Baud
Baud Rate:
Max. 64 kBaud
TTY interface
Cable Length: Max. 300 m
Baud Rate:
Max. 2.4 kBaud
Pin Assignments
Pin
RS232
TTY
RXD
Current 1
TXD
TXD
4
5
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Interface
RS232/TTY
RXD
GND
GND
TXD Ret
RTS
CTS
Current 2
RXD Ret
9-pin DSUB plug
Table 321: IF050 RS232/TTY interface (IF2)
499

15.3.8 RS485/RS422 interface (IF3)
The 5 V supply is electrically isolated and is used for connecting terminating resistors (for
networking several RS485 interfaces).
The electrically isolated RS485/RS422 interface can be used for connecting a fiber optic cable.
The fiber optic cable is supplied with an electrically isolated 5 V voltage supply on pin 6 of the
DSUB socket.
Cable Length: Max. 1,200 m
Baud Rate:
Max. 347 kBaud
Interface
Pin Assignments
Pin
RS485/RS422
RS485
RS422
DATA
RXD
1
2
3
TXD
4
5
GND
GND
+5 V / 200 mA
+5 V / 200 mA
7
8
TXD\
DATA\
RXD\
9
9-pin DSUB socket
Table 322: IF050 RS485/RS422 interface (IF3)
500
15.4 IF060
The IF060 interface module is a system module and is equipped with a insert slot for interface
modules.
Therefore, the IF060 allows every B&R SYSTEM 2005 CPU to integrate different bus or network
systems in the B&R SYSTEM 2005 via the system bus.
The interface data must be prepared in the CPU. The IF060 module provides the physical
connection to the insert modules.
Multiple IF060 interface modules can be inserted on the main backplane as required. The
maximum number of IF060 modules that can be used depends on the type of interface module
inserted, the baud rate used and the performance of the CPU.
Module
Description
3IF613.9
3IF621.9
3IF622.9
3IF661.9
3IF671.9
3IF672.9
3IF686.9
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The following interface module inserts can be used with the IF060
Table 323: IF060 interface module inserts
501

15.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3IF060.6
2005 interface module, 1 insert slot for interface module

inserts
Image
The following interface module inserts can be used with the IF060:
Model Number
Description
3IF613.9
Three RS232 interfaces
3IF621.9
One RS485/RS422 interface and one CAN interface
3IF622.9
One RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces
3IF661.9
One RS485 interface (PROFIBUS-DP Slave)
3IF671.9
One RS232 interface, one RS485/RS422 interface and one

CAN interface
3IF672.9
One RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces

Product ID
IF060
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$63
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
No
Insert Slot
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions

Max. 1 W
--Max. 1 W
502
15.5 IF613
The IF613 interface module can be operated e.g. in an interface module slot on the CP260 or in
the IF260 / IF060.
The module is equipped with three RS232 interfaces and is used to connect several peripheral
devices which cannot be networked (modem, printer, barcode reader, terminals, etc.).
15.5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface module
3IF613.9
2005 interface module, 3 RS232 interfaces, CPU and

IF-module insert
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
503

Product ID
IF613
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Slot
Yes
Insert e.g. in CP260, IF260, IF060
Interfaces
3 x RS232
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.2 W
--Max. 1.2 W

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
RS232
UART Type ST16C654
64 bytes in send and receive direction
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
15 m / 19200 Baud
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
Yes / No / Even / Odd
1/2
Application Interfaces IF2 and IF3

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
RS232
UART Type ST16C654
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
15 m / 19200 Baud
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
1/2
504

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Status LEDs via the interfaces indicate whether data is being received (RXD) or sent (TXD).

Interface
RS232
Description
Pin Assignments
The standard RS232 interface is not

electrically isolated.
LEDs show on the interface whether data
is being received (RXD) or sent (TXD).
The shield is connected to the DSUB
connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
9-pin DSUB plug
115.2 kBaud
15 m
Pin
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
505

15.5.6 RS232 Interfaces (IF2 and IF3)
Interface
RS232
Description
Pin Assignments
Pin

connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
9-pin DSUB plug
115.2 kBaud
15 m
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
NC
GND
NC
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
Ground
Table 329: IF613 RS232 interfaces (IF2 and IF3)
506
15.6 IF621
the IF260 / IF060.
The module is equipped with an RS485/RS422 interface and a CAN interface.
The RS485/RS422 interface is used mostly for visualization and networking based on different
protocols (e.g. NET2000).
15.6.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface Module
2005 interface module, 1 RS485/RS422 interface, 1 CAN
interface, both electrically isolated and network capable,
insert for CPU and IF-modules
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3IF621.9
Accessories
0G1000.00-090

remote I/O
0AC916.9

507

Product ID
IF621
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Slot
Interfaces
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Yes
1 x RS485/RS422
1 x CAN
Max. 1.5 W
--Max. 1.5 W

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
IF1 - PLC
IF1 - IF2
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
Network Capable
Bus Termination Resistor
RS485/RS422
UART Type ST16C650
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Yes
Yes
1,200 m
115.2 kBaud
Yes
External T-connector (0G1000.00-090)

Type
Controller
Design
CAN
Controller 82527
4-pin multipoint connector
IF2 - PLC
IF1 - IF2
Yes
Yes
Maximum Distance
1,000 m
Maximum Baud Rate

Bus Length 60 m
Bus Length 200 m
Bus Length 1,000 m
Network Capable
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Yes
Optional (externally wired)
508

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

The CAN node number is set with the two hex switches. CAN node numbers can also be set
using the software.
509

15.6.6 RS485/RS422 Interfaces (IF1)
Interface
Description
RS485/RS422
Pin Assignments
The RS485/RS422 interface is electrically

isolated.
Pin
RS485
Shield
Shield

res.
TXD 1)
DATA
RXD
res.
res.

socket's housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
1,200 m
9-pin DSUB socket
RS422
GND
GND
5 V / 50 mA
5 V / 50 mA
res.
TXD\ 1)
DATA\
RXD\
res.
res.
Table 332: IF621 RS485/RS422 interfaces (IF1)

1) RS422 send data is TRISTATE capable.

A 4-pin terminal block and an 120 bus termination resistor are included in the delivery. The
resistor can be inserted between pin 1 and pin 3.
Interface
CAN
Description
Pin Assignments
The electrically isolated CAN interface is a

4-pin multipoint connector.
Terminal
CAN
CAN_H

GND
CAN_L
Shield
Max. Baud Rate:

500 kBit/s Bus Length:
60 m
200 m
1,000 m
4-pin Multipoint connector
Table 333: IF621 CAN interface (IF2)
510
15.7 IF622
the IF260 / IF060.
The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and two RS485/RS422 interfaces.
15.7.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface Module
3IF622.9

2 RS485/RS422 interfaces: Electrically isolated, network
capable, CPU and IF-module insert
0AC916.9

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
511

Product ID
IF622
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Slot
Interfaces
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Yes
1 x RS232
2 x RS485/RS422
Max. 1.8 W
--Max. 1.8 W

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
RS232
UART Type ST16C654
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
15 m / 19200 Baud
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
1/2

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
Network Capable
Connection
RS485/RS422
UART Type ST16C654
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Yes
1,200 m
115.2 kBaud
Yes
Via active RS485 bus termination (model number 0AC916.9)
External, integrated in active RS485 bus termination
512

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
513

Interface
Application Interface
RS232
Description
Pin Assignments
Pin

connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
15 m
9-pin DSUB plug
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
15.7.6 RS485/RS422 Interface (IF2 and IF3)

Interface
RS485/RS422
Description
Pin Assignments

isolated.
Pin
RS485
NC
NC
LEDs above the interface indicate

whether data is being received (RXD) or
sent (TXD).
res.
TXD 1)
DATA
RXD
NC
NC
GND
GND
+5 V / 50 mA
+5 V / 50 mA
res.
TXD\ 1)
DATA\
RXD\
NC
NC

socket's housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
9-pin DSUB socket
115.2 kBaud
1,200 m
RS422
Table 337: IF622 RS485/RS422 interface (IF2 and IF3)

1) RS422 send data is TRISTATE capable
514
15.8 IF661
the IF260 / IF060.
The module is equipped with an electrically isolated RS485 interface. The PROFIBUS DP format
is used as transfer protocol. The B&R 2005 PLC can therefore be connected to a PROFIBUS
DP network as a slave.
15.8.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface Module
2005 interface module, 1 RS485 interface, electrically
isolated and network capable, transfer protocol:
PROFIBUS-DP, CPU and IF-module insert
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3IF661.9
Accessories
0G1000.00-090

remote I/O
0AC916.9

515

Product ID
IF661
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Slot
Interface
1 x RS485 (PROFIBUS-DP slave)
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 2 W
--Max. 2 W

Type
Controller
RAM
Transfer Protocol
Design
RS485
ASIC SPC3
1.5 KB
PROFIBUS-DP
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Yes
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
Bus Length <100 m
Bus Length <200 m
Bus Length <400 m
Bus Length <1,000 m
Network Capable
1,000 m
12 MBit/s
1.5 MBit/s
500 kBit/s
187.5 kBit/s
Yes
External T-connector
516

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
15.8.5 Station Number Dial

The RS485 interface station number is set up using both BCD dials.
517

Interface
RS485
Description
Pin Assignments
The electrically isolated RS485 interface

is used for coupling to a PROFIBUS-DP
network.
Pin
RS485
Shield
NC
DATA
CTRL
1)

socket's housing.
GND
Electrically Isolated Supply
Max. Baud Rate: 12 MBaud
5 V / 50 mA
Electrically Isolated Supply
NC
DATA\
CTRL\
9-pin DSUB socket
1)
Table 340: IF661 RS485 interface (IF1)

1) Directional switch for external repeater
518
15.9 IF671
the IF260 / IF060.
The module is equipped with an RS232 interface, an RS485/RS422 interface and a CAN
interface.
15.9.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface Module
1 RS485/RS422 interface, electrically isolated, network
capable, 1 CAN interface, electrically isolated, network
capable, CPU and IF-module insert
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3IF671.9
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
0G1000.00-090

remote I/O
0AC916.9

519

Product ID
IF671
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Slot
Interfaces
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Yes
1 x RS232
1 x RS485/RS422
1 x CAN
Max. 2 W
--Max. 2 W

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
RS232
UART Type ST16C650
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
15 m / 19200 Baud
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
1/2

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
IF1 - PLC
IF1 - IF2
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
Network Capable
RS485/RS422
UART Type ST16C650
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Yes
Yes
1,200 m
115.2 kBaud
Yes
External T-connector (0G1000.00-090)
520

Product ID
IF671

Type
CAN
Controller
Controller 82527
Design
4-pin multipoint connector
Yes
Maximum Distance
1,000 m
Maximum Baud Rate

Bus Length 60 m
Bus Length 200m
Bus Length 1,000 m
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Network Capable
Yes
CAN node number
Can be set using software
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

Status LEDs indicate whether data is being received (RXD) or sent (TXD).
521

Interface
RS232
Description
Pin Assignments
Pin

connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
15 m
9-pin DSUB plug
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
15.9.6 RS485/RS422 Interface (IF2)

Interface
RS485/RS422
Description
Pin Assignments

isolated.
Pin
RS485
Shield
Shield
LEDs below the interface indicate whether

data is being received (RXD) or sent
(TXD).
res.
TXD 1)
DATA
RXD
res.
res.
GND
GND
5 V / 50 mA
5 V / 50 mA
res.
TXD\ 1)
DATA\
RXD\
res.
res.

socket's housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
9-pin DSUB socket
115.2 kBaud
1,200 m
RS422
Table 344: IF671 RS485/RS422 interface (IF2)

1) RS422 send data is TRISTATE capable.
522

A 4-pin terminal block and an 120 bus termination resistor are included in the delivery. The
resistor can be inserted between pin 1 and pin 3.
Interface
CAN
Description
Pin Assignments
The electrically isolated CAN interface is a

4-pin multipoint connector.
Terminal
CAN
CAN_H

GND
CAN_L
Shield
Max. Baud Rate:

500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Bus Length:
60 m
Bus Length: 200 m
Bus Length: 1,000 m
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 345: IF671 CAN interface (IF3)
523
15.10 IF672
the IF260 / IF060.
The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces.
15.10.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface Module
3IF672.9
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN

interfaces, CAN: Electrically isolated, network capable,
CPU and IF-module insert
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
524

Product ID
IF672
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Slot
Interfaces
1 x RS232
2 x CAN
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.8 W
--Max. 1.8 W

Type
RS232
Controller
UART Type ST16C650

Design
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
FIFO
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
15 m / 19200 Baud
Maximum Baud Rate
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
1/2

Type
CAN
Controller
Controller 82527
Design
2 x 4-pin multipoint connector
to PLC
Between Interfaces
Yes
Yes
Maximum Distance
1,000 m
Maximum Baud Rate

Bus Length 60 m
Bus Length 200 m
Bus Length 1,000 m
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Network Capable
Yes
525

Status LEDs show for the IF1 interface whether data is being received (RXD) or sent (TXD).
Both CAN interfaces have a status LED that indicates when data is being sent.

The node numbers for the first two CAN interface (IF2) are set with the two hex switches. The
following formula is used to set the second CAN interface (IF3):
Node number CAN 2 (IF3) = Node number CAN 1 (IF2) + 1
The CAN node number can also be set using the software.
526

Interface
Description
RS232
Pin Assignments

connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
15 m
9-pin DSUB plug
Pin
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
15.10.7 Interfaces CAN 1 and CAN 2 (IF2 and IF3)

Two 4-pin terminal block and two 120 bus termination resistors are included in the delivery.
The resistors can be installed between pin 1 and pin 3 or between pin 5 and pin 7.
Interface
Description
CAN 1 + CAN 2
Pin Assignments
The electrically isolated CAN interfaces

IF2 and IF3 are 8-pin multipoint
connectors.
The status LED CAN 1 or CAN 2 are lit
when data is sent to the corresponding
CAN interface.
Max. Baud Rate:
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Bus Length:
60 m
Bus Length:
200 m
Bus Length: 1,000 m
Terminal
CAN 1 and CAN 2
CAN_H1
GND1
CAN_L1
Shield 1
CAN_H2
GND2
CAN_L2
Shield 2
Table 349: IF672 interfaces CAN 1 and CAN 2 (IF2 and IF3)
527
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
15.11 IF681
the IF260.
The module is equipped with an RS232 interface and an ETHERNET interface.
The IF681 module is available in two versions. The modules differ from one another with regard
to their ETHERNET connection:
Model Number
ETHERNET Connection
3IF681.95
10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket
3IF681.96
10BASE-T: Twisted Pair RJ45 socket
15.11.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface Modules
3IF681.95
3IF681.95
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET

interface, with 10BASE2 CHEAPERNET BNC socket
3IF681.96
2005 interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 1 ETHERNET

interface, with 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket
3IF681.96
Accessories
0G0001.00-090
528

Product ID
IF681.95
IF681.96
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Slot
Insert e.g. in CP260, IF260
Interfaces
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
1 x RS232
1 x ETHERNET
Max. 2.4 W
--Max. 2.4 W
Max. 1.65 W
--Max. 1.65 W

Type
RS232
Controller
UART Type ST16C650

Design
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
FIFO
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
15 m / 19200 Baud
Maximum Baud Rate
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
1/2

Type
Design
ETHERNET
10BASE2: CHEAPERNET BNC socket
10BASE-T: twisted pair RJ45 socket

Yes
Controller
Controller AM79C960
Send and receive buffer
128 KB
Maximum Baud Rate
10 MBit/s
Bus Capable
Yes
529

15.11.5 Station Number Dial

The INA2000 station number for the ETHERNET interface is set with both BCD dials.
530

RS232
Description
Pin Assignments

connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
9-pin DSUB plug
115.2 kBaud
15 m
Pin
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
DSR
Data Set Ready
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
Table 352: IF681 RS232 interface (IF1)
15.11.7 Application Interface (IF2)

IF2 is an ETHERNET interface. The connection is made for each module using a 10BASE2
CHEAPERNET BNC socket or a 10BASE-T Twisted Pair RJ45 socket.
531
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Interface
15.12 IF686
The module IF686 is a Powerlink interface module. It can be used as a manager or bus controller
module. The connection is made via an RJ45 port.
15.12.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3IF686.9
2005 interface module, 1 ETHERNET Powerlink

interface, manager or controller function, electrically
isolated
Figure

Product ID
IF686
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Slot
Interface
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
In preparation
1 x ETHERNET Powerlink
Max. 1.76 W
--Max. 1.76 W
532

Product ID
IF686

Standard (Compliance)
ANSI/IEEE 802.3
In/Out Buffer
11 KB
Data Rate
100 Mbps
Signal
100 Base-T
Port Design
Shielded RJ45 port
Line Length Between Two Stations

(Segment Length)
Max. 100 m
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
15.12.5 Status Display

Figure
LED
St
Color
Red/Green
Description
See "Status LED", on page 534.
Tx
Orange
The Powerlink station is sending data.
Rx
Orange
The Rx LED is always lit when Powerlink activity is present on the bus.
L/C
Red/Green
Green ... Link

Red ...... Collision
Table 355: IF686 status display
533

Status LED
Boot Phase
The red LED is lit during booting. After selecting the boot block, the LED indicates which block
is being booted from:
Status LED Red Blinking
Boot Block
Blinking slowly twice
Blinking Slowly Three Times
Table 356: IF686 boot block indicator
After the initialization routines are executed without errors, the status LED changes from red to
green.
Operation
During operation, the status LED indicate the following states:
Status LED
Green
Red
Status of the Powerlink Station
On
Off
The Powerlink station is running with no errors.
Off
On
A fatal system error has occurred. The error type can be read using the PLC log book. It concerns an
irreparable problem. The system cannot properly carry out its tasks. This status can only be changed
by resetting the module.
Blinking Alternately
Off
Blinking
Powerlink Manager failed. This error code can only occur in bus controller operation. i.e. the set station
number lies within the range $01 - $FD.
System failure. The red blinking LED signals an error code (see Section "System Failure Error Codes",
on page 535).
Table 357: IF686 status LED
534

System Failure Error Codes
The error is displayed via the red status LED using four switch-on phases. The switch-on phases
are either 150 ms or 600 ms long. Error code outputs are repeated cyclically after 2 seconds has
passed.
Error Description
Error Code Displayed by Red Status LED
Stack Overflow
Pause
Pause
RAM Error
Pause
Pause
Undefined Address:
Access to a Non-Existent Address.
Pause
Pause
Instruction Fetch Memory Abort:

Invalid Memory Access During Instruction Fetch (e.g. UINT access of an uneven
address).
Pause
Pause
Data Access Memory Abort:

Invalid Memory Access During Data Access (e.g. UINT access of an uneven address).
Pause
Pause
Error when Programming the FPGA.
Pause
Pause
Invalid Station Number (e.g. $FE or $FF)
Pause
Pause
Table 358: IF686 system failure error codes
15.12.6 ETHERNET Powerlink Station Number
Figure 192: IF686 station number switch
The station number for the Powerlink station is set using both number switches. Station numbers
are permitted between $00 and $FD.
Switch Position
$00
$01 - $FD
Description
Operated as manager station.
Station number for Powerlink station. Operated as controller station.
$FE
$FF
Table 359: IF686 station number
535
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
........... 150 ms
........... 600 ms
Pause ... 2 s delay
Legend:

15.12.7 ETHERNET Powerlink interface
Figure 193: IF686 ETHERNET Powerlink interface

Pin
Assignment
RXD
RXD\
TXD
Termination
Termination
TXD\
Termination
Termination
Table 360: IF686 pin assignment for ETHERNET Powerlink interface

RXD ... Receive Data
TXD ... Transmit Data
15.12.8 Firmware Update

The firmware update takes place automatically via the CPU (see online help in B&R Automation
Studio: Powerlink - Firmware Update). If an IF686 is operated in controller mode, then it can
only be updated locally and not via the Powerlink network.
SG3
The firmware update takes place automatically if the Powerlink library and the data object
plfif686.br are present in the PLC.
SG4
No firmware update for the IF686 module is supported at the moment.
536
15.13 IF772
The IF772 interface module is an aPCI module and can be installed in all corresponding interface
module slots e.g. in the CP360.
The module is equipped with a modem capable RS232 interface and two CAN interfaces with
their own object buffers in send and receive direction.
15.13.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Interface module
2005 aPCI interface module, 1 RS232 interface, 2 CAN
interfaces, max. 500 kbps, CAN: electrically isolated,
network capable, object buffer in send and receive
direction. Order 2 x TB704 terminal blocks separately.
0TB704.9
Accessory, terminal block, 4-pin, screw clamps, 1.5 mm
0TB704.91
Accessory, terminal block, 4-pin, cage clamps, 2.5 mm
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
3IF772.9
Accessories
0G0001.00-090

The 4-pin terminal block TB704 is not included in the delivery.
537

Product ID
IF772
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Slot
aPCI insert
Interfaces
1 x RS232
2 x CAN
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 2.1 W
--Max. 2.1 W

Type
Controller
FIFO
Design
RS232
UART Type 16C550 compatible
9-pin DSUB plug
No
Yes
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
15 m / 19200 Baud
115.2 kBaud
Handshake Lines
RTS, CTS
Network Capable
No
Data Formats
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
5 to 8
1/2

Type
Controller
Design
to PLC
Between Interfaces
Maximum Distance
Maximum Baud Rate
Bus Length 60 m
Bus Length 200 m
Bus Length 1,000 m
Network Capable
CAN
Controller SJA 1000
2 x 4-pin multipoint connector
Yes
Yes
1,000 m
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Yes
538

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Both CAN interfaces have a status LED that indicates when data is being sent.

The node numbers for the first two CAN interface (IF2) are set with the two hex switches. The
following formula is used to set the second CAN interface (IF3):
Node number CAN 2 (IF3) = Node number CAN 1 (IF2) + 1
The CAN node numbers can also be set by the software (in preparation).
539

Interface
Description
RS232
Pin Assignments
Pin

connectors housing.
Max. Baud Rate:
Max. Cable Length:
115.2 kBaud
15 m
9-pin DSUB plug
RS232
NC
RXD
Receive Signal
TXD
Transmit Signal
NC
GND
NC
RTS
Request To Send
CTS
Clear To Send
NC
Ground
15.13.7 Interfaces CAN 1 and CAN 2 (IF2 and IF3)

Two 120 terminating resistors are included with delivery. The resistors can be installed
between pin 1 and pin 3 or between pin 5 and pin 7.
Interface
Description
CAN 1 + CAN 2
Pin Assignments
The electrically isolated CAN interfaces

IF2 and IF3 are 8-pin multipoint
connectors.
The status LED CAN 1 or CAN 2 are lit
when data is sent to the corresponding
CAN interface.
Max. Baud Rate:
500 kBit/s
250 kBit/s
50 kBit/s
Bus Length:
60 m
Bus Length:
200 m
Bus Length: 1,000 m
Terminal
CAN 1 and CAN 2
CAN_H1
GND1
CAN_L1
Shield 1
CAN_H2
GND2
CAN_L2
Shield 2
Table 364: IF772 CAN 1 and CAN 2 interfaces (IF2 and IF3)
540
B&R 2005 Modules Communication Modules NW150
15.14 NW150
The PROFIBUS network (FMS) is used for communication between PROFIBUS capable I/O
components, such as PLC components, panels and industrial PCs (e.g. PROVIT from B&R).
The NW150 PROFIBUS module is operated using software, which is available from B&R.
15.14.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
3NW150.60-1
2005 PROFIBUS network module, electrically isolated

RS485 interface used to connect to PROFIBUS networks

remote I/O
0AC916.9

Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Accessories
0G1000.00-090
Table 365: NW150 order data
541

Product ID
C-UL-US Listed
B&R ID Code
Serial Interface
Design
Baud Rates
9.6 kBit/s
19.2 kBit/s
93.75 kBit/s
187.5 kBit/s
500 kBit/s
PROFIBUS Data
Transfer Protocol
Access Procedure
Number of Stations
Topology
Transfer Media
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Dimensions
NW150
Yes
$10
RS485
9-pin DSUB socket
Yes
Max. 1,200 m
Max. 1,200 m
Max. 1,200 m
Max. 1,000 m
Max. 400 m
According to PROFIBUS standard, DIN 19245 parts 1 and 2 (FMS)
Token passing principle with underlying master/slave principle
Max. 127 (with repeater)
Physical bus
Direct
Max. 7 W
--Max. 7 W
Table 366: NW150 technical data
542

15.14.4 Status LEDs
LED
Description
RUN
Network processor is initialized by CPU's PLC.
ERROR
Error
CONNECT
At least one connection is established.
COMM
Connection is established and PROFIBUS services are

being processed.
Tx
Data is being sent.
Rx
Data is being received.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Image
Table 367: NW150 status LEDs
543

The number switch for setting the station address, the baud rate and the connection socket for
the RS485 interface are located behind the module door.
Figure 195: NW150 operational and connection elements
544
Figure 196: NW150 number switch
Baud Rate
The lower number switch is used to set the baud rate which allows the transfer to take place via
PROFIBUS.
The following baud rates can be set:
Baud Rate Switch
Position
Baud Rate
9.6 kBit/s
19.2 kBit/s
93.75 kBit/s
187.5 kBit/s
500 kBit/s
Table 368: NW150 baud rates
Station Address
The two upper number switches are used to set the station address for the network module. The
station is accessed using this address.
545
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
15.14.6 Number Switch

The interface is electrically isolated. The status LEDs Rx and Tx are lit during data transfer via
Max. Distance:
1,200 m
Interface
Pin Assignments
RS485
Pin
RS485
Shield
2
3
DATA
Data
CTRL
Transmit enable
GND
5 V / 200 mA
7
8
DATA\
Data\
CTRL\
Transmit Enable\
9-pin DSUB socket
Table 369: NW150 RS485 interface
15.14.8 Wiring a PROFIBUS System

The wiring for PROFIBUS is also used for the remote I/O bus. Information concerning
specifications for the bus cable and wiring can be found in Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 2.1.3
"Remote I/O Bus", on page 58.
546
B&R 2005 Modules Counter and Positioning Modules Overview
16. Counter and Positioning Modules

16.1 Overview
Module
Description
NC150
2005 counter module, 2 inputs for incremental encoder, 32-bit, input frequency 100 kHz, encoder supply 5 to 30 VDC,
2 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12-bit, 8-pin. Terminal block is included in the delivery.
NC154
2005 axis controller, 3 axes. Each axis has the following data: Input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32-bit,
encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs 24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A, 1 analog output
+/- 10 V, 12-bit, 12-pin. Order 3 x TB162 terminal blocks separately.
NC157
2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs, 24 VDC, sink, 4-pin terminal block
NC352
B&R 2005 transducer module with 3 pulse interfaces, 3 digital inputs (24 V DC) (can be configured as event counter, for gate
and frequency measurement and as A/B counter with external count frequency option) and also one digital output (24 V DC).
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 370: Counter and Positioning Module Overview
547
B&R 2005 Modules Counter and Positioning Modules NC150
16.2 NC150
The NC150 counter module is mainly used for positioning tasks. The most important areas of
use are the single or dual axis controller and calculating path and position.
16.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3NC150.6
2005 counter module, 2 inputs for incremental encoder, 32bit, input frequency 100 kHz, encoder supply 5 to 30 VDC,
2 analog outputs +/- 10 V, 12-bit, 8-pin. Terminal block is
Image
Table 371: NC150 order data
548

Product ID
NC150
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$98
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Status Display
LEDs
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 1.5 W
Max. 3.5 W
Max. 5 W
Encoder 1 and 2
Two 9-pin DSUB sockets
Encoder Inputs
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Design of the Signal Encoder

Connections
Symmetric and asymmetric
Input - PLC
Input - Input
Yes
No
Encoder Supply
Module Requirements
5 to 30 V external
Typically 40 mA at 5 V / 120 mA at 30 V
Input Filter
2 times can be set using software
Input Frequency
Short Filter Time
Long Filter Time
Max. 100 kHz

Max. 20 kHz
Counter Frequency with 4x Evaluation
Max. 400 kHz
Phase Offset between Counter Channels

A and B
90 45
Counters
Amount
Counter Size
Operating Modes 1)
2
32-bit
Incremental (4x, 2x and 1x evaluation) up/down counter
Analog Outputs
Amount
Output Voltage
-10 V to +10 V
12-bit
10 mA (load 1 k)
Max. Load per Output

Conversion Time for All Outputs
35 s
Short Circuit Protection (current limit)
Current limit to >20 mA
Table 372: NC150 technical data
549

Product ID
NC150
Precision
0.5%
1.0%
Output - PLC
Output - Output
Counter Channels - Analog Outputs
Yes
No
Yes
Dimensions

1) Can be selected using software.
16.2.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
UP
Counter counts upwards.
DOWN
Counter counts downwards.
REF
Counter is referenced.
GND OFFSET
The potential offset current on the analog outputs is >15 mA.
Table 373: NC150 status LEDs
550

Two 9-pin DSUB sockets and an 8-pin terminal block are located behind the module door of the
NC150 module:
Connecting socket for encoder 1 (9-pin DSUB socket)

Connecting socket for encoder 2 (9-pin DSUB socket)
8-pin terminal block with extraction clip for connecting the external encoder supply and two
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
analog outputs.
Figure 197: NC150 operational and connection elements
551

16.2.6 External Encoder Supply / Analog Outputs
Pin Assignments
8-pin terminal block
+ Analog output 1
- Analog output 1
Shield
+ Analog output 2
- Analog output 2
Shield
+ External encoder supply
GND external encoder supply
Table 374: NC150 external encoder supply / analog outputs
Encoder Supply
Figure 198: NC150 encoder supply
The encoder must be externally supplied. The encoder supply is fed through the 8-pin terminal
block to the module through a polymer PTC protective element (Polyswitch 1) ). The supply for
the input stage of approx. 80 mA (at 24 V) is necessary. The encoder supply is passed on to the
encoders using 2 pins on the DSUB sockets.
1) Polyswitch is a registered trademark of RAYCHEM.
552

The encoders are not permitted to be supplied directly from an external source!
Metallic DSUB connectors and shielded cables must be used to connect the
encoder (see Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 3 "Grounding and Shielding
Measures", on page 69)
Figure 199: NC150 asymmetrical encoder: inverted inputs connected to the trigger level
The cutoff threshold of the PTC protective element depends on the environmental temperature
(at 0 C approx. 800 mA, at 60 C approx. 450 mA). The internal supply (consumption) must
also be considered. At a supply of 30 V, consumption of 120 mA and an environmental
temperature of 60 C, the maximum amount of current available for the encoder supply would be
330 mA (450 mA - 120 mA).
If an overload or short circuit occurs, the protective element becomes highly resistive and breaks
the flow of current. In this case the external supply must be switched off (removing the overload
or the short circuit is normally not enough). The reset time of the PTC is
approximately 20 seconds.
553
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Both symmetrical encoder signals (A, A\, B, B\, Z, Z\), and asymmetrical signals (A, B, Z) can be
processed. If an asymmetrical encoder is connected, the inverted inputs are to be linked with
pin 9 (trigger level). The connection should be made in the DSUB connector and not in the
encoder cable (as shown in the diagram below).

16.2.7 Output Diagram for Analog Outputs
Figure 200: NC150 output diagram for analog outputs
16.2.8 Counter Inputs

Both symmetrical and asymmetrical incremental encoders can be connected to the counter
inputs. When connecting asymmetrical encoders, the inverted inputs A\, B\ and Z\ are to be
connected with the trigger level (pin 9).
Counter 1 / Counter 2
Pin Assignments
1
+ Encoder supply
Counter input A
Counter input B
Reference pulse Z
GND encoder supply
Counter input A\
Counter input B\
Reference pulse Z\
Trigger level
9-pin DSUB socket
Table 375: NC150 counter inputs
554

Input Circuit for Counter Inputs
Signal Level for Counter Inputs

The maximum input level permitted depends heavily on the encoder supply. In practice, the
following levels are defined for the most frequently used encoders:
5 V Encoder with Differential Outputs (symmetrical encoder)
Encoder Supply
5 to 8 V
Input Signals
Differential Voltage
Common Mode Voltage
0.4 V
7 V
Asymmetrical Encoder with Transistor Outputs

5 to 30 V (= Vencoder)
Encoder Supply
Input Signals
HIGH
LOW
0.4 x Vencoder to 2 x Vencoder (30 V may not be exceeded)

-10 V to 0.16 x Vencoder
The thresholds corresponds with TTL levels
Switching Threshold
Symmetrical Encoder with Transistor Outputs
Encoder Supply
5 to 30 V (= Vencoder)
Input Signals
HIGH
LOW
A, B, Z > A\, B\, Z\ + differential voltage

A, B, Z < A\, B\, Z\ - differential voltage
The idle threshold is logical 0
Idle Threshold
Differential Voltage for Input Signals (VIN)
within the Encoder Supply
Differential Voltage = 0.15 x Vencoder when GND encoder supply < VIN < Vencoder
Differential Voltage for Input Signals (VIN)

for the Entire Modulation Range
Differential voltage = 0.2 x Vencoder at 10 V < VIN < 2 x Vencoder

(30 V may not be exceeded)
Table 376: NC150 signal level for counter inputs
555
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 201: NC150 input circuit for counter inputs

Encoder with Open Collector Outputs
When using encoders with open collector outputs, an external pull-up resistor (RP) must be switched on. To achieve the HIGH threshold for
asymmetrical inputs the pull-up resistor (independent of the external encoder supply) is permitted to have a maximum of 30 k. Normally, the pullup resistor is not used in situations dealing with speed.
Recommended Values
Encoder supply 5 V
Encoder supply 24 V
RP = 300 - 2 k
RP = 1.5 k - 10 k
Table 376: NC150 signal level for counter inputs (cont.)

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module Type
Chan.
Counter 1
tc_global
DINT
Transp.In
Reset Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 1
tc_global
USINT
Status Out/In
Counter 2
tc_global
DINT
Transp.In
Reset Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
Mode Register 2
tc_global
USINT
Status Out/In
Analog Output 1
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
tc_global
INT
Analog Out
Analog Output 2
Table 377: NC150 variable declaration
Reset Register X
Reset Register X
Bit
7
0-6
Description
Software reset of the counter status
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7
Clearing bit 7 in reset register x causes a software reset of the counter status for counter x. Since
the status of the variables is transferred after every cycle to the module, this reset is also
performed after every cycle . For this reason, bit 7 must be written to with log. 1 again in the
following cycle.
556

Mode Register X - Write (Status Out)
Mode Register X
Write
Bit
Description
DIS
- Mode register disabled
HS
- Home Search
FT
- Filter Time
OM3
OM2
OM1
DIR
- Operating Mode (OM1 - OM3)
- Counting direction
DIS
0...... The module uses the current values when writing to the mode register.
1...... Changes to bits 0 to 6 have no effect when writing to the module.
Since the status of the variables is transferred to the module after every cycle, the mode register is written to after each cycle when
DIS = 0. For this reason, bit 7 must be written to with log. 1 to again in the following cycle.
RF
0...... Home search mode is disabled: Reference pulse for the encoder has no affect.
1...... Home search mode is enabled: If a reference pulse occurs, counter x is reset to zero.
FT
0...... large filter time (maximum input frequency 20 kHz)

1...... small filter time (maximum input frequency 100 kHz)
OMx
The operating mode for the counter is set with these three bits:
DIR
OM3
OM2
OM1
Operating Mode
Positioning, 4x evaluation
Positioning, 2x evaluation
Positioning, 1x evaluation, positive
Positioning, 1x evaluation, negative
2 channel up/down counter, positive edge
2 channel up/down counter, negative edge
1 channel up/down counter, positive edge
1 channel up/down counter, negative edge
0...... positive counting direction

1...... negative counting direction
The status of bits DIS, HS, FT, OMx and DIR are set as default to log. 0 after start up.
557
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules

Mode Register X - Read (Status In)
Mode Register X
Read
Bit
7
PV
- Potential variation of the analog outputs
HS
- Home search mode
0-4
x
x x x x x
PV
Description
This bit is identical to the GND OFFSET status LED.

0 ..... Compensating current between the channels is within the range 15 mA
1 ..... Compensating current between the channels lies outside the range 15 mA; The PV bit remains set, even if the value returns
inside the valid range. The PV bit in both registers and the LED are cleared again when one of the two mode registers is read.
RF
If the home search mode has been enabled, it can be used to indicate whether the reference pulse has already arrived and the counter
is reset (see also Section 16.2.12 "Home Search Procedure", on page 562).
0 ..... The reference pulse has been recognized and the counter is reset. The LED REF is lit. Home search mode has been disabled.
If the counter is referenced again (e.g. from the other direction), home search mode must be first activated.
1 ..... The reference pulse has still not been recognized.
558

16.2.10 Basic Counting Direction
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The counting direction can be switched between positive and negative using software. The
counting direction effects only the counting mode. An example of operating mode positioning:
Figure 202: NC150 counting direction in operation mode positioning
The evaluation of reference pulse Z is independent of the counting direction. It is always

referenced by a negative edge at Z.
559

16.2.11 Counter Operating Modes
Positioning
In this operating mode, the encoder provides two square wave signals (A and B), at a defined
time difference to each other. Both signals are 90 out of phase, allowing the counting direction
to be recognized. The following positioning operating modes are possible. 1) 2)
Figure 203: NC150 4x evaluation
Figure 204: NC150 2x evaluation
Figure 205: NC150 1x evaluation, positive
Figure 206: NC150 1x evaluation, negative
1) (+) => counter counting upwards; (-) => counter counting downwards
2) The diagram refers to the positive counting direction. For the negative counting direction, the symbols (+) and (-) are exchanged.
560

Up/Down Counters
The 2 channelup/down counter counts the positive (negative) edges of channel A up and the
positive (negative) edges of channel B down. 1) 2)
Figure 208: NC150 2 channel, negative edge
The 1 channel up/down counter counts the positive (negative) edges of channel A up and the
positive (negative) edges of channel B down. (counting direction: 1 => up, 0 => down). 1) 2)
Figure 209: NC150 1 channel, positive edge
Figure 210: NC150 1 channel, negative edge
1) (+) => counter counting upwards; (-) => counter counting downwards
2) The diagram refers to the positive counting direction. For the negative counting direction, the symbols (+) and (-) are exchanged.
561
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Figure 207: NC150 2 channel, positive edge

16.2.12 Home Search Procedure
With all positioning applications, determining the home position with incremental encoders is
absolutely necessary. Normally, the reference pulse of the incremental encoder is generated
once per rotation.
Order for Homing Procedure
1) The home search mode is activated by setting bit 5 in the mode register (status out). Bit 7
must be written to the respective mode registers with log. 0 for this write cycle.
2) Continually reading back bit 5 (mode register / status in) checks whether the reference pulse
has occurred. Wait until bit 5 = 0, that means until a reference pulse has occurred.
3) If a reference pulse occurs, the counter status is set to zero and the LED REF is switched
on. The counter counts in the rotation direction and the set operation mode.
4) If the homing procedure is repeated (e.g. with slower speeds in the opposite direction), the
procedure begins again at step 1.
In each operating mode where the home search mode is activated, the counter
is reset to zero by the negative edge of the reference pulse.
562
16.3 NC154
The NC154 axis controller is an active axis module, which includes all functions for operating
three servo axes:
Encoder Input
Servo output (10 V, 12-bit)
Closed loop position controller (digital sampling controller)
Limit and reference switch inputs
Input "Controller Ready"
Output "Enable Controller"
Positioning Software
The software for axis control is found in the axis controller FlashPROM. The software can be
downloaded. Therefore, positioning software can be updated if necessary.
Controller
The NC154 axis controller has a lag-free predictable PI closed loop controller. This algorithm
guarantees a high degree of dynamic rigidity and excellent path precision.
Positioning Types
The user has a choice between several types of positioning:
Online Positioning
Changing the values for a movement (position, speed and acceleration) is possible at any
sampling instant.
Electronic Gears
One or more gear axes have a certain relationship to a reference axis. The gear ratio and
the angles of the gear axes to each other can be changed during a movement. The gear
ratio or axes coupling (turning gear axes on and off) can be defined when the movement
is stopped.
Electronic Cam Profile

Electronic cam profiles allow a non-linear connection between two drives (coupling
functions) to be easily created. Several cam profiles can exist simultaneously on the
NC154 and they can be switched when needed. Up and down synchronization is also
possible when the reference axis is not stopped. All limits are taken into consideration
during this procedure (speed, acceleration).
563
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
In addition, three fast trigger inputs are provided to latch the actual position for measurements.

Additional Applications:
Flying Saw
- Optimized timing for movements
- Immediate return when cut is completed
Cross Cutter
- Optimized movement
- Print mark control
Interpolation
- Extensive NC interpreter
- Linear, circular and helix interpolation with tangential axis
- Dynamic "Look Ahead"
- Gantry axes
- Real-time intervention using virtual axes
Axis Synchronization
- Real-time positioning
- Varied synchronization conditions
Virtual Axes
- Virtual master
- Real-time intervention in active processes (to superimpose real axes)
Remote Axes
- Distributed axis controller according to machine functions
- Connected via fieldbus
564

CNC Functions
Languages
In addition to the standard DIN 66025 syntax, the user is also provided very useful language
expansions. Therefore, e.g. statements such as IF, ELSE, WHILE, SWITCH or arithmetic and
trigonometric instructions (e.g. +, *, /, sin, cos, arctan) can be used. Up to 1000 R parameters
are available as variables.
Interpolation
Straight, circular (helix) with tangential axes, level tool radian correction.
A "Look Ahead" function is implemented which is used to make sure that axes limits are not
exceeded.
Object-oriented Axis Programming
Tasks can be created quickly and reused using the new type of object-oriented axis
programming. Thoroughly tested, high performance tools are used for this purpose.
The success of this new principle has been indicated by solutions in the main areas of
automation technology.
Synchronization
If several NC154 axis controllers are used in a system, the sampling instant can be synchronized
by linking the "Sync" connections. This guarantees high precision even when coupling gears
between different NC154 modules.
Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules
CP260
565
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
"Look Ahead" Function

Restrictions
If electronic gears or cam profiles which are coupled between different modules or racks 1) are
used in the application, no other interrupt capable modules (e.g. IF050, IF060, IF260 or IP161
as a parallel processor, EX150 and NW150) can be used in combination with the NC154.
16.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Axis Controller
3NC154.60-2
2005 axis controller, 3 axes. Each axis has the following

data: Input frequency 150 kHz, incremental or absolute, 32bit, encoder supply 5 VDC or 24 VDC, 5 digital inputs
24 VDC, sink, 1 relay output 24 VAC / 24 VDC, 1 A,
1 analog output +/- 10 V, 12-bit, 12-pin. Order 3 x TB162
3TB162.9

Software
1A3502.01
2005 Positioning Software, NC154.60-2 standard

operating system
Terminal blocks are not included in the delivery (see "Accessories").

Product ID
C-UL-US Listed
B&R ID Code
RAM
System PROM
NC154 Axis Coupling over Multiple
Modules Supported by
Status Display
Number of Axes
Operating Temperature
NC154
Yes
$61
2 MB DRAM
2 MB FlashPROM
CP260, IF260
LEDs
3
0 to 55 C

1) Coupling between racks: The data exchange required for axes coupling takes place via the CPU's CAN bus.
566

Product ID
NC154
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 6 W
--Max. 6 W
Axis Data
Entries are Valid for all Three Axes

15-pin DSUB socket
Incremental encoder or SSI absolute encoder (both electrically isolated)
Incremental encoder
Signal Form
Evaluation
Input Frequency
Count Frequency
Counter Size
Inputs
Input Level
Distance between Edges
Monitoring
Square wave pulse

4-fold
Max. 150 kHz
Max. 600 kHz
32-bit
A, A\, B, B\, R, R\
5 V (differential input)
Min. 0.8 s
Broken Connection, Signal Disturbance
SSI Absolute Encoder

Coding
Word Size
Baud Rate
Data Input Level
Clock Output Level
Monitoring
Gray, Binary
Max. 31-bit
230 kBaud
5 V (differential signal)
5 V (differential signal)
Signal disturbance, parity, plausibility
Encoder Supply
External Input Voltage
Load at Output Level
5 VDC
24 VDC
Protection
Max. 400 mA per axis

Max. 250 mA per axis
Short circuit and overload protection
Servo Output
Output Voltage
10 V, electrically isolated
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Encoder Input
24 VDC
Load
5 mA
Resolution
12-bit
Output Filter
Low pass 1st order
Disturbance Suppression
Disturbance compensation
Digital Inputs
Amount
Yes (optocoupler)
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Input Current
Approx. 10 mA
Wiring
Sink
Table 379: NC154 technical data (cont.)
567

Product ID
NC154
Digital Output
Type
Relay
Switching Voltage
Max. 30 VDC / VAC
Continuous Current
Max. 1 A
Soldered fuse 1.5 A
Dimensions
16.3.4 Status LEDs

Image
LED
Description
ERROR
The ERROR LED blinks in a 500 ms cycle (READY LED goes out,
UP and DN continue to function).
The ERROR LED is constantly lit during a hardware reset.
READY
The READY LED blinks slowly (once every 2 seconds) if the

software module BOOT is not present.
The READY LED blinks quickly (5 time per second) if the software
module BOOT is present, but the operating system is not present.
The READY LED is lit constantly after a successful initialization i.e.
the NC154 is ready for operation.
STATUS
The STATUS LED indicates the individual boot phases.
UP
The UP LED indicates an increasing actual position for axis n.
DN
The DN LED indicates a decreasing actual position for axis n.
568

The connections for the individual axes, status LEDs and terminals for encoder supply and
synchronization can be found behind the module door.
Status LEDs
Interface used to download the BOOT software module
4-pin terminal block (encoder supply, connection for synchronization with other NC154
modules)
Encoder inputs for each axis

12-pin terminal blocks to connect digital inputs and outputs for individual axes (e.g. limit
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
switch, reference switch, etc.)
569

16.3.6 Encoder Connection
An encoder connection is available for each of the three axes. Either an incremental or SSI
absolute encoder can be used.
Pin Assignments
15-pin DSUB socket
Pin
Name
Incremental
encoder
Name
Absolute
encoder
Channel A
A\
A inverted
Channel B
B\
B inverted
Reference Pulse
Data input
R\
R inverted
D\
D inverted
Clock output
T\
C inverted
Name
Encoder Supply
ES_5V
Encoder Supply
+5 V / 400 mA
10
11
12
COM
13
ES_24V
Encoder Supply
Encoder Supply
+24 V / 250 mA
external voltage from
terminals
14
15
Table 381: NC154 pin assignments for encoder connections
16.3.7 Encoder Supply / Synchronization

Pin Assignments
4-pin Terminal Block
Terminal
1
Description
Encoder Supply: +24 VDC supply
Encoder Supply:
Synchronization +
Synchronization -
Table 382: NC154 pin assignments for encoder supply /synchronization
570

16.3.8 I/O Connection
On each axis of the NC154 module there is a 12-pin terminal block with connections for 5 digital
inputs, 1 digital output and 1 analog output. The terminal blocks can be removed with the help
of ejection levers (12-pin terminal block, model number 3TB162.9).
Pin Assignments
Terminal
Description
Analog output 10V
Analog output GND
Shield
Controller enable (relay output)
Controller enable (relay output)
Controller ready - input
Controller ready - common
Limit switch in positive direction
Limit switch in negative direction
10
Reference switch for search home
11
Trigger input
12
Common for pins 8 to 11
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 383: NC154 pin assignments for I/O connection
16.3.9 Interface Used to Download the BOOT Software Module

The BOOT software module is required to update the NC154 operating system (operating
system update). This module is already installed on NC154 modules starting from revision
number 54.23.
For NC154 modules with a revision number <54.23, the software module BOOT has to be
installed in the module before the operating system update.
A PC can be connected to the NC154 via this interface using a cable available from B&R
(0G2001.00-090). The software module BOOT (NC154.S1) can be downloaded using this
connection.
The operating system is updated using the programming device via the CPU's online interface.
Figure 212: NC154 interface used to download the BOOT software module
571
16.4 NC157
The NC157 axis controller is an active axis module that can be used to control up to eight
ACOPOS axes. The number of axes depends on the scan time specified on the NC157 module.
The cycle time can be set as a multiple of 400 s between 2.4 ms and 5.6 ms.
A higher cycle time setting can be necessary depending on the positioning functions used.
Number of Axes
Minimum Cycle Time
2.4 ms
2.8 ms
3.2 ms
4.0 ms
4.4 ms
4.8 ms
5.2 ms
5.6 ms
Table 384: NC157 minimum cycle time
Positioning Software
The software for axis control is found in the axis controller FlashPROM. The software can be
downloaded. Therefore, positioning software can be updated if necessary.
Drive Interface
The NC157 axis controller has a set value generator for each axis which cyclically calculates the
set positions. These set positions are transferred to the ACOPOS drives in each NC157 scan
step via the CAN network.
572

Positioning Types
The user has a choice between several types of positioning:
Online Positioning
Changing the values for a movement (position, speed and acceleration) is possible at any
sampling instant.
Electronic Gears
One or more gear axes have a certain relationship to a reference axis. The gear ratio and
the angles of the gear axes to each other can be changed during a movement. The gear
ratio or axes coupling (turning gear axes on and off) can be defined when the movement
is stopped.
Electronic Cam Profile
Electronic cam profiles allow a non-linear connection between two drives (coupling
functions) to be easily created. Several cam profiles can exist simultaneously on the
NC157 and they can be switched when needed. Up and down synchronization is also
possible when the reference axis is not stopped. All limits are taken into consideration
during this procedure (speed, acceleration).
Additional Applications:
Flying Saw
- Optimized timing for movements
- Immediate return when cut is completed
Cross Cutter
- Optimized movement
- Print mark control
Interpolation
- Extensive NC interpreter
- Linear, circular and helix interpolation with tangential axis
- Dynamic "Look Ahead"
- Gantry axes
- Real-time intervention using virtual axes
Axis Synchronization
- Real-time positioning
- Varied synchronization conditions
Virtual Axes
- Virtual master
- Real-time intervention in active processes (to superimpose real axes)
573
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Remote Axes
- Distributed axis controller according to machine functions
- Connected via fieldbus
CNC Functions
Languages
In addition to the standard DIN 66025 syntax, the user is also provided very useful language
expansions. Therefore, e.g. statements such as IF, ELSE, WHILE, SWITCH or arithmetic and
trigonometric instructions (e.g. +, *, /, sin, cos, arctan) can be used. Up to 1000 R parameters
are available as variables.
Interpolation
Straight, circular (helix) with tangential axes, level tool radian correction.
"Look Ahead" Function
A "Look Ahead" function is implemented which is used to make sure that axes limits are not
exceeded.
Object-oriented Axis Programming
Tasks can be created quickly and reused using the new type of object-oriented axis
programming. Thoroughly tested, high performance tools are used for this purpose.
The success of this new principle has been indicated by solutions in the main areas of
automation technology.
Synchronization
If several NC157 axis controllers are used in a system, the sampling instant can be synchronized
by linking the "Sync" connections. This guarantees high precision even when coupling gears
between different NC157 modules.
Axis Coupling over Multiple Modules
CP260
574

Restrictions
If electronic gears or cam profiles which are coupled between different modules or racks 1) are
used in the application, no other interrupt capable modules (e.g. IF050, IF060, IF260 or IP161
as a parallel processor, EX150 and NW150) can be used in combination with the NC157.
16.4.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
Image
Axis Controller
3NC157.60-1
2005 positioning module, CAN bus interface for controlling

up to 8 axes, 2 trigger inputs, 24 VDC, sink, 4-pin terminal
block included in the delivery.
Software
1A3530.01
2005 positioning software, NC157.60-1 standard operating

system
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
1) Coupling between racks: The data exchange required for axes coupling takes place via the CPU's CAN bus.
575

Product ID
NC157
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
B&R ID Code
$66
Module Type
B&R 2005 system module
Can be Installed on
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
RAM
System PROM
NC157 Axis Coupling over Multiple
Modules Supported by
Status Display
Number of Axes
Yes
No
2 MB DRAM
2 MB FlashPROM
CP260, IF260
LEDs
8
Operating Temperature
0 to 55 C
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 6 W
--Max. 6 W
Servo Interface
Type
CAN
Controller
Controller 82527
Design
9-pin DSUB plug
Yes
Maximum Distance
60 m
Maximum Baud Rate

Bus Lengths up to 60 m
Network Capable
CAN Node Number
500 kBit/s
Yes
External
Selection switch
Dimensions
576

16.4.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
ERROR
Description
The ERROR LED blinks in a 500 ms cycle (READY LED goes out).
The ERROR LED is constantly lit during a hardware reset.
READY
The READY LED blinks slowly (once every 2 seconds) if the

software module BOOT is not present.
The READY LED blinks quickly (5 time per second) if the software
module BOOT is present, but the operating system is not present.
The READY LED is lit constantly after a successful initialization i.e.
the NC157 is ready for operation.
The STATUS LED indicates the individual boot phases.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
STATUS
577

The CAN interface, status LEDs, the terminal block for the trigger supply and synchronization
and the terminal block for the triggerinputs can be found behind the module door.
Interface used to download the BOOT software module

4-pin terminal block (trigger supply, connection for synchronization with other NC157
modules)
Node number switch

CAN interface
4-pin terminal block (connection for trigger inputs)
578

16.4.6 Interface Used to Download the BOOT Software Module
The BOOT software module is required to update the NC157 operating system (operating
system update). This module is already installed.
A PC can be connected to the NC157 via this interface using a cable available from B&R
(0G2001.00-090). The BOOT (NC157.S1) software module can be downloaded using this
connection.
The operating system is updated using the programming device via the CPU's online interface.
Figure 214: NC157 interface used to download the BOOT software module
To supply the triggers inputs, + 24 VDC must be applied to this connector. The trigger inputs are
connected to the plug described previously (position 5).
Terminal
Assignment
+24 V (Trigger)
Trigger Supply: +24 VDC
Description
COM (Trigger)
Trigger Supply:
Sync+
Synchronization +
Sync-
Synchronization -
Table 388: NC157 pin assignments for trigger supply /synchronization
16.4.8 CAN Interface

9-pin DSUB plug
Pin
Assignment
Description
NC
Not assigned
CAN_L
CAN_GND
CAN Low
NC
Not assigned
NC
Not assigned
Res.
Reserved
CAN_H
NC
Not assigned
NC
Not assigned
COM
CAN High
Table 389: NC157 CAN interface
579
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
16.4.7 Trigger Supply / Synchronization

16.4.9 Trigger Inputs
Pin Assignments
Terminal
Assignment
+24 VDC
Description
+24 VDC Output
Trigger 1
Trigger Input 1
Trigger 0
Trigger Input 0
COM (2, 3)
Ground:
Table 390: NC157 pin assignments for trigger inputs
Connection Example
Figure 215: NC157 connection example for trigger inputs
580
16.5 NC352
The NC352 ultrasonic transducer module is used for measuring path and speed.
Features
3 channels for ultra sonic transducer using the RS422 interface
3 digital inputs that can be operated in different count modes

Event counter
Gate and frequency measurement
A/B counter with internal/external count frequency
1 digital output
Model Number
Short Description
3NC352.6
2005 ultrasonic transducer module, 3 inputs for ultrasonic

transducer, 3 digital inputs, 24 VDC, sink, can be configured
as event counter, or gate/frequency measurement, or as
incremental encoder input, 1 digital output, 24 VDC, 20 mA.
Order TB708 terminal blocks separately.
0TB708.91
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
16.5.2 Order Data

Image
581

Product ID
NC352
General Information
C-UL-US Listed
In preparation
B&R ID Code
$9A
Module Type
B&R 2005 I/O module
Slot
Main Rack
Expansion Rack
Yes
Yes
Number of Path Measurement
Inputs/Outputs
Number of Digital Inputs
Number of Digital Outputs
Power Consumption
5V
24 V
Total
Max. 2.3 W
Max. 1.7 W
Max. 4 W
Channels for Path and Speed

Measurements
Supported Encoder Types
Ultrasonic transducer with RS422 interface (start/stop, stop, gate time)
Encoder Input
Encoder Supply
9-pin DSUB socket

24 VDC external supply
Distribution to the encoder and short circuit protection through NC352, with configurable
overvoltage/undervoltage monitoring (10%, 15%, 20%, 25%)
Number of Channels
Channel - PLC
Channel - Channel
Yes
No
Input and Output Levels
RS422 differential level
Multi-magnet Measurement
Outputs
Durational Initialization Pulse
Inputs
Resolution/Measurement Range for
Path Measurement
Speed Measurement
Precision
Yes (max. 4 magnets in total possible combinations):

Magnets on Channel 1
1.6 s
0.01 mm / 5.2 m
0.1 mm/s / 3.2 m/s
25 ppm
582

Product ID
NC352
Digital Output
Number of Outputs
Type
Highside driver (Source)
Switching Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
18 V
24 V
30 V
Output Current
20 mA
Switching Delay
Max. 5 s
Yes
Overload Protection
Yes
Status display
LED (yellow)
Digital Input
3
Wiring
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Number of Inputs
Sink
Input Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
18 VDC
24 VDC
30 VDC
Input Delay at Nominal Voltage
< 12 s
Switching Threshold
Low
High
<5V
> 15 V
Approx. 8.7 mA
Status Display
LED (green)
Counter Modes
Mode 1
32-bit event counter in input 1 (max. 20 KHz at nominal voltage)
Mode 2
AB counter 32-bit (A: input 1, B: input 2) max. 10 KHz at nominal voltage
Mode 3
Input 1: Gate or period measurement

Measurement Frequency: 8 MHz, 31.25 kHz, external counter frequency on input 3: Max. 20 kHz
Input - PLC
Input - Output
Output - PLC
Yes
No
Yes
Dimensions
583

16.5.4 Status LEDs
Image
LED
Description
RUN
Off
The NC352 has not booted and/or the CPU has not accessed the NC352.
Blinking symmetrically, 1 time per second
NC352 is ready for operation, the configuration files for the transducer have
not been spooled on the NC352.
Blinking symmetrically, 8 times per second
Spooled during new Firmware on the NC352.
Always lit
NC352 is ready for operation and configured - Normal operation.
POS 1 - POS 4
Lit as soon/until it receives a valid measurement signal from the assigned

measurement channel.
DI 1 - DI 3
These LEDs are lit when the status of the assigned digital inputs is logical "1".
DO
This LED is lit when the status of the digital output is logical "1".
Figure 216: NC352 status LEDs

Status LEDs, connections for the encoder and the terminals for the encoder supply and digital
inputs/outputs, can all be found behind the module door.
584

Connections for 8-pin Terminal Block (X4)
Terminal
1
Description
GND encoder supply
+24 VDC encoder supply
GND reference for digital inputs /outputs
Digital output
Shield
Digital input 3
Digital input 2
Digital input 1
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 393: NC352 connections for 8-pin terminal blocks (X4)
Assignment for the 9-pin DSUB Sockets

Encoder Connections Assignment:
X1...... Transducer rod 1
Pin
Description
NC
Init +
Start/Stop +
NC
GND Supply
+24 VDC Supply
Init -
Start/Stop -
NC
Table 394: NC352 pin assignments for the 9-pin DSUB socket
585

16.5.7 Specifications for the 9-pin DSUB Plug
Subject
Specification
Housing
Metal plated, with 45 cable output

L 31.5 mm
W 15.4 mm
H 37.0 mm
Dimensions
Manufacturer Information
e.g. TYCO: V42254-A6000-G109

or Fischer electronics: Art. No. DH09KM
Table 395: NC352 specification for 9-pin DSUB plug
16.5.8 Input/Output Circuit Diagram

Input Circuit Diagram
Figure 218: NC352 input circuit diagram
586

Output Circuit Diagram
Figure 219: NC352 output circuit diagram
16.5.9 Ultrasonic Transducer Supply
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
The ultrasonic transducer can be connected using shielded cable and metal plated DSUB plug.
The shield is connected to ground in the NC352 module.
Figure 220: NC352 ultrasonic transducer supply
587

16.5.10 Digital Input/Output Connection Example
Figure 221: NC352 digital inputs/outputs connection example

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
Displacement Gauge 1
tc_global
DINT
Analog In
1 ... 2
tc_global
DINT
Analog In
3 ... 4
tc_global
DINT
Analog In
5 ... 6
Displacement Gauge 4 / Incremental Encoder/ Comparator Value
tc_global
DINT
Analog In
7 ... 8
Configuration 1
tc_global
UINT
Analog Out
Configuration 2
tc_global
UINT
Analog Out
Path Measurement 1 Mode Register
tc_global
UINT
Analog Out
tc_global
UINT
Analog Out
tc_global
UINT
Analog Out
Reserved
tc_global
UINT
Analog Out
Comparator Set Value
tc_global
DINT
Analog Out
7 ... 8
Reserved for Spooler
tc_global
USINT
Status Out
0 ... 7
Table 396: NC352 variable declaration
588

Function
Scope
Data Type
Length
Module
Type
Chan.
Comparator Actual Value
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Error & Status Register
tc_global
USINT
Status In
1 ... 3
Module Code = $B1
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Module Number = $9A
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Timer Reference Value
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Firmware Version / Reserved as a Return Channel for Spooler
tc_global
USINT
Status In
Table 396: NC352 variable declaration (cont.)
Since only 32-bit reference data is available for data transfer with each measurement magnet,
there are limitations where simultaneous path and speed measurements are needed. There are
two modes. With the first mode, path data and speed data are retrieved in sequence using direct
IO access. This procedure delivers both sets of data with full resolution and full measurement
range, but requires additional CPU resources.
In the second mode, data is provided in a UDINT variable. However this limits the resolution
and/or the maximum value for the path and speed. The same maximum resolution is always
used internally so that no computing errors occur.
The position and speed are encoded in the displacement gauge value. The separation between
speed and path can be configured between bit 16 and 19. The counter always internally counts
using 20-bits.
Bits 31-16
Bits 19-0
Speed in 0.1 - 1.6 mm/s
Path in 0.01 mm - 0.16 mm
Table 397: NC352 coding of position and speed
Displacement gauge 4 has three functions and can be used for incremental encoder operation
to represent the counter status, as well as in comparator operation for storing comparator values.
Configuration 1
The mode for the incremental or event counter is set in this register.
The signal source of the event counter/incremental encoder can be set using bit 3. In contrast to
the event counter, incremental encoder operation evaluates all edges of the signal (4-x).
The signal source for period measurement can also be the event counter or the incremental
encoder.
In order to recognize a standstill within a sufficient time frame, the counter size for the
incremental encoder period measurement is limited to 24-bit (2 s at 8 MHz, 520 s at 31.25 kHz
count frequency).
589
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Displacement Gauges 1 - 4

Additionally, 24 V monitoring can be controlled in 5% steps with this configuration register.
Likewise, the multiplexer for status register 1, 2 and 7 and displacement gauge register 4 can
also be controlled.
Bit
Description
15
14
0...... Default: Status register 7 is reserved as a return channel for spooler

1...... Status register 7 contains the firmware version 1)
12 - 13
Analog In Channel 7 - 8
00.... Path measurement 4
01.... Comparator value
10.... Incremental encoder/ event counter
11.... Reserve
10 - 11
Error counter in status register 1 and 2

00.... Sum of plausibility errors + error measurements
01.... Number of error measurements
10.... Number of plausibility errors
11.... Reserve
8-9
00.... 24 V monitoring 25%

6-7
00.... Count frequency 8 MHz

01.... Count frequency 31250 Hz
10.... External count frequency (input 3)
11.... Reserve
0...... Beginning of measurement at rising edge

1...... Beginning of measurement at falling edge
0...... Signal source: Event counter input A (= input 1)

1...... Signal source: Incremental encoder (A/B)
1-2
0
0
15
8 7
Measurement mode for AB counters / event counter

00.... No measurement operation (counter is cleared) 2)
01.... Incremental encoder/ event counter
10.... Period measurement
11.... Gate measurement, see Section "Measurement Mode for Gate
Measurement", on page 591
0
0
0
1) WARNING: Spooling of configuration data or new firmware is not possible when this bit is set.
2) Configuring and reconfiguring the counter (edges, signal source, count frequency) must be made in the "No Measurement Operation",
because invalid count edges can occur. The counter is reset to 0 every time the measurement mode is changed and begins
immediately then to work in the new mode.
590

Measurement Mode for Gate Measurement
If the "Gate Measurement" mode has been selected, bit 4 is used as follows:
Bit 4
Gate Time
Gate Time = begin measurement at rising edge, stop measurement at falling edge
Gate Time = begin measurement at falling edge, stop measurement at rising edge
Table 398: NC352 gate measurement mode
Configuration 2
Status of the digital outputs
Comparator settings
Configuring multi-magnet measurement
Activation of the raw values mode
Bit
Description
15
0...... Default
1...... Raw values 1) for the counter are output on analog in register 1 - 8
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
This register controls the following functions:
7 - 14
5-6
00.... No multi-channel measurements

01.... 2 channel measurement transducer rod 3
10.... 3 channel measurement transducer rod 2 (transducer rod 3 is deactivated)
11.... 2 channel measurement transducer rod 1 and 2 (transducer rod 3 is
deactivated)
3-4
00.... Comparator affects displacement gauge 1

0...... Comparator is triggered when > comparison value (see analog out 7 - 8)
1...... Comparator is triggered when < comparison value
0...... Comparator function deactivated

1...... Comparator function activated
0...... Digital output off (only where the comparator function has been switched off)
1...... Digital output on (only where the comparator function has been switched off)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15
8 7
1) The raw value corresponds to the time required for the ultrasonic signal to travel from the location of the magnet to the receiver (in units
of 3.125 ns).
Warning: When this bit is set, the raw values are output in metric units (and not positions/speeds) even after a configuration module
has been spooled.
591

Description of the Comparator
If the comparator is activated (bit 1 in configuration 2), bit 0 in configuration 2 is ignored, and the
actual value of the digital output is then determined by the status of the comparator.
If the comparator has been triggered once, i.e. the selected displacement gauge is above or
below the set threshold value (refer to analog output 7 - 8), the digital output is set, bit 3 in status
register 3 is set, the actual value of status register 6 is copied to status register 0 and the value
of the selected displacement gauge when triggered can now be read from Analog In registers
7 - 8 (refer to also bit 12 - 13 in configuration 1). The comparator cannot be triggered each time
by moving back and forth across the threshold value, but instead must be activated again.
This is achieved by resetting and applying a new setting to bit 1 in configuration 2. When
resetting, bit 3 in status register 3 is cleared and the digital output is set according to bit 0 in
configuration 2. The other entries (see above) are not influenced by this, and are only overwritten
when the comparator has been triggered again.
592

Explanation of Multi-magnet Measurement (assignment of the displacement gauge register to
transducer rods/magnets)
The assignment only depends on settings in configuration register 2. Measurement pulses from
magnets which may be present but have not been configured are ignored.
If the reverse is the case and more magnets have been configured on a transducer rod than are
actually present, the NC352 then delivers an error for the respective displacement gauge
register (the error counter in status register 1 and 2 are increased).
Magnets are numbered per rod, increasing in order according to their relative distance to the
ultrasonic receiver/evaluation electronics of the transducer rod.
Displacement Gauge Register
Assigned Transducer Rod/Measurement

Magnet
Transducer Rod 1: Magnet 1
No multichannel measurements
2 channel measurement on transducer rod 3
3 channel measurement on transducer rod 2

(transducer rod 3 is deactivated)
2 channel measurement transducer rod 1 and 2

(transducer rod 3 is deactivated)
No magnet assigned
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Mode
Table 399: NC352 numbering of magnets
593

Path Measurement Mode 1 - 3
This register contains settings, which are specifically for the transducer rod with the
corresponding number. They determine the transducer rod type, the method of path
measurement and the content of the displacement gauge register.
Mode Registers 1 -3
Bit
Transducer rod type (measurement from to)

00...... Start/Stop Signal: rising edge - rising edge
01...... Start/Stop Signal: falling edge - falling edge
10...... Start/Stop Signal: rising edge - falling edge (gate time)
11...... Only Stop Signal. Start with trigger of signal (initialization pulses).
12 - 13
9 - 11
Types of displays for packed mode.

Description:
See Table 400 "NC352 types of displays for packed mode.", on
page 595
7-8
Displacement Gauge Register

00...... Magnet position (path)
01...... Magnet speed
10...... Path and speed in packed form
11...... Reserve
6
3-5
0 0
15
594
0
8 7
Description
14 - 15
0........ Default (is reset by the module)

1........ Strobe - trigger for measurement start
Cycle time for path measurement (in cyclic operation)
000.... 131.072 ms
001.... 65.536 ms
010.... 8.192 ms
011.... 4.096 ms
100.... 2.048 ms
101.... 1.024 ms
110.... 512 s
111.... Reserved
0........ Cyclic measurement according to a specified cycle time, see bits 3 - 5

1........ Measurement triggered by strobe signal (2 measurements separated by
half cycle time, see bits 3 - 5)
0
0

Types of displays for packed mode.
Bit
Status
Path Resolution
Speed Resolution
Max. Path
Max. Speed
Speed on Bit
Path on Bit
9 - 11
000
0.01 mm
1.6 mm/s
5.24 m
3.28 m/s
31 - 20
19 - 0
9 - 11
001
0.04 mm
0.4 mm/s
5.24 m
3.28 m/s
31 - 18
17 - 0
9 - 11
010
0.16 mm
0.1 mm/s
5.24 m
3.28 m/s
31 - 16
15 - 0
9 - 11
011
0.01 mm
0.1 mm/s
5.24 m
0.20 m/s
31 - 20
19 - 0
9 - 11
100
0.01 mm
0.1 mm/s
2.62 m
0.41 m/s
31 - 19
18 - 0
9 - 11
101
0.01 mm
0.1 mm/s
1.31 m
0.82 m/s
31 - 18
17 - 0
9 - 11
110
0.01 mm
0.1 mm/s
0.65 m
1.64 m/s
31 - 17
16 - 0
9 - 11
111
0.01 mm
0.1 mm/s
0.33 m
3.28 m/s
31 - 16
15 - 0
Maximum path and speed entries given in the above table are rounded off to two decimal places
and calculated from the resolution multiplied by the largest number that can be represented
using the defined number of bits.
Status Register 1 - 3
Status Register 1 - Error Counter Encoder 1 and 2 (hex format)
Status Register 1
Bit
Description
4-7
Continuous (rotating) counter for error measurement of encoder 2
0-3
Status Register 2 - Error Counter Encoder 3 and 4 (hex format)

Status Register 2
Bit
Description
4-7
0-3
595
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 400: NC352 types of displays for packed mode.

Status Register 3
Status Register 3
Bit
7
5-6
Description
0 ......Configuration data present
1 ......Configuration data not present
00 ....Default / OK
01 ....24 V - under voltage
10 ....24 V - over voltage
11 ....Reserved
0 ......Digital output: ok
1 ......Digital output: Error (value which is read back does not match)
0 ......Selected displacement gauge has not exceeded the comparator threshold in either direction
1 ......Selected displacement gauge has exceeded the comparator threshold in either direction
0/1 ...Status digital input 3
Status Register 7
Depending on the configuration (see Section "Configuration 1", on page 589) this register is
used either as a return channel when spooling or contains the firmware version in BCD format.
Since the content of the first instance is of no interest to the user, the following table describes
only the format for the firmware version.
Status Register 7
Bit
Description
4-7
High nibble for firmware version (BCD)
0-3
Low nibble for firmware version (BCD)
Configuration Module
An additional data module is required for the I/O registers when configuring the NC352. The
module name can be selected. The full path measurement function (display of path and speed
in metric units, plausibility test) is only available after a data module has been created (format
see Table 401 "NC352 content of the configuration files", on page 597) and spooled on the
NC352. This module can be either spooled in INIT SP or anytime during operation (FBK:
SPDownModule). Settings for the last data module spooled are effective as soon as they have
been completely transferred to the NC352.
When no configuration module has been spooled on the NC352, this is signaled by bit 7 of status
register 3 and by the RUN LED blinking (after the configuration has been made the RUN LED is
permanently lit).
596

The content of the configuration files is broken down in the following table:
Length/Bit
Sign
Change
Enable
16
No
Meaning
Bit 0
0...... Deactivating measurements on transducer rod 1

1...... Activating measurements on transducer rod 1
Bit 1

Bit 2

Bits 3-7
Bit 8
0...... Default - Filter for transducer rod 1 is activated using a filter

constant = 200 ns
1...... Filter for transducer rod 1 is deactivated
Bit 9

constant = 200 ns
Bit 10

constant = 200 ns
Bits 11-15
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Name
Transducer Rod 1
OFFSET
32
No
Common null position for all measurement magnets (raw value)
CORR_FAC
32
No
Correction value for calibrating the path measurement (= v_us/100 * 2^19) 1)
PATH_MIN
32
Yes
Minimum valid path (in 0.01 mm/s)
PATH_MAX
32
Yes
Maximum valid path (in 0.01 mm/s)
V_MAX
32
No
Maximum valid path difference (absolute value) of two consecutive measurements (in 0.1 mm/s)
RESERVE
16
RESERVE
16
RESERVE
16
Transducer Rod 2
OFFSET
32
No
CORR_FAC
32
No
PATH_MIN
32
Yes
PATH_MAX
32
Yes
V_MAX
32
No
RESERVE
16
RESERVE
16
RESERVE
16
Table 401: NC352 content of the configuration files
597

Name
Length/Bit
Sign
Change
Meaning
Transducer Rod 3
OFFSET
32
No
CORR_FAC
32
No
PATH_MIN
32
Yes
PATH_MAX
32
Yes
V_MAX
32
No
RESERVE
16
RESERVE
16
RESERVE
16
Table 401: NC352 content of the configuration files (cont.)

1) v_us: Ultrasonic speed according to the type plate of the transducer rod.
The correct order and length for entries must be taken into account. RESERVE words must be
present. See also the following example:
;Enable(UINT)
$0007,
;Offset,
005000,
Channel 1
000000,
Channel 2
010000,
Channel 3
Corr_fac,
15040302,
Path_min, Path_max, V_max, reserve1, reserve2, reserve3

0000000, 0100000, 001000, 0000,
0000,
0000,
;
15040302,
0000000,
0100000,
000256, 0000,
0000,
0000,
15040302, -0000010,
0013000,
005000, 0000,
0000,
0000
The first time the configuration module is created, raw values for magnet positions can already
be read before successful spooling of the configuration module, in which in configuration
register 2-bit 15 is set.
An encoder magnet can now be moved on the desired zero mark. The path raw value measured
is entered as an OFFSET parameter together with other parameters in the configuration files,
before it can be spooled (again) on the NC352. The application does not need to be restarted
because the process can be carried out at anytime in the cyclic part of the application!
If the offset is known, the OFFSET parameter can be calculated as follows:
OFFSET parameter = Offset (in 1/100 mm) * 3200/v_us
v_us ... Ultrasonic speed in the transducer rod in m/s (see type plate)
598

Guidelines for Configuring the NC352
Setting the period duration (bit 3 - 5 in path measurement mode register)
Adjusting the Length of the Transducer
Rod
Path measurement is not allowed to be started before the last measurement is completed. It is also
recommended by most transducer rod manufacturers to wait until the specified recovery time of the
bar has passed, which is double the time required for the ultrasonic signal to travel the length of the
transducer rod. Therefore, the current path between the encoder position and the measurement
receiver is not decisive, but rather the entire transducer rod length - the maximum possible ultrasonic
signal travel time.
Please note that when the NC352 is in strobe mode (CPU triggers measurement) , two measurements
in the half distance of the set period duration are independently made. That means that the permitted
rod length with the given period duration is halved compared to the periodic measurement operation.
Adjusting the Cycle Time for the CPU
To guarantee a correct evaluation of the error counter, the counter value can be increased to a
maximum of 15 (4-bit counter) during a CPU cycle (tcycl). That means a maximum of 15 path
measurements can take place from the last reading of the error counter.
1. Transducer Rod Length = 0.15 m / tcycl = 1 ms

Recovery time of the transducer rod:0.15/2800 * 2 = 0.107 ms
This results in:
Physically permitted tper = 512 s
This period duration is also compliant with the CPU cycle time -> ok
2. Transducer Rod Length = 0.15 m / tcycl = 10 ms
Recovery time of the transducer rod:0.15/2800 * 2 = 0.107 ms
This results in:
Physically permitted tper 512 s
That means:
In practice 8.192 ms tper 1.024 ms must be selected because otherwise
more than 15 measurement errors could occur per CPU cycle which in turn
could cause the error counter to overflow.
3. Transducer Rod Length = 3 m / tcycl = 10 ms
Recovery time of the transducer rod:3/2800 * 2 = 2.14 ms
This results in :
Physically permitted tper = 4.096 ms or tper = 8.192 ms
That means:
1 to 3 path measurements can be made per CPU cycle -> OK
4. Transducer Rod Length = 1 m / tcycl = 1 ms
Recovery time of the transducer rod:1/2800 * 2 = 0.714 ms
Only 512 s as tper makes sense due to the cycle time of 1 ms. This lies below the recovery time of the
transducer rod. Only a maximum path of 0.73 m can be measured without reducing precision.
Speed Measurement
If the NC352 is operated in periodic measurement mode, it uses path measurement results for the last 131 ms when determining the current speed.
A time span of 100 ms is needed so that a change of the path measurement results in a digit (corresponding to 0.01 mm) with the minimum
measurable speed of 0.1 mm/s. With shorter measurement intervals, losses in resolution properties for speed measurement must be taken into
account. Very small speeds cannot be measured at all. Also note that measurement precision/resolution at the beginning of measurement or at
reconfiguring the cycle time (bit 3 - 5 from measurement path mode register) increases in intervals and only after 131 ms has full precision been
achieved.
If the NC352 is operated in strobe mode (measuring triggered by CPU), the module makes two path measurements in half of the defined period
duration. Only both these path measurements can be used to calculate the speed.
Attainable resolution for speed in strobe mode = 0.1 mm/s * 200/period duration (in ms).
The periodic measuring operation which has been set as the default is recommended for measuring speed.
Table 402: Guidelines for configuring the NC352
599
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Recommended measurement period (tper): tcycl/8 < tper < tcycl

Example for Cyclic Measurement
Accepted ultrasonic speed
v_us = 2800 m/s

24 VDC Supply
Current Limitation
The 24 V supply is fed through to the transducer rods and is safeguarded with a protective element
(minimum holding current :1.1 A at 20 C). For less than one second, 3 A can also be removed (starting
currents for the transducer rods).
Tolerance Threshold
Selecting the tolerance threshold (10% to 25%) should be set up according to the information in the
data sheet of the transducer rod's manufacturer. NC352 hardware tolerates 24 V 25%.
Packed Mode
The measurement range set must be adjusted to the physical requirements (length of the transducer rod or other limitations).
Threshold Value
Both the lower and upper threshold values for the plausibility test of the paths and comparator threshold values are DINT values (signed). The
threshold value for the plausibility test of speed is however an unsigned UDINT value. Only the 24 lowest value bits of the NC352 are evaluated
which applies to all threshold values.
Error Counters are Read Cyclically
Please note that the rate of measurement on the NC352 is set so that the error counter cannot overflow within one CPU cycle and therefore become
ambiguous. It is up to the user to decide what particular actions should be taken to deal with sporadic errors.
Filtering on the Start/Stop Interface
The start/stop inputs for the NC352 are protected against disturbances with an additional digital filter. As a result disturbance pulses <200 ns are
suppressed. This setting guarantees that the start/stop pulses for the most common measurement rods can take place unhindered because the
duration is in the range >1 s and therefore large enough to suppress the majority of disturbances.
Using the configuration module, the user has the option to switch off this filtering for each individual rod (see "Enable" in Table 401 "NC352 content
of the configuration files", on page 597). This option can be helpful when analyzing disturbances, but it is not recommended during normal operation.
Table 402: Guidelines for configuring the NC352 (cont.)
Firmware Update
If necessary, firmware for the NC352 can be updated via the CPU. This takes place using a BR
data module containing the new firmware, which must be spooled from the CPU on the NC352.
The download process on the NC352 is represented by the RUN LED blinking quickly. After
completion of the process, the LED changes to slow blinking or is continually lit. The new
firmware is booted the first time during the next start-up. The firmware version number can be
checked by reading status register 7 (see also bit 14 of configuration register 1).
600
B&R 2005 Modules Accessories Overview
17. Accessories
17.1 Overview
Model Number
Description
0AC240.9
2005 battery module
0G2001.00-090
2005 positioning accessory, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC154
3BM150.9
2005 dummy module
3TB162.9
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Table 403: Accessory Overview
601
B&R 2005 Modules Accessories AC240
17.2 AC240
The battery module is used for central data buffering on the 2005 PLC (e.g. data and real-time
clock for the XP152). It has two battery compartments for 9 V block cells.
Connection to the power supply module is made with a 40 cm long cable. The cable is connected
to a 5-pin terminal block. A second 5-pin terminal block is included in the delivery. The two
together replace the 10-pin terminal block on the power supply.
A single-width backplane is delivered with the battery module. The backplane is to be installed
to the left of the main backplane. The battery module is inserted on this backplane and is
therefore installed to the left of the power supply.
If a slot is free on the main backplane next to the power supply, the AC240 module can also be
inserted there.
17.2.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
0AC240.9
2005 battery module
Image
Table 404: AC240 order data
602

Product ID
AC240
C-UL-US Listed
Yes
Battery
9 V block cell
Number of Battery Compartments
Connection Cable
Length
Connection
40 cm
5-pin terminal block, prewired
Slot
On backplane included in the delivery
Buffer duration with two alkali manganese

"Extra Longlife" batteries
See technical data for the processor module used
Dimensions
Table 405: AC240 technical data
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
17.2.4 Battery Compartment

Two battery compartments are located behind the module door.
Figure 222: AC240 battery compartment
603

17.2.5 Backup Battery
Batteries installed in the AC240 battery module should be changed at the following interval:
Change interval:
every 4 years1)
Buffer Time
Buffer time is reduced when more processors e.g. IP161, XP152 or IF260 are operated from the
same backplane module and when the rechargeable battery is already empty.
Reductions factor = Number of all processor modules on the backplane
17.2.6 Changing 9 V Block Cells
The product design allows the battery to be changed with the PLC switched on or off. In some
countries, safety regulations do not allow batteries to be changed while the module is switched
on. Therefore, B&R recommends the battery is changed when the power supply is switched off.
When changing the batteries, make sure that one of both batteries remains inserted (data
buffering).
3) Open the module door.
4) Open the upper battery compartment using a screwdriver. The screwdriver should be placed
in the slot and by simulateneously levering it upwards and pulling at it, the compartment can
be opened.
5) Remove the battery compartment.
6) Removed the used battery.
7) Insert the new battery with correct polarity.
8) Place the battery compartment in the module again.
9) Open the lower battery compartment using a screwdriver.
10) Remove the battery compartment.
11) Removed the used battery.
1) The change interval refers to the average life span and operating conditions and are recommended by B&R. This does not correspond
to the maximum buffer duration.
604

12) Insert the new battery with correct polarity.
13) Place the battery compartment in the module again.
14) Close the module door.
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Batteries are considered hazardous waste. Used batteries should be

605
B&R 2005 Modules Accessories NC154 - PC Cable
17.3 NC154 - PC Cable

For NC154 modules with a Rev. <54.23, the software module BOOT has to be installed in the
module before the operating system update.
This cable is used to connect a PC to the NC154 module. The software module BOOT
(NC154.S1) can be downloaded using this connection.
17.3.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
0G2001.00-090
2005 positioning accessory, cable for operating system download directly from the PC to the NC154
Table 406: Cable NC154 - PC order data
606
B&R 2005 Modules Accessories Dummy Module - BM150
17.4 Dummy Module - BM150

Dummy modules are used to fill slots which are not needed. We recommend that you fill all
unused slots with dummy modules.
17.4.2 Order Data
Short Description
2005 dummy module
Image
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
3BM150.9
Table 407: BM150 order data

Product ID
BM150
Dimensions
Table 408: BM150 technical data
607
B&R 2005 Modules Accessories TB162
17.5 TB162
The NC154 module is equipped with three 12-pin terminal blocks. The TB162 terminal block is
used to make connections. The terminal blocks can be removed using an ejection lever on the
module.
17.5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
3TB162.9
Image
Table 409: TB162 order data

Product ID
TB162
Number of Pins
12
Type of Terminal
Screw clamps
Distance between Contacts

Resistance between Contacts
5.08 mm
6 m
Rated Voltage
250 V
Current Load
Max. 12 A / contact
Connection Cross Section

Cable Type
Removal
Stress Relief
0.14 mm -2.5 mm (AWG 26 - 12)

Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!)
Mechanical
Cable tie on the module
Table 410: TB162 technical data
608
B&R 2005 Modules Accessories TB170
17.6 TB170
Many B&R 2005 modules are connected using the a single row 20-pin terminal block.
The terminal block can be easily removed using two ejection levers on the module (see
Chapter 2 "Installation", Section 1 "Dimensions and Installation", on page 43).
17.6.2 Order Data
Short Description
Image
3TB170.9
3TB170.91
3TB170:90-02
3TB170:91-02
TB170.9
Chapter 3
B&R 2005 Modules
Model Number
TB170.91

Product ID
TB170
Number of Pins
20
Type of Terminal
Screw or cage clamps
5.08 mm
6 m
Rated Voltage
250 V
Current Load
1)
Max. 12 A / contact
0.14 mm -2.5 mm (AWG 26 - 12)
Cable Type
Removal
Mechanical
Stress Relief
Cable tie on the module

1) Take the respective limit data for the I/O modules into consideration!
609
B&R 2005 Modules Manuals Overview
18. Manuals
18.1 Overview
Model Number
Description
MASYS22005-0
MASYS22005-E
MASYS22005-F
Table 413: Manual Overview
610
General Accessories Overview
Chapter 4 General Accessories

1. Overview
Description
Retaining clips (500 pieces)
Page
---
0AC171.9
Glass tube fuses 5 x 20 mm, 20 pieces, 3.15 A T / 250 V
---
0AC200.9
Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, cylindrical battery
---
0AC201.9
---
0AC401.9
Encoder 5 V - 24 V, converter for 5 V encoders (abs. or incr.)
613
0AC410.9
Interface converter TTY - RS232
614
0AC912.9
615
0AC913.92
Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable (DSUB connector)
616
0AC913.93
Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable (TB704)
616
0AC916.9
Bus termination, RS485, active, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O, standard mounting rail
installation, supply voltage: 120 / 230 VAC
617
0G0001.00-090
Cable PC <-> PLC/PW, RS232, Online cable
---
0G0010.00-090
Cable I/O bus expansion, 1 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005/B&R 2010
---
0G0012.00-090
Cable I/O bus expansion, 2 m, bus expansion for B&R 2005 / B&R 2010
---
0G1000.00-090
Bus Connector, RS485, for PROFIBUS networks, remote I/O
618
0MC111.9
PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB FlashPROM
---
0MC112.9
PCMCIA Memory Card, 4 MB FlashPROM
---
0MC211.9
PCMCIA Memory Card, 2 MB SRAM
---
5CFCRD.0032-01
---
5CFCRD.0064-01
---
5CFCRD.0128-01
Compact Flash 128 MB TrueIDE SanDisk
---
5CFCRD.0256-01
---
5CFCRD.0512-01
---
7AC911.9
Bus connector, CAN
619
0TB704.9
620
0TB704.91
620
0TB708.91
621
Table 414: General accessories overview
611
Chapter 4
General Accessories
Model Number
0AC001.9
General Accessories Overview

Model Number
Description
Page
7TB710.9
622
7TB710.91
622
7TB710:90-01
Accessory terminal block, 10-pin , 30 pieces, screw clamp, 1.5 mm
622
7TB710:91-01
Accessory terminal block, 10-pin, 30 pieces, cage clamp, 2.5 mm
622
7TB712.9
623
7TB712.91
623
7TB712:90-02
Accessory terminal block, 12-pin , 20 pieces, screw clamp, 1.5 mm
623
7TB712:91-02
Accessory terminal block, 12-pin, 20 pieces, cage clamp, 1.5 mm
623
7TB718.9
624
7TB718.91
624
7TB718:90-02
Accessory terminal block, 18-pin, 20 pieces, screw clamp, 1.5 mm
624
7TB718:91-02
Accessory terminal block, 18-pin , 20 pieces, cage clamp, 1.5 mm
624
0TB108.91
Accessory terminal block, 2x12-pin, cage clamp, 1.0 mm
625
0TB112.91
625
0TB124.91
625
ECINT1-1
RS232/RS485 interface converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an
RS485 twisted pair bus, without lightning protection
626
ECINT1-11
RS232/RS485 interface converter, electrically isolated, for coupling RS232 interface modules to an
RS485 twisted pair bus, with lightning protection
626
Table 414: General accessories overview (cont.)
612
General Accessories AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V
2. AC401 Encoder 5 V - 24 V
The adapter is used as a converter for 5 V encoders. The 5 V differential signals delivered by the
encoder are converted to 24 V signals. Absolute and incremental encoders can be used.
2.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
0AC401.9
Encoder 5 V - 24 V, converter for 5 V encoders (abs. or

incr.)
Image
Chapter 4
General Accessories
613
General Accessories AC410 Interface Converter
3. AC410 Interface Converter

The AC410 interface converter is used to convert a TTY signal into an RS232 signal or an RS232
signal into a TTY signal. To be able to connect simple PANELWARE operator panels (e.g. P120
or P121), the 24 V supply voltage is converted into a 5 V output voltage. This voltage can be
loaded with up to 0.5 A.
The maximum baud rate is 19200 baud.
3.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
0AC410.9
Interface converter TTY - RS232
Image
614
General Accessories AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x
4. AC912 Bus Adapter, CAN 1x

The CAN bus adapter is used to connect a controller to a CAN network. The network connection
is made using the 6-pin terminal block. The connection to the controller is made using the 9-pin
DSUB socket. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus adapter. The terminating resistor
can be turned on or off.
The cable from the controller to the bus adapter is not in the B&R product line. It must be
constructed by the customer.
4.2 Order Data

Short Description
Image
Chapter 4
General Accessories
Model Number
0AC912.9
615
General Accessories AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x
5. AC913 Bus Adapter, CAN 2x

The CAN bus adapter is used to connect a controller to a CAN network. The network connection
is made using the 9-pin DSUB plug (C1) and the 9-pin DSUB socket (C2). The 6-pin terminal
block has a 30 cm long cable attached. Depending on the design of the bus adapter, the
connection to the controller is made using this cable via a DSUB connector or terminal block.
The termination resistor is integrated in the bus adapter. The terminating resistor can be turned
on or off.
The bus adapter is available to two version:
Model Number
Connection on the Cable
0AC913.92
9-pin DSUB housing
0AC913.93
4-pin plug
Table 418: AC913 available versions
5.2 Order Data
Model Number
Short Description
0AC913.92
Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable (DSUB connector)
0AC913.93
Bus adapter, CAN, 2 CAN interfaces, including 30 cm connection cable (TB704)
616
General Accessories AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active
6. AC916 Bus Termination, RS485 Active

An active bus termination is available for PROFIBUS networks and remote I/O. The active bus
termination allows the network to be terminated independent of the supply for the communication
modules.
The supply voltage for the active bus termination is 120 / 230 VAC.
6.2 Order Data

Short Description
Image
0AC916.9

Chapter 4
General Accessories
Model Number
617
General Accessories RS485 Bus Connector
7. RS485 Bus Connector

The RS485 bus connector is used to connect a controller to remote I/O, in a PROFIBUS network
or in a RS485 network. The termination resistor is integrated in the bus connector. The
terminating resistor can be turned on or off.
7.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
0G1000.00-090

remote I/O
Image
Table 421: RS485 bus connector order data
618
General Accessories AC911 Bus Connector, CAN
8. AC911 Bus Connector, CAN

The bus connector enables you to:
Exchange a CAN node without shutting down the network since the connection is not
broken, and
Change the termination resistance quickly and easily (e.g. if the last node in a network is
removed).
8.2 Order Data

Short Description
Bus connector, CAN
Image
Chapter 4
General Accessories
Model Number
7AC911.9
8.3 Technical Data

Product ID
AC911
Lines
Connection for two bus lines
120 - can be switched on
Stress Relief
Built-in
Table 423: AC911 technical data
619
General Accessories TB704 4-pin Terminal Block
9. TB704 4-pin Terminal Block

This single row 4-pin terminal block is mainly used to connect the supply voltage.
9.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
Image
0TB704.9
0TB704.91
0TB704.9
0TB704.91
9.3 Technical Data

Product ID
0TB704.9
0TB704.91
Number of Pins
Type of Terminal
4
Screw clamps
Cage clamps
5.08 mm
5 m
Rated Voltage
250 V
Current Load
1)
Max. 10 A / contact
0.08 mm - 1.5 mm (AWG 22 - 12)
Cable Type
0.08 mm -2.5 mm (AWG 26 - 12)

620

The terminal block TB708 is used to connect various B&R modules. Removal is simplified by two
ejection levers on the terminal block.
10.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
0TB708.91
Image
10.3 Technical Data

TB708
Number of Pins
Type of Terminal
Cage clamps
Chapter 4
General Accessories
Product ID
3.5 mm
Rated Voltage
125 V
Current Load 1)
Max. 12 A / contact
0.08 mm - 1.5 mm (AWG 28 -16)
Cable Type
Removal
Mechanical

621

This single row 10-pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. The terminal block can be
easily removed using two ejection levers on the module.
11.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
7TB710.9
Image
7TB710.91
7TB710:90-01
Accessory terminal block, 10-pin , 30 pieces, screw clamp,

1.5 mm
7TB710:91-01
Accessory terminal block, 10-pin, 30 pieces, cage clamp,

2.5 mm
TB710.9
TB710.91
11.3 Technical Data

Product ID
7TB710.9
7TB710.91
Number of Pins
Type of Terminal
10
Screw clamps
Cage clamps
5.08 mm
6 m
Rated Voltage
250 V
Current Load 1)
Max. 12 A / contact
0.14 mm - 1.5 mm (AWG 26 -16)
Cable Type
0.14 mm -2.5 mm (AWG 26 - 12)
Removal
Mechanical

622

This single row 12-pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. Removal is simplified by
two ejection levers on the terminal block.
12.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
7TB712.9
Image
7TB712.91
7TB712:90-02
Accessory terminal block, 12-pin , 20 pieces, screw clamp,

1.5 mm
7TB712:91-02
Accessory terminal block, 12-pin, 20 pieces, cage clamp,

1.5 mm
Chapter 4
General Accessories
TB712.9
TB712.91
12.3 Technical Data

Product ID
TB712
Number of Pins
12
Type of Terminal
3.5 mm
Rated Voltage
125 V
Current Load 1)
Max. 12 A / contact
0.08 mm - 1.5 mm (AWG 28 -16)
Cable Type
Removal
Mechanical

623

This single row 18-pin terminal block is used to connect I/O modules. Removal is simplified by
two ejection levers on the terminal block.
13.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
7TB718.9
Image
7TB718.91
7TB718:90-02

1.5 mm
7TB718:91-02

1.5 mm
TB718.9
TB718.91
13.3 Technical Data

Product ID
TB718
Number of Pins
18
Type of Terminal
3.5 mm
Rated Voltage
125 V
Current Load 1)
Max. 12 A / contact
0.08 mm - 1.5 mm (AWG 28 -16)
Cable Type
Removal
Mechanical

624
General Accessories TB108, TB112 and TB124, 8/12/24-pin terminal blocks
14. TB108, TB112 and TB124, 8/12/24-pin terminal blocks

The terminal blocks TB108, TB112 and TB124 are used for connecting various B&R modules.
TB108 and TB112 can be combined and used instead of the TB124.
Model Number
Short Description
0TB108.91
0TB112.91
0TB124.91
Chapter 4
General Accessories
14.2 Order Data
Table 434: TB108, TB112 and TB124 order data
14.3 Technical Data

Product ID
TB108
Number of Pins
Type of Terminal
TB124
12
24
2-row cage clamp terminal block
3.5 mm
Rated Voltage
Current Load
TB112
50 V
1)
Max. 5 A / contact
0.5 mm -1.0 mm (AWG 22 -18)
Cable Type
Table 435: TB108, TB112 and TB124 technical data

625
General Accessories INT1 Interface Converter
15. INT1 Interface Converter

The INT1 interface converter is used to convert RS232 interface signals to an RS485 signal
level. It is used if:
Data transfer over a long distance is required which cannot be bridged by an RS232
interface. The distance between two stations can be max. 5000 m when using shielded
RS485 cables.
Electrical isolation is required for the interface.
A PLC is to be connected to a network using an RS232 interface.
The interface converter INT1 has lightning protection.
15.2 Order Data

Model Number
Short Description
ECINT1-1
RS232/RS485 interface converter, electrically isolated, for

coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted
pair bus, without lightning protection
Image
ECINT1-11
RS232/RS485 Interface Converter, electrically isolated, for

coupling RS232 interface modules to an RS485 twisted
pair bus, with lightning protection
Table 436: INT1 interface converter order data
15.3 Supply
The INT1 interface converter requires an external 24 VDC supply voltage. Current consumption
can be maximum of 400 mA.
626
Standards and Certifications Standards and Limits Used
Chapter 5 Standards and Certifications

1. Standards and Limits Used
The product standard EN 61131-2 is generally valid for B&R industrial products (identical with
IEC 61131-2). The following standards provide a detailed definition of proper functionality in a
typical industrial environment (charged with electromagnetic energy):
Standard
Description
IEC 61000-6-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic standard - emission standard

Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 50081-2 will be replaced by IEC 61000-6-4)
IEC/CISPR 11
Information technology equipment - radio disturbance characteristics

limits and measuring procedures
IEC 61000-6-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Generic standard, emission standard

Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 50082-2 will be replaced by IEC 61000-6-2)
EN 61131-2 Edition 2
Programmable logic controllers

Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests
UL 508
Industrial Control Equipment, (UL = Underwriters Laboratories)
EN 60204-1
Safety of machinery - electrical equipment on machines

Part 1: General requirements
Chapter 5
Standards and
Certifications
Table 437: Overview of standards
627

Limit Values
In the following tables, the criteria A and B describe the test conditions:
Criteria
Description
Uninterrupted operation during the test.
Brief interruption during the test allowed.
Table 438: The criteria A and B describe the test conditions

IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 61131-2 Ed. 2
Contact discharge to powder-coated and bare metal
parts
4 kV, criteria B
Air discharge to plastic parts
8 kV, criteria B
Table 439: Limits for electrostatic discharge

IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic Fields
Housing, completely wired
80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m, criteria A

80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz
Table 440: Limits for electromagnetic fields

IEC 61000-4-4 Burst, Fast Transients
IEC 61131-2 Edition 2
B&R Limits
Power supplies and AC inputs/outputs
2 kV, 1 min, criteria B
4 kV, 5 min, criteria A
Data cable
Digital inputs/outputs
Analog I/O
Table 441: Limits for fast transients

IEC 61000-4-5 Surge
Common Mode, unsymmetrical
Differential Mode, symmetrical
AC power supplies
2 kV (12 ), criteria B
DC power supplies
0.5 kV (2 ), criteria B
Digital and analog I/O, AC, unshielded

AC auxiliary voltage outputs for sensors, etc.
Digital and analog I/O, DC, unshielded

Data lines, unshielded
DC auxiliary voltage outputs for sensors, etc.
---
All shielded lines
Table 442: Limits for surge
628

IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted Disturbances (radio frequency)
Network I/O
Signal connections >10 m
Functional ground connection
150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, (in broadcast range 3 V), criteria A

80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz
Table 443: Limits for conducted disturbances (radio frequency)

IEC 60664-1 Pollution Degree
Pollution degree 2: non-conductive material
Table 444: Degree of pollution

EN 60068-2-6, Vibration
Frequency Range [Hz]
Continuous
Periodic
5f<9
1.75 mm amplitude
3.5 mm amplitude
9 f 150
0.5 g constant acceleration
1 g constant acceleration
f > 150
not defined
not defined
Table 445: Limit values for vibration

EN 60068-2-27, shock
15 g over 11 ms, half sine waves, 3 shocks per axis and direction (total of 18 shocks)
Chapter 5
Standards and
Certifications
Table 446: Limit values for shock
629
Standards and Certifications International Standards
2. International Standards
B&R products and services comply with all applicable standards. They are international
standards from organizations such as ISO, IEC and CENELEC, as well as national standards
from organizations such as UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, VE, etc. We give special consideration to the
reliability of our products in an industrial environment.
Certifications
USA and Canada
Europe
Russian Federation
630
All important B&R products are tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and are checked
quarterly by a UL inspector. This mark is valid in the USA and Canada and makes it considerably easier
to license your machines and systems in these areas.
All harmonized EN standards for the valid guidelines are met.
GOST-R certification is available for the export of all B&R products in the Russian Federation.
Abbildungsverzeichnis
Figure 1:
Figure 2:
Figure 3:
Figure 4:
Figure 5:
Figure 6:
Figure 7:
Figure 8:
Figure 9:
Figure 10:
Figure 11:
Figure 12:
Figure 13:
Figure 14:
Figure 15:
Figure 16:
Figure 17:
Figure 18:
Figure 19:
Figure 20:
Figure 21:
Figure 22:
Figure 23:
Figure 24:
Figure 25:
Figure 26:
Figure 27:
Figure 28:
Figure 29:
Figure 30:
Figure 31:
Figure 32:
Figure 33:
Figure 34:
Figure 35:
Figure 36:
Figure 37:
Figure 38:
Figure 39:
Figure 40:
Figure 41:
Figure 42:
Figure 43:
Figure 44:
Figure 45:
Figure 46:
B&R SYSTEM 2000 ............................................................................................. 28

Mounting the B&R SYSTEM 2005 backplane ...................................................... 32
Combined system and I/O bus ............................................................................. 33
TB170 terminal block............................................................................................ 34
Local I/O bus expansion....................................................................................... 36
Remote I/O system............................................................................................... 38
PROFIBUS network ............................................................................................. 41
B&R SYSTEM 2005 module dimensions ............................................................. 43
Basic module design ............................................................................................ 44
Backplane dimensions ......................................................................................... 45
Mounting rail......................................................................................................... 46
Fastening lever positions...................................................................................... 47
Installing the module ............................................................................................ 48
Installing the backplane on the mounting rail ....................................................... 48
Tipping the module back ...................................................................................... 49
Removing a module ............................................................................................. 49
TB170 terminal block............................................................................................ 50
Inserting a terminal block ..................................................................................... 51
Removing terminal block ...................................................................................... 52
Cabling terminal blocks ........................................................................................ 53
Stress relief using cable ties................................................................................. 53
Basic design ......................................................................................................... 54
System organization............................................................................................. 55
Local bus with expansion ..................................................................................... 57
Remote I/O Bus.................................................................................................... 58
Wiring remote master and slave modules ............................................................ 59
Bus cable Station connection .......................................................................... 60
Resistor diagram .................................................................................................. 60
Remote connector ................................................................................................ 61
Backplane numbers for addressing...................................................................... 63
Relationship between the number of nodes and bus length ................................ 65
Bus Cable - station connection............................................................................. 66
Terminating resistor connections for 9-pin DSUB plug ........................................ 67
CAN bus connector 7AC911.9 ............................................................................. 67
Terminating resistor connections for 4-pin multipoint connector .......................... 68
Dissipation of electromagnetic disturbance and grounding via
the mounting rail................................................................................................... 69
Grounding the mounting rail ................................................................................. 70
Using a contact washer with lacquered or coated back walls .............................. 70
Grounding terminal strip ....................................................................................... 71
Cable shield grounding......................................................................................... 72
Wiring ................................................................................................................... 74
Layout of the module............................................................................................ 74
Inserting and removing I/O modules while the controller is running..................... 76
BP15x module address ........................................................................................ 89
3BP15x.41 backup battery ................................................................................... 91
Holding the 3BP15x.41 battery correctly .............................................................. 93
631
Figure Index
Figure Index
Figure Index
Figure 47:
Figure 48:
Figure 49:
Figure 50:
Figure 51:
Figure 52:
Figure 53:
Figure 54:
Figure 55:
Figure 56:
Figure 57:
Figure 58:
Figure 59:
Figure 60:
Figure 61:
Figure 62:
Figure 63:
Figure 64:
Figure 65:
Figure 66:
Figure 67:
Figure 68:
Figure 69:
Figure 70:
Figure 71:
Figure 72:
Figure 73:
Figure 74:
Figure 75:
Figure 76:
Figure 77:
Figure 78:
Figure 79:
Figure 80:
Figure 81:
Figure 82:
Figure 83:
Figure 84:
Figure 85:
Figure 86:
Figure 87:
Figure 88:
Figure 89:
Figure 90:
Figure 91:
632
The removal strip must be located underneath the 3BP15x.41 battery ............... 93
Power supply READY relay.................................................................................. 96
Fuses for the power supply modules.................................................................... 97
Power supply module interfaces for expansion slaves......................................... 98
EX150 RS485 interface...................................................................................... 107
EX250 RS485 interface...................................................................................... 112
EX250 module fastener...................................................................................... 113
EX350 installation and communication interface................................................ 116
CP260 operational and connection elements..................................................... 123
CP340, CP360 and CP380 operational and connection elements..................... 134
CP382 operational and connection elements..................................................... 135
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 - removing the cover for
the lithium battery ............................................................................................... 140
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 - holding the battery correctly .................... 140
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 - removal strip should be pulled
to the right .......................................................................................................... 141
IF260 operational and connection elements ...................................................... 148
IP161 operational and connection elements ...................................................... 162
IP161 bus adapter for the AC961....................................................................... 165
IP161 connections for analog inputs .................................................................. 167
IP161 shielded connection ................................................................................. 167
IP161 potentiometer connection......................................................................... 168
IP161 connection for analog outputs.................................................................. 169
IP161 shielded connection ................................................................................. 169
IP161 connecting an I/O group with four inputs ................................................. 170
IP161 connecting an I/O group with four outputs ............................................... 170
IP161 connecting an I/O group with two inputs and two outputs........................ 171
XP152 operational and connection elements..................................................... 178
XP152 module fastener...................................................................................... 182
DM455 installation guidelines............................................................................. 193
DM455 input circuit diagram............................................................................... 194
DM455 output circuit diagram ............................................................................ 195
DM455 maximum permitted load on the motor windings ................................... 198
Input filter for digital input modules..................................................................... 200
Digital input modules sink/source connections................................................... 201
DI450 connection example 1 for pulse measurement ........................................ 207
DI450 connection example 2 for pulse measurement ........................................ 207
DI450 gate measurement principle .................................................................... 208
DI450 connection example 1 for gate measurement.......................................... 209
DI450 connection example 2 for gate measurement.......................................... 210
DI450 period measurement principle ................................................................. 211
DI450 connection example for period measurement.......................................... 212
DI450 input circuit diagram for inputs 1 - 6 (counter and gate inputs)................ 213
DI450 input circuit diagram for inputs 7 - 16....................................................... 213
DI475 / DI476 input circuit diagram .................................................................... 218
DI477 connection elements................................................................................ 222
Figure 92:
Figure 93:
Figure 94:
Figure 95:
Figure 96:
Figure 97:
Figure 98:
Figure 99:
Figure 100:
Figure 101:
Figure 102:
Figure 103:
Figure 104:
Figure 105:
Figure 106:
Figure 107:
Figure 108:
Figure 109:
Figure 110:
Figure 111:
Figure 112:
Figure 113:
Figure 114:
Figure 115:
Figure 116:
Figure 117:
Figure 118:
Figure 119:
Figure 120:
Figure 121:
Figure 122:
Figure 123:
Figure 124:
Figure 125:
Figure 126:
Figure 127:
Figure 128:
Figure 129:
Figure 130:
Figure 131:
Figure 132:
Figure 133:
Figure 134:
Figure 135:
Figure 136:
Figure 137:
Figure 138:
DI477 input circuit diagram................................................................................. 225

DI486 Connection Elements............................................................................... 228
DI875 connection elements................................................................................ 241
DO479 connection example ............................................................................... 253
DO479 output circuit diagram............................................................................. 253
DO479 schematic representation for braking voltage ........................................ 254
DO479 switching frequency in relation to a given inductance............................ 255
DO480 schematic representation for braking voltage ........................................ 261
DO480 switching frequency in relation to a given inductance............................ 262
DO486 connection elements .............................................................................. 266
DO486 connection example ............................................................................... 268
DO486 switching inductive loads ....................................................................... 270
DO650 / DO750 output circuit diagram .............................................................. 276
DM476 connection elements.............................................................................. 294
DM476 connection example for digital outputs .................................................. 297
DM486 connection elements.............................................................................. 304
DM486 digital output connection example ......................................................... 307
DM486 digital input connection examples (sink) ................................................ 308
DM486 digital inputs connection examples (source).......................................... 308
DM486 switching inductive loads ....................................................................... 310
AI350 / AI375 signal cable connection ............................................................... 316
AI350 / AI375 shielded connection..................................................................... 317
AI350 / AI375 input circuit diagram .................................................................... 317
AI775 signal cable connection............................................................................ 328
AI775 shielded connection ................................................................................. 329
AI775 input circuit diagram................................................................................. 329
AI780 connection elements ................................................................................ 340
AI780 encoder connection with external supply ................................................. 342
AI780 encoder connection with internal supply .................................................. 343
AI780 two wire connection with supply via AI780............................................... 343
AI780 input circuit diagram................................................................................. 344
AI780 derating .................................................................................................... 345
AI780 standardization......................................................................................... 352
AO350 signal cable connection.......................................................................... 363
AO350 shielded connection ............................................................................... 364
AO350 output circuit diagram............................................................................. 364
633
Figure Index
Figure Index
Figure Index
Figure 139:
Figure 140:
Figure 141:
Figure 142:
Figure 143:
Figure 144:
Figure 145:
Figure 146:
Figure 147:
Figure 148:
Figure 149:
Figure 150:
Figure 151:
Figure 152:
Figure 153:
Figure 154:
Figure 155:
Figure 156:
Figure 157:
Figure 158:
Figure 159:
Figure 160:
Figure 161:
Figure 162:
Figure 163:
Figure 164:
Figure 165:
Figure 166:
Figure 167:
Figure 168:
Figure 169:
Figure 170:
Figure 171:
Figure 172:
Figure 173:
Figure 174:
Figure 175:
Figure 176:
Figure 177:
Figure 178:
Figure 179:
Figure 180:
Figure 181:
Figure 182:
Figure 183:
Figure 184:
Figure 185:
634
AO360 status LEDs............................................................................................ 367

AO775 shielded connection ............................................................................... 373
AM050 signal cable connection.......................................................................... 379
AM050 shielded connection ............................................................................... 380
AM050 input circuit diagram............................................................................... 380
AM050 output circuit diagram............................................................................. 380
AM055 potentiometer operation ......................................................................... 406
AT350 signal cable connection .......................................................................... 441
AT350 / AT450 shielded connection .................................................................. 442
AT450 signal cable connection .......................................................................... 442
AT350 input circuit diagram................................................................................ 443
AT350 / AT450 scan order ................................................................................. 449
AT660 shielded connection ................................................................................ 456
AT660 operation using an external compensation reference junction ............... 459
UM161 connection elements.............................................................................. 472
UM161 analog inputs/outputs connection example............................................ 475
UM161 potentiometer connection example........................................................ 475
UM161 digital inputs/outputs connection example ............................................. 476
UM161 input circuit diagram analog inputs ........................................................ 476
UM161 input circuit diagram digital inputs.......................................................... 477
UM161 output circuit diagram analog outputs.................................................... 477
UM161 output circuit diagram digital outputs ..................................................... 477
UM161 output circuit diagram potentiometer voltage outputs ............................ 478
EX282 operational and connection elements..................................................... 488
EX282 station number dial ................................................................................. 491
EX282 RJ45 ports .............................................................................................. 492
Figure Index
IF686 station number switch .............................................................................. 535
IF686 ETHERNET Powerlink interface .............................................................. 536
NW150 operational and connection elements.................................................... 544
NW150 number switch ....................................................................................... 545
NC150 operational and connection elements .................................................... 551
NC150 encoder supply....................................................................................... 552
NC150 asymmetrical encoder: inverted inputs connected to the trigger level ... 553
NC150 output diagram for analog outputs ......................................................... 554
NC150 input circuit for counter inputs ................................................................ 555
NC150 counting direction in operation mode positioning ................................... 559
NC150 4x evaluation .......................................................................................... 560
NC150 2x evaluation .......................................................................................... 560
NC150 1x evaluation, positive............................................................................ 560
NC150 1x evaluation, negative .......................................................................... 560
NC150 2 channel, positive edge ........................................................................ 561
NC150 2 channel, negative edge ....................................................................... 561
NC150 1 channel, positive edge ........................................................................ 561
NC150 1 channel, negative edge ....................................................................... 561
NC154 interface used to download the BOOT software module........................ 571
NC157 interface used to download the BOOT software module........................ 579
NC157 connection example for trigger inputs .................................................... 580
NC352 status LEDs............................................................................................ 584
NC352 input circuit diagram ............................................................................... 586
NC352 output circuit diagram............................................................................. 587
NC352 ultrasonic transducer supply .................................................................. 587
NC352 digital inputs/outputs connection example ............................................. 588
AC240 battery compartment .............................................................................. 603
Figure Index
Figure 186:
Figure 187:
Figure 188:
Figure 189:
Figure 190:
Figure 191:
Figure 192:
Figure 193:
Figure 194:
Figure 195:
Figure 196:
Figure 197:
Figure 198:
Figure 199:
Figure 200:
Figure 201:
Figure 202:
Figure 203:
Figure 204:
Figure 205:
Figure 206:
Figure 207:
Figure 208:
Figure 209:
Figure 210:
Figure 211:
Figure 212:
Figure 213:
Figure 214:
Figure 215:
Figure 216:
Figure 217:
Figure 218:
Figure 219:
Figure 220:
Figure 221:
Figure 222:
635
Figure Index
636
Tabellenverzeichnis
Table 1:
Table 2:
Table 3:
Table 4:
Table 5:
Table 6:
Table 7:
Table 8:
Table 9:
Table 10:
Table 11:
Table 12:
Table 13:
Table 14:
Table 15:
Table 16:
Table 17:
Table 18:
Table 19:
Table 20:
Table 21:
Table 22:
Table 23:
Table 24:
Table 25:
Table 26:
Table 27:
Table 28:
Table 29:
Table 30:
Table 31:
Table 32:
Table 33:
Table 34:
Table 35:
Table 36:
Table 37:
Table 38:
Table 39:
Table 40:
Table 41:
Table 42:
Table 43:
Table 44:
Table 45:
Manual history ....................................................................................................... 25

Safety guidelines ................................................................................................... 27
Definition of Terms ................................................................................................ 28
Differences in data type abbreviations between B&R Automation Studio
and PG2000 .......................................................................................................... 31
Transfer distance of a remote I/O system ............................................................. 37
Connecting B&R 2005 to B&R 2010...................................................................... 39
Connecting B&R 2010 to B&R 2005...................................................................... 40
Number of slots depending on the slave type ....................................................... 40
Transfer distance in a PROFIBUS network ........................................................... 41
Width of B&R SYSTEM 2005 PLC modules.......................................................... 43
B&R SYSTEM 2005 module rack.......................................................................... 45
Example for power output table............................................................................. 55
PS465 power comparison - example system ........................................................ 55
Cable for I/O bus expansion .................................................................................. 56
Distances of a remote system ............................................................................... 58
Specifications for the two twisted pair cables ........................................................ 59
Permitted configurations........................................................................................ 62
Bus length and transfer rate .................................................................................. 64
Cable type ............................................................................................................. 65
Bus length for 12 nodes depending on the baud rate............................................ 65
CAN signals for CiA/CAL....................................................................................... 66
Using DSUB connectors........................................................................................ 73
Environmental temperature during operation / relative humidity ........................... 77
Overview of B&R 2005 modules, sorted alphabetically according
to product ID .......................................................................................................... 79
B&R 2005 module overview sorted according to group ........................................ 83
BP15x insert modules depending on backplane ................................................... 90
BP15x order data................................................................................................... 90
BP15x technical data............................................................................................. 91
3BP15x.41 buffer battery data............................................................................... 92
Power supply module overview ............................................................................. 94
Power supply modules 10-pin terminal blocks ...................................................... 95
Power supply modules operational states ............................................................. 95
PS465 / PS477 order data................................................................................... 100
PS465 / PS477 technical data............................................................................. 100
Bus controller module overview........................................................................... 102
EX150 order data ................................................................................................ 103
EX150 technical data........................................................................................... 104
EX150 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 105
EX150 operational and connection elements ...................................................... 106
EX250 order data ................................................................................................ 109
EX250 operational and connection elements ...................................................... 111
EX250 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 111
EX350 order data ................................................................................................ 114
637
Table Index
Table Index
Table Index
Table 46:
Table 47:
Table 48:
Table 49:
Table 50:
Table 51:
Table 52:
Table 53:
Table 54:
Table 55:
Table 56:
Table 57:
Table 58:
Table 59:
Table 60:
Table 61:
Table 62:
Table 63:
Table 64:
Table 65:
Table 66:
Table 67:
Table 68:
Table 69:
Table 70:
Table 71:
Table 72:
Table 73:
Table 74:
Table 75:
Table 76:
Table 77:
Table 78:
Table 79:
Table 80:
Table 81:
Table 82:
Table 83:
Table 84:
Table 85:
Table 86:
Table 87:
Table 88:
Table 89:
Table 90:
Table 91:
Table 92:
638
CPU overview...................................................................................................... 119

CP260 order data ................................................................................................ 120
CP260 technical data .......................................................................................... 121
CP260 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 122
CP260 operating modes for PLC software V2.0............................................... 124
CP260 operating modes for PLC software > V2.0 .............................................. 124
CP260 RS232 Interface (IF1) .............................................................................. 125
CP260 PCMCIA memory cards........................................................................... 125
CP260 interface module inserts .......................................................................... 126
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 order data ................................................... 130
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 technical data ............................................. 131
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 limitations.................................................... 132
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 Status LEDs................................................ 133
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 operating modes......................................... 136
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 RS232 interface (IF1) ................................. 136
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 aPCI interface module inserts .................... 137
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 battery changing intervals........................... 138
CP340, CP360, CP380 and CP382 data for the backup battery......................... 139
IF260 order data .................................................................................................. 146
IF260 technical data ............................................................................................ 146
IF260 status LEDs ............................................................................................... 147
IF260 reset button ............................................................................................... 148
IF260 operating mode switch .............................................................................. 149
IF260 interface module inserts ............................................................................ 149
IP161 order data.................................................................................................. 155
IP161 technical data ............................................................................................ 156
IP161 status LEDs............................................................................................... 163
IP161 reset button ............................................................................................... 163
IP161 CAN node number switch ......................................................................... 163
IP161 RS232 interfaces (IF1 and IF3)................................................................. 164
IP161 CAN interface (IF2) ................................................................................... 165
IP161 I/O connections ......................................................................................... 166
XP152 order data ................................................................................................ 176
XP152 technical data........................................................................................... 177
XP152 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 178
XP152 reset button.............................................................................................. 179
XP152 CAN node number switch ........................................................................ 179
XP152 RS232 Interface (IF1) .............................................................................. 180
XP152 CAN interface (IF2).................................................................................. 180
Programmable module overview ......................................................................... 185
DM455 order data................................................................................................ 186
DM455 technical data.......................................................................................... 187
DM455 Status LEDs ............................................................................................ 189
DM455 pin assignments ...................................................................................... 190
DM455 connection examples .............................................................................. 190
DM455 outputs .................................................................................................... 196
DM455 operating modes ..................................................................................... 196
Table 93:
Table 94:
Table 95:
Table 96:
Table 97:
Table 98:
Table 99:
Table 100:
Table 101:
Table 102:
Table 103:
Table 104:
Table 105:
Table 106:
Table 107:
Table 108:
Table 109:
Table 110:
Table 111:
Table 112:
Table 113:
Table 114:
Table 115:
Table 116:
Table 117:
Table 118:
Table 119:
Table 120:
Table 121:
Table 122:
Table 123:
Table 124:
Table 125:
Table 126:
Table 127:
Table 128:
Table 129:
Table 130:
Table 131:
Table 132:
Table 133:
Table 134:
Table 135:
Table 136:
Table 137:
Table 138:
Table 139:
Digital input module overview.............................................................................. 202

Digital input module overview (cont.)................................................................... 202
DI450 order data.................................................................................................. 203
DI450 technical data............................................................................................ 203
DI450 status LEDs............................................................................................... 205
DI450 pin assignment.......................................................................................... 206
DI450 variable declaration................................................................................... 214
DI475 / DI476 order data ..................................................................................... 216
DI475 / DI476 technical data ............................................................................... 216
DI475 / DI476 status LEDs .................................................................................. 217
DI475 / DI476 pin assignments ........................................................................... 218
DI475 / DI476 variable declaration ...................................................................... 219
DI477 order data.................................................................................................. 220
DI477 status LEDs............................................................................................... 221
DI477 pin connections for the upper 25-pin DSUB socket .................................. 223
DI477 pin connections for the lower 25-pin DSUB socket................................... 224
DI486 order data.................................................................................................. 226
DI486 status LEDs............................................................................................... 227
DI486 pin assignment for terminal block X1 ........................................................ 229
DI695 order data.................................................................................................. 233
DI695 status LEDs............................................................................................... 235
DI695 pin assignment.......................................................................................... 236
DI875 Examples of possible encoders ................................................................ 238
DI875 order data.................................................................................................. 239
DI875 status LEDs............................................................................................... 241
DI875 pin assignments for terminal block X1 ...................................................... 242
DI875 open line register (read)............................................................................ 245
DI875 short circuit register (read) ........................................................................ 246
Overview of digital output modules...................................................................... 248
Overview of digital output modules...................................................................... 248
DO479 order data................................................................................................ 249
DO479 technical data .......................................................................................... 249
DO479 status LEDs............................................................................................. 251
DO479 pin assignment ........................................................................................ 252
DO479 the potential difference must be smaller than 50 V ................................. 252
DO479 variable declaration ................................................................................. 255
DO480 order data................................................................................................ 256
639
Table Index
Table Index
Table Index
Table 140:
Table 141:
Table 142:
Table 143:
Table 144:
Table 145:
Table 146:
Table 147:
Table 148:
Table 149:
Table 150:
Table 151:
Table 152:
Table 153:
Table 154:
Table 155:
Table 156:
Table 157:
Table 158:
Table 159:
Table 160:
Table 161:
Table 162:
Table 163:
Table 164:
Table 165:
Table 166:
Table 167:
Table 168:
Table 169:
Table 170:
Table 171:
Table 172:
Table 173:
Table 174:
Table 175:
Table 176:
Table 177:
Table 178:
Table 179:
Table 180:
Table 181:
Table 182:
Table 183:
Table 184:
Table 185:
Table 186:
640

DO480 status LEDs............................................................................................. 258
DO480 the potential difference must be smaller than 50 V ................................. 259
DO480 connection example ................................................................................ 260
DO486 order data................................................................................................ 263
DO486 Status LEDs ............................................................................................ 265
DO486 pin assignments for terminal block X1 .................................................... 267
DO486 pin assignments for terminal block X2 .................................................... 268
DO650 / DO750 order data ................................................................................. 272
DO650 / DO750 technical data............................................................................ 272
DO650 / DO750 status LEDs .............................................................................. 274
DO650 / DO750 pin assignments........................................................................ 275
DO650 / DO750 maximum potential difference not exceeded ............................ 275
DO650 / DO750 variable declaration................................................................... 276
DO690 order data................................................................................................ 277
DO690 status LEDs............................................................................................. 279
DO760 order data................................................................................................ 282
DO760 status LEDs............................................................................................. 285
DO760 maximum potential difference not exceeded........................................... 286
DO760 electrical load .......................................................................................... 289
Digital Mixed Module Overview ........................................................................... 290
DM476 order data................................................................................................ 291
DM476 Status LEDs ............................................................................................ 293
DM476 pin connections for the upper 25-pin DSUB socket ................................ 295
DM476 pin assignments for the lower 25-pin DSUB plug ................................... 296
DM476 variable declaration................................................................................. 299
DM476 status register states............................................................................... 300
DM486 order data................................................................................................ 301
DM486 Status LEDs ............................................................................................ 304
DM486 pin assignments for terminal block X1 .................................................... 305
DM486 pin assignments for terminal block X2 .................................................... 306
DM486 variable declaration................................................................................. 311
Analog Input Module Overview............................................................................ 312
AI350 / AI375 order data ..................................................................................... 313
AI350 / AI375 technical data................................................................................ 313
Table 187:
Table 188:
Table 189:
Table 190:
Table 191:
Table 192:
Table 193:
Table 194:
Table 195:
Table 196:
Table 197:
Table 198:
Table 199:
Table 200:
Table 201:
Table 202:
Table 203:
Table 204:
Table 205:
Table 206:
Table 207:
Table 208:
Table 209:
Table 210:
Table 211:
Table 212:
Table 213:
Table 214:
Table 215:
Table 216:
Table 217:
Table 218:
Table 219:
Table 220:
Table 221:
Table 222:
Table 223:
Table 224:
Table 225:
Table 226:
Table 227:
Table 228:
Table 229:
Table 230:
Table 231:
Table 232:
Table 233:
AI350 / AI375 status LEDs .................................................................................. 315

AI350 / AI375 pin assignments............................................................................ 316
AI350 / AI375 special operating mode 1: Direct software timing ......................... 318
AI350 / AI375 special operating mode 2: Software timing using default time...... 319
AI350 Relationship between input voltage and converter value.......................... 320
AI375 Relationship between input voltage and converter value.......................... 320
AI350 / AI375 variable declaration....................................................................... 320
AI775 order data.................................................................................................. 325
AI775 technical data ............................................................................................ 325
AI775 status LEDs............................................................................................... 327
AI775 pin assignment .......................................................................................... 328
AI775 Special Operating Mode 1: Direct software timing .................................... 330
AI775 Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time................. 331
AI775 Relationship between input current and converter value .......................... 332
AI775 variable declaration ................................................................................... 332
AI780 order data.................................................................................................. 337
AI780 technical data ............................................................................................ 337
AI780 status LEDs............................................................................................... 340
AI780 pin assignments for terminal block X1 ...................................................... 341
AI780 pin assignment for terminal block X2 ........................................................ 342
AI780 variable declaration Data Area.................................................................. 346
Defining the Coordinates ..................................................................................... 353
Analog output module overview .......................................................................... 360
AO350 order data ................................................................................................ 361
AO350 technical data .......................................................................................... 361
AO350 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 362
AO350 pin assignment ........................................................................................ 363
AO350 relationship between numerical value and output voltage....................... 364
AO350 variable declaration ................................................................................. 365
AO360 order data ................................................................................................ 366
AO360 pin assignments ...................................................................................... 368
AO360 relationship between numerical value and output voltage....................... 369
AO775 order data ................................................................................................ 370
AO775 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 371
AO775 pin assignment ........................................................................................ 372
AO775 relationship between numerical value and output current ....................... 373
Analog Mixed Module Overview .......................................................................... 375
AM050 order data................................................................................................ 376
AM050 technical data .......................................................................................... 376
AM050 status LEDs............................................................................................. 378
AM050 pin assignment ........................................................................................ 379
AM050 Special Operating Mode 1: Direct software timing .................................. 382
AM050 Special Operating Mode 2: Software timing using default time............... 383
641
Table Index
Table Index
Table Index
Table 234:
Table 235:
Table 236:
Table 237:
Table 238:
Table 239:
Table 240:
Table 241:
Table 242:
Table 243:
Table 244:
Table 245:
Table 246:
Table 247:
Table 248:
Table 249:
Table 250:
Table 251:
Table 252:
Table 253:
Table 254:
Table 255:
Table 256:
Table 257:
Table 258:
Table 259:
Table 260:
Table 261:
Table 262:
Table 263:
Table 264:
Table 265:
Table 266:
Table 267:
Table 268:
Table 269:
Table 270:
Table 271:
Table 272:
Table 273:
Table 274:
Table 275:
Table 276:
Table 277:
Table 278:
Table 279:
Table 280:
642
AM050 Relationship between input voltage and converter value........................ 384

AM050 Relationship between output voltage and converter value...................... 384
AM050 variable declaration ................................................................................. 385
AM051 order data................................................................................................ 389
AM051 status LEDs............................................................................................. 391
AM051 Relationship between input current and converter value ........................ 397
AM051 relationship between output current and converter value ....................... 397
AM055 order data................................................................................................ 402
AM055 status LEDs............................................................................................. 404
AM374 order data................................................................................................ 416
AM374 status LEDs............................................................................................. 420
AM374 Relationship between input current and converter value ........................ 427
AM374 relationship between output current and converter value ....................... 428
AM374 Input signal definition for analog inputs 1 and 2...................................... 432
AM374 Input signal definition for analog inputs 3 and 4...................................... 432
AM374 Output signal definition for analog outputs 1 and 2................................. 433
AM374 Output signal definition for analog outputs 3 and 4................................. 433
AM374 input signal for analog inputs 1 and 2 ..................................................... 435
AM374 input signal for analog inputs 3 and 4 ..................................................... 435
AM374 output signal for analog outputs 1 and 2 ................................................. 436
AM374 output signal for analog outputs 3 and 4 ................................................. 436
Temperature module overview ............................................................................ 437
AT350 / AT450 order data ................................................................................... 438
AT350 / AT450 technical data ............................................................................. 438
AT350 / AT450 status LEDs ................................................................................ 439
AT350 pin assignment......................................................................................... 440
AT350 / AT450 data format 1/10 C .................................................................... 444
Table 281:
Table 282:
Table 283:
Table 284:
Table 285:
Table 286:
Table 287:
Table 288:
Table 289:
Table 290:
Table 291:
Table 292:
Table 293:
Table 294:
Table 295:
Table 296:
Table 297:
Table 298:
Table 299:
Table 300:
Table 301:
Table 302:
Table 303:
Table 304:
Table 305:
Table 306:
Table 307:
Table 308:
Table 309:
Table 310:
Table 311:
Table 312:
Table 313:
Table 314:
Table 315:
Table 316:
Table 317:
Table 318:
Table 319:
Table 320:
Table 321:
Table 322:
Table 323:
Table 324:
Table 325:
Table 326:
Table 327:
AT350 / AT450 data format 1/100 C .................................................................. 445

AT350 / AT450 data format 1/10 F (Fahrenheit) ................................................ 446
AT350 open line detection................................................................................... 447
AT450 open line detection................................................................................... 447
AT350 / AT450 variable declaration .................................................................... 447
AT350 / AT450 measurement time...................................................................... 448
AT350 / AT450 scan order definition ................................................................... 449
AT350 / AT450 data format definition.................................................................. 450
AT660 order data................................................................................................. 451
AT660 technical data........................................................................................... 451
AT660 status LEDs.............................................................................................. 454
AT660 signal cable connection............................................................................ 456
AT660 variable declaration.................................................................................. 460
Definition of the Sensor Type .............................................................................. 461
AT660 relationship between mode register 2 and 3 ............................................ 463
General information on other modules ................................................................ 467
UM161 order data................................................................................................ 468
UM161 technical data.......................................................................................... 469
UM161 status LEDs............................................................................................. 471
UM161 pin assignments for terminal block X1 .................................................... 473
UM161 pin assignments for terminal block X2 .................................................... 474
UM161 Relationship between input voltage and converter value........................ 478
UM161 relationship between output voltage and converter value....................... 478
UM161 variable declaration................................................................................. 479
Communication module overview........................................................................ 486
EX282 order data ................................................................................................ 487
EX282 status display ........................................................................................... 489
EX282 status display ........................................................................................... 489
EX282 boot block indicator.................................................................................. 489
EX282 status LED ............................................................................................... 490
EX282 system failure error codes ....................................................................... 490
EX282 station number ......................................................................................... 491
EX282 pin assignments for RJ45 port ................................................................. 492
IF050 interface description .................................................................................. 494
IF050 order data .................................................................................................. 495
IF050 status LEDs ............................................................................................... 496
IF050 RS232 Interface (IF1)................................................................................ 498
IF050 RS232/TTY interface (IF2) ........................................................................ 499
IF050 RS485/RS422 interface (IF3) .................................................................... 500
IF060 interface module inserts ............................................................................ 501
IF060 order data .................................................................................................. 502
IF613 order data .................................................................................................. 503
643
Table Index
Table Index
Table Index
Table 328:
Table 329:
Table 330:
Table 331:
Table 332:
Table 333:
Table 334:
Table 335:
Table 336:
Table 337:
Table 338:
Table 339:
Table 340:
Table 341:
Table 342:
Table 343:
Table 344:
Table 345:
Table 346:
Table 347:
Table 348:
Table 349:
Table 350:
Table 351:
Table 352:
Table 353:
Table 354:
Table 355:
Table 356:
Table 357:
Table 358:
Table 359:
Table 360:
Table 361:
Table 362:
Table 363:
Table 364:
Table 365:
Table 366:
Table 367:
Table 368:
Table 369:
Table 370:
Table 371:
Table 372:
Table 373:
Table 374:
644

IF613 RS232 interfaces (IF2 and IF3) ................................................................. 506
IF621 order data .................................................................................................. 507
IF621 RS485/RS422 interfaces (IF1) .................................................................. 510
IF621 CAN interface (IF2) ................................................................................... 510
IF622 order data .................................................................................................. 511
IF622 RS485/RS422 interface (IF2 and IF3)....................................................... 514
IF661 order data .................................................................................................. 515
IF661 RS485 interface (IF1) ................................................................................ 518
IF671 order data .................................................................................................. 519
IF671 RS485/RS422 interface (IF2) .................................................................... 522
IF671 CAN interface (IF3) ................................................................................... 523
IF672 order data .................................................................................................. 524
IF672 interfaces CAN 1 and CAN 2 (IF2 and IF3)............................................... 527
IF681 order data .................................................................................................. 528
IF681 RS232 interface (IF1) ................................................................................ 531
IF686 order data .................................................................................................. 532
IF686 status display............................................................................................. 533
IF686 boot block indicator ................................................................................... 534
IF686 status LED................................................................................................. 534
IF686 system failure error codes ......................................................................... 535
IF686 station number........................................................................................... 535
IF686 pin assignment for ETHERNET Powerlink interface ................................. 536
IF772 order data .................................................................................................. 537
IF772 CAN 1 and CAN 2 interfaces (IF2 and IF3)............................................... 540
NW150 order data ............................................................................................... 541
NW150 technical data ......................................................................................... 542
NW150 status LEDs ............................................................................................ 543
NW150 baud rates............................................................................................... 545
NW150 RS485 interface...................................................................................... 546
Counter and Positioning Module Overview ......................................................... 547
NC150 order data ................................................................................................ 548
NC150 technical data .......................................................................................... 549
NC150 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 550
NC150 external encoder supply / analog outputs................................................ 552
Table 375:
Table 376:
Table 377:
Table 378:
Table 379:
Table 380:
Table 381:
Table 382:
Table 383:
Table 384:
Table 385:
Table 386:
Table 387:
Table 388:
Table 389:
Table 390:
Table 391:
Table 392:
Table 393:
Table 394:
Table 395:
Table 396:
Table 397:
Table 398:
Table 399:
Table 400:
Table 401:
Table 402:
Table 403:
Table 404:
Table 405:
Table 406:
Table 407:
Table 408:
Table 409:
Table 410:
Table 411:
Table 412:
Table 413:
Table 414:
Table 415:
Table 416:
Table 417:
Table 418:
Table 419:
Table 420:
Table 421:
NC150 counter inputs.......................................................................................... 554

NC150 signal level for counter inputs.................................................................. 555
NC150 variable declaration ................................................................................. 556
NC154 order data ................................................................................................ 566
NC154 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 568
NC154 pin assignments for encoder connections ............................................... 570
NC154 pin assignments for encoder supply /synchronization............................. 570
NC154 pin assignments for I/O connection ......................................................... 571
NC157 minimum cycle time................................................................................. 572
NC157 order data ................................................................................................ 575
NC157 status LEDs ............................................................................................. 577
NC157 pin assignments for trigger supply /synchronization................................ 579
NC157 CAN interface .......................................................................................... 579
NC157 pin assignments for trigger inputs ........................................................... 580
NC352 order data ................................................................................................ 581
NC352 connections for 8-pin terminal blocks (X4) .............................................. 585
NC352 pin assignments for the 9-pin DSUB socket............................................ 585
NC352 specification for 9-pin DSUB plug............................................................ 586
NC352 variable declaration ................................................................................. 588
NC352 coding of position and speed................................................................... 589
NC352 gate measurement mode ........................................................................ 591
NC352 numbering of magnets............................................................................. 593
NC352 types of displays for packed mode. ......................................................... 595
NC352 content of the configuration files.............................................................. 597
Guidelines for configuring the NC352.................................................................. 599
Accessory Overview ............................................................................................ 601
AC240 order data ................................................................................................ 602
AC240 technical data .......................................................................................... 603
Cable NC154 - PC order data ............................................................................. 606
BM150 order data................................................................................................ 607
BM150 technical data .......................................................................................... 607
TB162 order data................................................................................................. 608
TB162 technical data........................................................................................... 608
TB170 order data................................................................................................. 609
Manual Overview................................................................................................. 610
General accessories overview............................................................................. 611
AC401 order data ................................................................................................ 613
AC410 order data ................................................................................................ 614
AC912 order data ................................................................................................ 615
AC913 available versions .................................................................................... 616
AC913 order data ................................................................................................ 616
AC916 order data ................................................................................................ 617
RS485 bus connector order data......................................................................... 618
645
Table Index
Table Index
Table Index
Table 422:
Table 423:
Table 424:
Table 425:
Table 426:
Table 427:
Table 428:
Table 429:
Table 430:
Table 431:
Table 432:
Table 433:
Table 434:
Table 435:
Table 436:
Table 437:
Table 438:
Table 439:
Table 440:
Table 441:
Table 442:
Table 443:
Table 444:
Table 445:
Table 446:
646
AC911 order data ................................................................................................ 619

AC911 technical data .......................................................................................... 619
TB704 order data................................................................................................. 620
TB708 order data................................................................................................. 621
TB710 order data................................................................................................. 622
TB712 order data................................................................................................. 623
TB718 order data................................................................................................. 624
TB108, TB112 and TB124 order data ................................................................. 625
TB108, TB112 and TB124 technical data............................................................ 625
INT1 interface converter order data..................................................................... 626
Overview of standards......................................................................................... 627
The criteria A and B describe the test conditions ................................................ 628
Limits for electrostatic discharge ......................................................................... 628
Limits for electromagnetic fields .......................................................................... 628
Limits for fast transients....................................................................................... 628
Limits for surge .................................................................................................... 628
Limits for conducted disturbances (radio frequency)........................................... 629
Degree of pollution .............................................................................................. 629
Limit values for vibration...................................................................................... 629
Limit values for shock .......................................................................................... 629
Stichwortverzeichnis
A
AC240 ......................................................602
AC401 ......................................................613
AC410 ......................................................614
AC911 ......................................................619
AC912 ......................................................615
AC913 ......................................................616
AC916 ......................................................617
Accessories
B&R SYSTEM 2005 .............................601
AC240 ...............................................602
BM150 ...............................................607
Cable NC154 - PC ............................606
TB162 ...............................................608
TB170 ...............................................609
General Accessories ............................611
AC401 ...............................................613
AC410 ...............................................614
AC911 ...............................................619
AC912 ...............................................615
AC913 ...............................................616
AC916 ...............................................617
INT1 ..................................................626
RS485 Bus Connector ......................618
TB108 ...............................................625
TB112 ...............................................625
TB124 ...............................................625
TB704 ...............................................620
TB708 ...............................................621
TB710 ...............................................622
TB712 ...............................................623
TB718 ...............................................624
AI350 .......................................................313
AI375 .......................................................313
AI775 .......................................................325
AI780 .......................................................337
AM050 .....................................................376
AM051 .....................................................389
AM055 .....................................................402
AM374 .....................................................416
Analog Input Modules ..............................312
AI350 ....................................................313
AI375 ....................................................313
AI775 ....................................................325
AI780 ....................................................337
Analog Mixed Modules ............................ 375

AM050 .................................................. 376
AM051 .................................................. 389
AM055 .................................................. 402
AM374 .................................................. 416
Analog Output Modules ........................... 360
AO350 .................................................. 361
AO360 .................................................. 366
AO775 .................................................. 370
AO350 ..................................................... 361
AO360 ..................................................... 366
AO775 ..................................................... 370
Application memory ................................... 34
AT350 ...................................................... 438
AT450 ...................................................... 438
AT660 ...................................................... 451
B
B&R industrial products
Limits Used .......................................... 627
Safety Notes ........................................... 26
B&R SYSTEM 2000 .................................. 28
Certifications ........................................ 630
Safety Notes ........................................... 26
Standards ............................................. 627
B&R SYSTEM 2005 ...................... 29, 32, 54
Backplane
BP150 .................................................... 89
BP151 .................................................... 89
BP152 .................................................... 89
BP155 .................................................... 89
Dimensions ............................................ 45
Batteries .................................................. 611
Battery Modules
AC240 .................................................. 602
BM150 ..................................................... 607
BP150 ........................................................ 89
BP151 ........................................................ 89
BP152 ........................................................ 89
BP155 ........................................................ 89
Branch Lines, CAN fieldbus ....................... 66
Bus Cable
CAN Fieldbus ......................................... 64
I/O Bus Expansion ......................... 56, 611
Remote I/O Bus ...................................... 59
647
Index
Index
Index
Bus controller ...........................................102
EX150 ...................................................103
EX250 ...................................................109
EX282 ...................................................487
EX350 ...................................................114
IF686 ....................................................532
C
Cable shield grounding ..............................72
Cables
CAN Fieldbus .........................................64
I/O Bus Expansion ..........................56, 611
NC154 - PC ..........................................606
Online Cable .........................................611
Remote I/O Bus ......................................59
CAN Fieldbus .............................................64
Certifications ............................................630
Combination Options
Local I/O Bus ..........................................39
Remote I/O Bus ......................................40
Commissioning a Remote System ...........108
Communication Modules .........................486
EX282 ...................................................487
IF050 ....................................................494
IF060 ....................................................501
IF613 ....................................................503
IF621 ....................................................507
IF622 ....................................................511
IF661 ....................................................515
IF671 ....................................................519
IF672 ....................................................524
IF681 ....................................................528
IF686 ....................................................532
IF772 ....................................................537
NW150 .................................................541
Configuration .............................................54
Configuring a Mixed System
2005 to 2010 ..........................................62
2010 to 2005 ..........................................63
Remote I/O Bus ......................................63
Counter and Positioning Modules ............547
NC150 ..................................................548
NC154 ..................................................563
NC157 ..................................................572
NC352 ..................................................581
648
CP260 ...................................................... 120

CP340 ...................................................... 129
CP360 ...................................................... 129
CP380 ...................................................... 129
CP382 ...................................................... 129
CPUs ....................................................... 118
CP260 .................................................. 120
CP340 .................................................. 129
CP360 .................................................. 129
CP380 .................................................. 129
CP382 .................................................. 129
IF260 .................................................... 145
IP161 .................................................... 154
XP152 .................................................. 176
D
Definition of Terms .................................... 28
DI450 ....................................................... 203
DI475 ....................................................... 216
DI476 ....................................................... 216
DI477 ....................................................... 220
DI486 ....................................................... 226
DI695 ....................................................... 233
DI875 ....................................................... 238
Digital Input Modules ............................... 200
DI450 .................................................... 203
DI475 .................................................... 216
DI476 .................................................... 216
DI477 .................................................... 220
DI486 .................................................... 226
DI695 .................................................... 233
DI875 .................................................... 238
Digital Mixed Modules ............................. 290
DM476 .................................................. 291
DM486 .................................................. 301
Digital Output Modules ............................ 247
DO479 .................................................. 249
DO480 .................................................. 256
DO486 .................................................. 263
DO650 .................................................. 272
DO690 .................................................. 277
DO750 .................................................. 272
DO760 .................................................. 282
Protective Circuit ............................ 75, 247
Index
E
Environmental temperature
Operation ................................................77
Storage ...................................................77
ETHERNET Modules
CP340 ..................................................129
CP360 ..................................................129
CP380 ..................................................129
CP382 ..................................................129
IF681 ....................................................528
ETHERNET Powerlink Modules
EX282 ...................................................487
IF686 ....................................................532
EX150 ......................................................103
EX250 ......................................................109
EX282 ......................................................487
EX350 ......................................................114
Expansion Cable ........................................56
Expansion Master ......................................35
Expansion Slave ..................................35, 98
PS477 ...................................................100
Expansion Slot ...........................................98
Expansions
Local I/O Bus Expansion .....35, 39, 56, 98,
114
Remote I/O Bus ....37, 40, 58, 99, 103, 109
External Protective Circuit .........................75
G
General information ................................... 25
Grounding Measures ................................. 69
Cable shield grounding .......................... 72
DSUB Sockets and Plugs ...................... 73
Grounding terminal strip ......................... 71
Mounting rail ........................................... 70
Grounding terminal strip ............................ 71
I
I/O bus ....................................................... 33
I/O Bus Expansion
See Expansions
I/O Master Controller
EX350 .................................................. 114
IF050 ....................................................... 494
IF060 ....................................................... 501
IF260 ....................................................... 145
IF613 ....................................................... 503
IF621 ....................................................... 507
IF622 ....................................................... 511
IF661 ....................................................... 515
IF671 ....................................................... 519
IF672 ....................................................... 524
IF681 ....................................................... 528
IF686 ....................................................... 532
IF772 ....................................................... 537
Installation
Backplane .............................................. 47
Mounting rail ........................................... 70
PLC Modules .......................................... 48
Safety Notes ........................................... 26
Terminal Block ....................................... 51
Installation Guidelines ............................... 75
INT1 ......................................................... 626
Intelligent Slave ....................................... 108
Interface Modules
See communication modules
IP161 ....................................................... 154
L
Legend
Definition of Terms ................................. 28
Safety Notes ........................................... 27
649
Index
Dimensions
Module Rack ..........................................45
Mounting rail ...........................................46
PLC Modules ..........................................43
DM455 .....................................................186
DM476 .....................................................291
DM486 .....................................................301
DO479 .....................................................249
DO480 .....................................................256
DO486 .....................................................263
DO650 .....................................................272
DO690 .....................................................277
DO750 .....................................................272
DO760 .....................................................282
Documentation .........................................610
DSUB Sockets and Plugs, Use ..................73
Dummy Modules
BM150 ..................................................607
Index
Limit Values .............................................627
Limits Used ..............................................627
Lithium Batteries ......................................611
Local Bus with Expansion ..........................56
Local Bus without Expansion .....................54
Local I/O bus expansion ...35, 39, 56, 62, 98,
114
Manager Module
IF686 ....................................................532
Manual History ...........................................25
Manuals ...................................................610
Mixed modules
Analog ..................................................375
Digital ...................................................290
Module Address .........................................89
Module Layout ...........................................74
Module Overview .......................................79
Module Rack
BP150 .....................................................89
BP151 .....................................................89
BP152 .....................................................89
BP155 .....................................................89
Dimensions .............................................45
Installation ..............................................47
Module Structure .......................................44
Mounting rail
Dimensions .............................................46
Installation ..............................................70
PCMCIA Interface .................................... 125

Power Output Table ................................... 54
Power Supply Modules .............................. 94
PS465 .................................................. 100
PS477 .................................................. 100
PROFIBUS Network .................... 41, 61, 541
PROFIBUS-DP ........................................ 515
Program Memory ....................................... 34
Programmable Logic Controllers ............... 29
Programmable Modules .......................... 185
DM455 .................................................. 186
Programming ........................................... 118
Protective Circuit ............................... 75, 247
Protective Measures .................................. 69
PS465 ...................................................... 100
PS477 ...................................................... 100
N
NC150 ......................................................548
NC154 ......................................................563
NC157 ......................................................572
NC352 ......................................................581
Network
CAN Fieldbus .........................................64
ETHERNET Powerlink .................487, 532
PROFIBUS ...............................41, 61, 541
PROFIBUS-DP .....................................515
Remote I/O Bus ......................................58
RS485 ....................................................61
NW150 .....................................................541
650
Online Cable ............................................ 611

Operated by PLC ....................................... 27
Operating Temperature ............................. 77
Other Modules ......................................... 467
UM161 .................................................. 468
R
Relative humidity ....................................... 77
Remote I/O Bus . 37, 40, 58, 63, 99, 103, 109
Remote Master .......................................... 37
EX150 .................................................. 103
Remote Slave ............................................ 37
EX250 .................................................. 109
RS232/RS485 Interface Converter .......... 626
RS485 Bus Connector ............................. 618
RS485 Network ......................................... 61
S
Safety Guidelines ...................................... 27
Safety Notes .............................................. 26
Design .................................................... 27
Installation .............................................. 26
Intended Use .......................................... 26
Introduction .............................................26
Operation ................................................27
Transport and Storage ...........................26
SG3 and SG4 ............................................28
Shielding Measures ...................................69
Sink Connection .......................................201
Slot .............................................................90
Source Connection ..................................201
Standards ........................................627, 630
Storage ................................................26, 77
System Bus ................................................33
System Configuration and Power Supply
Local Bus with Expansion ......................56
Local Bus without Expansion .................54
Remote I/O Bus ......................................58
System Generation 3 and 4 .......................28
T
TB108 ......................................................625
TB112 ......................................................625
TB124 ......................................................625
TB162 ......................................................608
TB170 ......................................................609
TB704 ......................................................620
TB708 ......................................................621
TB710 ......................................................622
TB712 ......................................................623
TB718 ......................................................624
Temperature
Operation ................................................77
Storage ...................................................77
Temperature Modules ..............................437
AT350 ...................................................438
AT450 ...................................................438
AT660 ...................................................451
Terminal Blocks ................................... 34, 50

B&R SYSTEM 2005
TB162 ............................................... 608
TB170 ............................................... 609
General Accessories
TB108 ............................................... 625
TB112 ............................................... 625
TB124 ............................................... 625
TB704 ............................................... 620
TB708 ............................................... 621
TB710 ............................................... 622
TB712 ............................................... 623
TB718 ............................................... 624
CAN Fieldbus ......................................... 67
Remote I/O Bus ...................................... 60
Transport ................................................... 26
U
UM161 ..................................................... 468
USB interface .......................................... 137
User's Manuals ........................................ 610
W
Wiring
CAN Fieldbus ......................................... 66
I/O Bus Expansion ................................. 56
Remote I/O Bus ...................................... 58
Switching Cabinet .................................. 74
X
XP152 ...................................................... 176
651
Index
Index
Index
652
Bestellnummernindex
0
0AC001.9..................................................611
0AC171.9..................................................611
0AC200.9..................................................611
0AC201.9..................................................611
0AC240.9..................................................602
0AC401.9..................................................613
0AC410.9..................................................614
0AC912.9..................................................615
0AC913.92................................................616
0AC913.93................................................616
0AC916.9..................................................617
0G0001.00-090.........................................611
0G0010.00-090.........................................611
0G0012.00-090.........................................611
0G1000.00-090.........................................618
0G2001.00-090.........................................606
0MC111.9 .................................................611
0MC112.9 .................................................611
0MC211.9 .................................................611
0TB108.91 ................................................625
0TB112.91 ................................................625
0TB124.91 ................................................625
0TB704.9 ..................................................620
0TB704.91 ................................................620
0TB708.91 ................................................621
3
3AI350.6 ...................................................313
3AI375.6 ...................................................313
3AI775.6 ...................................................325
3AI780.6 ...................................................337
3AM050.6 .................................................376
3AM051.6 .................................................389
3AM055.6 .................................................402
3AM374.6 .................................................416
3AO350.6..................................................361
3AO360.60-1 ............................................366
3AO775.6..................................................370
3AT350.6 ..................................................438
3AT450.6 ..................................................438
3AT660.6 ..................................................451
3BM150.9 .................................................607
3BP150.4 ....................................................90
3BP150.41 ..................................................90
3BP151.4.................................................... 90
3BP151.41.................................................. 90
3BP152.4.................................................... 90
3BP152.41.................................................. 90
3BP155.4.................................................... 90
3BP155.41.................................................. 90
3CP260.60-1 ............................................ 120
3CP340.60-1 ............................................ 130
3CP360.60-1 ............................................ 130
3CP380.60-1 ............................................ 130
3CP382.60-1 ............................................ 130
3DI450.60-9.............................................. 203
3DI475.6 ................................................... 216
3DI476.6 ................................................... 216
3DI477.6 ................................................... 220
3DI486.6 ................................................... 226
3DI695.6 ................................................... 233
3DI875.6 ................................................... 239
3DM455.60-2............................................ 186
3DM476.6 ................................................. 291
3DM486.6 ................................................. 301
3DO479.6 ................................................. 249
3DO480.6 ................................................. 256
3DO486.6 ................................................. 263
3DO650.6 ................................................. 272
3DO690.6 ................................................. 277
3DO750.6 ................................................. 272
3DO760.6 ................................................. 282
3EX150.60-1............................................. 103
3EX250.60-1............................................. 109
3EX282.6.................................................. 487
3EX350.6.................................................. 114
3IF050.6 ................................................... 495
3IF060.6 ................................................... 502
3IF260.60-1 .............................................. 146
3IF613.9 ................................................... 503
3IF621.9 ................................................... 507
3IF622.9 ................................................... 511
3IF661.9 ................................................... 515
3IF671.9 ................................................... 519
3IF672.9 ................................................... 524
3IF681.95 ................................................. 528
3IF681.96 ................................................. 528
3IF686.9 ................................................... 532
3IF772.9 ................................................... 537
3IP161.60-1 .............................................. 155
3NC150.6 ................................................. 548
653
Model Number Index
Model Number Index
Model Number Index

3NC154.60-2 ............................................566
3NC157.60-1 ............................................575
3NC352.6..................................................581
3NW150.60-1............................................541
3PS465.9 ..................................................100
3PS477.9 ..................................................100
3TB162.9 ..................................................608
3TB170.9 ..................................................609
3TB170.91 ................................................609
3TB170:90-02 ...........................................609
3TB170:91-02 ...........................................609
3UM161.6 .................................................468
3XP152.60-2.............................................176
5
5CFCRD.0032-01 .....................................611
5CFCRD.0064-01 .....................................611
5CFCRD.0128-01 .....................................611
5CFCRD.0256-01 .....................................611
5CFCRD.0512-01 .....................................611
7
7AC911.9.................................................. 619
7TB710.9 .................................................. 622
7TB710.91 ................................................ 622
7TB710:90-01........................................... 622
7TB710:91-01........................................... 622
7TB712.9 .................................................. 623
7TB712.91 ................................................ 623
7TB712:90-02........................................... 623
7TB712:91-02........................................... 623
7TB718.9 .................................................. 624
7TB718.91 ................................................ 624
7TB718:90-02........................................... 624
7TB718:91-02........................................... 624
E
ECINT1-1.................................................. 626
ECINT1-11................................................ 626
M
MASYS22005-0........................................ 610
MASYS22005-E ....................................... 610
MASYS22005-F........................................ 610
654
Model Number Index
Model Number Index
655
Model Number Index
656
4.0
Version
Manual
User's
2005
SYSTEM
B&R
MASYS22005-E
B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual

2005 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4.

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual

B&R SYSTEM 2005

4.0 (October 2003)

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

Chapter 1: General Information

Chapter 3: B&R 2005 Modules

Chapter 5: Standards and Certifications

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

Model Number Index

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

Chapter 1: General Information ..................................................... 25

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

Chapter 2: Installation .................................................................... 43

Chapter 3: B&R 2005 Modules ....................................................... 79

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

Chapter 4: General Accessories ................................................. 611

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

Chapter 5: Standards and Certifications .................................... 627

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

General Information Manual History

Chapter 1 General Information

Model No. and Product ID

Update, new modules included (AI780, CP340, CP380, CP382,

Update, new modules included (AO360, CP360, DO486, DM486,

Update, new modules included

Update, new modules included

Table 1: Manual history

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

General Information Safety Guidelines

2.2 Intended Use

2.3 Transport and Storage

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

2.6 Safety Notices

Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can be life-threatening.

Table 2: Safety guidelines

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

General Information Safety Guidelines

General Information Definition of Terms

System Generation 3 (SG3) - CPUs with Motorola processors.

System Generation 4 (SG4) - CPUs with Intel processors.

Table 3: Definition of Terms

4. B&R SYSTEM 2000 Controller Generation

Figure 1: B&R SYSTEM 2000

B&R SYSTEM 2005 User's Manual V4.0

General Information B&R SYSTEM 2000 Controller Generation

4.1 B&R SYSTEMS 2005 Characteristics

Communication interfaces to HMI

PLC and industrial computer functionality

EMC according to EN61131-2

Secure I/O bus protocol